LRT Design Criteria PDF

LRT Design Criteria
THIS DOCUMENT WAS THE CURRENT

REVISION WHEN ISSUED IN HARD COPY,
CHECK THE ELECTRONIC FILE ON THE
SANDAG WEBSITE TO ASSURE YOU HAVE THE
CURRENT REVISION PRIOR TO USE.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
LRT Design Criteria Manual
Revision Record
REVISION RECORD
LRT DESIGN CRITERIA MANUAL
REV. REV. SECTION (S)
NO DATE AFFECTED COMMENTS
0 3/14/14 All Initial Issue
March 2014
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1.0 SPECIAL CIVIL WORK FOR LRT .............................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Drainage .......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Project Hydrology ................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.2 Drainage Discharge in Trackway .......................................................... 1-1
1.1.2.1 Ballasted Track ................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2.2 Grade Crossings ................................................................. 1-2
1.2 Utilities for LRT ................................................................................................ 1-2
1.2.1 Traction Power Requirements .............................................................. 1-2
1.2.2 Design Requirements for Underground Utilities ................................... 1-2
1.2.3 Risk Assessment .................................................................................. 1-2
1.3 Right-of-Way Requirements for LRT ................................................................ 1-2
1.3.1 At-Grade Construction .......................................................................... 1-2
1.3.1.1 General ............................................................................... 1-2
1.3.1.2 Height Limits ....................................................................... 1-3
1.3.1.3 Lateral Limits....................................................................... 1-3
1.3.2 Aerial Construction ............................................................................... 1-3
1.3.3 Drainage and Utility Easements ........................................................... 1-3
1.3.4 Traction Power Substations .................................................................. 1-3
1.3.5 Right-of-Way Safety ............................................................................. 1-4
1.3.5.1 Access ................................................................................ 1-4
1.3.5.2 Means of Egress ................................................................. 1-4
2.0 LRT STATIONS .......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Site Layout ....................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Platform General Circulation and Access ............................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Bus and Parking Circulation Access ..................................................... 2-1
2.2 Service Access ................................................................................................ 2-2
2.3 Platform Geometry ........................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.1 Platform Length .................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2 Platform Height..................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.3 Platform Width ...................................................................................... 2-2
2.3.4 Grade ................................................................................................... 2-3
2.4 Station Amenities ............................................................................................. 2-5
March 2014 i
Table of Contents
2.4.1 Shelters ................................................................................................ 2-5

2.4.2 Public Information Communications ..................................................... 2-5
2.4.2.1 Signs - General ................................................................... 2-5
2.4.2.2 Signs - Track ID .................................................................. 2-7
2.4.2.3 Station Identification Signs .................................................. 2-7
2.4.2.4 Tactile Signs ....................................................................... 2-7
2.4.2.5 Fare Paid Zone Signs ......................................................... 2-7
2.4.2.6 Advance Station Signs ........................................................ 2-7
2.4.2.7 Miscellaneous Directional Signs .......................................... 2-7
2.4.2.8 Variable Messaging System (See Section 6.9) and
Public Address (See Section 6.8) ........................................ 2-7
2.4.2.9 Transit Next Bus Messaging System (TNBMS) ................... 2-7
2.4.2.10 Information Sign Frames ..................................................... 2-7
2.5 Fare Collection (See Fare Collection Technology, Section 6.10)...................... 2-8
2.6 Station System (See Communications, Chapter 6.0) ....................................... 2-8
2.7 Electrical .......................................................................................................... 2-8
2.7.1 General ................................................................................................ 2-8
2.7.2 Electrical Service .................................................................................. 2-8
2.7.3 Electrical Distribution System ............................................................... 2-9
2.7.3.1 Panelboards ...................................................................... 2-10
2.7.3.2 Circuit Breakers ................................................................ 2-10
2.7.3.3 Conduits............................................................................ 2-10
2.7.3.4 Pull Boxes ......................................................................... 2-10
2.7.3.5 Conductors and Cables ..................................................... 2-11
2.7.3.6 Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment .................................. 2-11
2.7.4 Grounding .......................................................................................... 2-11
2.7.5 Lighting .............................................................................................. 2-12
2.7.5.1 General ............................................................................. 2-12
2.7.5.2 Contactors and Controls ................................................... 2-12
2.7.6 Utilization Voltages ............................................................................. 2-12
2.8 Ventilation for Subterranean Station .............................................................. 2-13
2.9 Fire Protection, Alarm, and Emergency Management Systems...................... 2-13
2.10 Fire/Life Safety (Elevated or Underground Station) ........................................ 2-15
ii March 2014
Table of Contents
3.0 TRACKWORK ............................................................................................................ 3-1

3.1 Alignment and Clearance ................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 General ................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1.1 Alignment ............................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1.2 Clearance ........................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Horizontal Alignment ............................................................................ 3-2
3.1.2.1 Horizontal Clearances ......................................................... 3-2
3.1.2.2 Minimum Clearances .......................................................... 3-2
3.1.2.3 Standard Clearances .......................................................... 3-2
3.1.2.4 Adjustments ........................................................................ 3-5
3.1.2.5 Emergency Walkways ......................................................... 3-5
3.1.3 Tangent Alignment ............................................................................... 3-6
3.1.4 Curved Alignment ................................................................................. 3-6
3.1.4.1 Circular Curves ................................................................... 3-6
3.1.4.2 Minimum Radii .................................................................... 3-9
3.1.4.3 Minimum Length of Circular Curve ...................................... 3-9
3.1.4.4 Spiral Transition Curves ...................................................... 3-9
3.1.4.5 Minimum Length ................................................................. 3-9
3.1.4.6 Curves without Spirals ...................................................... 3-10
3.1.4.7 Compound Circular Curves ............................................... 3-10
3.1.4.8 Superelevation .................................................................. 3-12
3.1.5 Vertical Alignment .............................................................................. 3-13
3.1.6 Vertical Grade .................................................................................... 3-14
3.1.6.1 Grade Rates and Lengths ................................................. 3-14
3.1.6.2 Mainline ............................................................................ 3-14
3.1.6.3 Stations ............................................................................. 3-14
3.1.6.4 Yard and Secondary Tracks .............................................. 3-14
3.1.7 Vertical Curve ..................................................................................... 3-15
3.1.7.1 Mainline ............................................................................ 3-15
3.1.7.2 Ride Quality ...................................................................... 3-15
3.1.7.3 Stations ............................................................................. 3-15
3.1.7.4 Compound Vertical Curves ............................................... 3-15
3.1.7.5 Combined Vertical and Horizontal Curves ......................... 3-16
March 2014 iii

Table of Contents
3.1.8 Vertical Clearance .............................................................................. 3-16

3.1.9 Joint LRT/Freight Rail Corridor ........................................................... 3-16
3.1.9.1 Freight Clearance ............................................................. 3-16
3.1.9.2 Freight Loading ................................................................. 3-16
3.1.9.3 Temporal Separation......................................................... 3-16
3.1.9.4 State of California ............................................................. 3-16
3.2 Mainline Track ............................................................................................... 3-18
3.2.1 Subgrade............................................................................................ 3-18
3.2.2 Geotextile Fabrics .............................................................................. 3-19
3.2.3 Sub-Ballast ......................................................................................... 3-19
3.2.4 Ballast ................................................................................................ 3-20
3.2.5 Corrosion............................................................................................ 3-20
3.2.5.1 Standard Stray Current Corrosion Control ......................... 3-21
3.2.6 Concrete Cross Ties ........................................................................... 3-21
3.2.7 Timber Cross Ties .............................................................................. 3-22
3.2.8 Rail ..................................................................................................... 3-23
3.2.8.1 Running Rail ..................................................................... 3-23
3.2.8.2 High Strength Rail ............................................................. 3-23
3.2.8.3 Restraining Rail................................................................. 3-23
3.2.9 Rail Welding and Joints ...................................................................... 3-24
3.2.9.1 Continuous Welded Rail .................................................... 3-24
3.2.9.2 Bolted (Non-Welded) Rail Joints ....................................... 3-25
3.2.10 Emergency Guardrail.......................................................................... 3-25
3.2.11 Rail Seats and Fasteners ................................................................... 3-25
3.2.11.1 Timber Crossties ............................................................... 3-25
3.2.11.2 Concrete Crossties............................................................ 3-26
3.2.11.3 Direct Fixation ................................................................... 3-26
3.2.12 Track Access ...................................................................................... 3-27
3.2.13 Noise and Vibration ............................................................................ 3-28
3.3 Special Trackwork.......................................................................................... 3-28
3.4 Other than Mainline Track .............................................................................. 3-29
3.4.1 Yard Track.......................................................................................... 3-29
3.4.1.1 Ballast ............................................................................... 3-29
iv March 2014
Table of Contents
3.4.1.2 Cross Ties ......................................................................... 3-30

3.4.1.3 Rail ................................................................................... 3-30
3.4.1.4 Restraining Rail ................................................................. 3-30
3.4.1.5 Rail Joints ......................................................................... 3-30
3.4.1.6 Special Trackwork ............................................................. 3-30
3.4.1.7 Paved Trackwork .............................................................. 3-30
3.4.2 Shop Trackwork ................................................................................. 3-31
3.4.3 Bumping Posts ................................................................................... 3-31
3.5 Highway-Railway Crossings ........................................................................... 3-31
3.5.1 PUC Requirements ............................................................................ 3-32
4.0 TRACTION POWER ................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Environmental Requirements ........................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Applicable Documents ..................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 Standard Plans ................................................................................................ 4-3
4.4 Acceptance Testing and Measurements .......................................................... 4-3
4.4.1 Test Documents ................................................................................... 4-4
4.4.2 Test Plan .............................................................................................. 4-4
4.4.3 Test Procedures ................................................................................... 4-5
4.4.4 Test Reports......................................................................................... 4-5
4.4.5 Field Test Categories ........................................................................... 4-5
4.5 Compatibility with the Existing Systems ........................................................... 4-6
4.6 Energized System ............................................................................................ 4-6
4.7 Technical Design Reports ................................................................................ 4-6
4.8 System Design Requirements .......................................................................... 4-7
4.8.1 Operational Criteria .............................................................................. 4-7
4.8.2 Minimum Voltage Criteria ..................................................................... 4-8
4.8.3 Criteria for Contingency Operations...................................................... 4-8
4.8.4 Criteria for Light Rail Vehicle (LRV) Storage Facilities .......................... 4-8
4.8.5 Load Flow Analysis of the Traction Electrification System (TES) .......... 4-8
4.8.6 Stray Current Mitigation ........................................................................ 4-9
4.8.7 Traction Power System Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition ..... 4-10
4.8.8 Transfer Trip System ......................................................................... 4-11
4.9 Traction Power Substations ........................................................................... 4-11
March 2014 v
Table of Contents
4.9.1 Substation Site Selection.................................................................... 4-11

4.9.2 Substation Site Requirements ............................................................ 4-12
4.9.2.1 Substation Grounding Requirements................................. 4-13
4.9.2.2 Concrete Slab Foundation and Fencing ............................ 4-14
4.9.2.3 Utility Power Supply .......................................................... 4-14
4.9.2.4 Substation Site Conduits ................................................... 4-15
4.9.2.5 Visibility Requirement........................................................ 4-16
4.9.3 Yard and Shop Substations ................................................................ 4-16
4.9.4 Setting the Substation On-Site ........................................................... 4-16
4.9.5 Terminations of Exterior Equipment.................................................... 4-16
4.9.6 House Power ...................................................................................... 4-16
4.9.7 SCADA ............................................................................................... 4-17
4.9.8 Traction Power Substations ................................................................ 4-17
4.9.8.1 Mode of Operation and Design.......................................... 4-17
4.9.8.2 Stray Current Drainage Facilities....................................... 4-17
4.9.8.3 DC Surge Arresters ........................................................... 4-17
4.9.9 Negative Grounding System Protection .............................................. 4-17
4.10 DC Distribution System .................................................................................. 4-18
4.10.1 Yard and Shop Traction Power Facilities ............................................ 4-21
4.10.2 Raceways........................................................................................... 4-21
4.10.3 Positive Feeder System...................................................................... 4-22
4.10.4 Negative Distribution System.............................................................. 4-24
4.11 Overhead Contact System ............................................................................. 4-25
4.11.1 General .............................................................................................. 4-25
4.11.1.1 OCS Limits ........................................................................ 4-25
4.11.1.2 OCS Electrical Requirements ............................................ 4-25
4.11.1.3 Minimum Resistance-To-Earth Requirements ................... 4-25
4.11.1.4 OCS Crossover Requirements .......................................... 4-25
4.11.1.5 OCS Overlap Requirements.............................................. 4-25
4.11.1.6 Length of Tension Sections for Auto Tension Catenary ..... 4-26
4.11.1.7 Separation from Aerial Utilities .......................................... 4-26
4.11.2 Support System .................................................................................. 4-26
4.11.2.1 Pole and Down-Guy Foundations...................................... 4-27
vi March 2014
Table of Contents
4.11.2.2 Foundation Design ............................................................ 4-27

4.11.2.3 Elevation of Pole Foundations ........................................... 4-27
4.11.2.4 Poles and Moment Resisting Frames ................................ 4-27
4.11.2.5 Pole and Frame Description .............................................. 4-28
4.11.2.6 Grounding of Poles and Frames........................................ 4-28
4.11.2.7 Location of Poles and Frames ........................................... 4-28
4.11.2.8 Cantilever Supports........................................................... 4-29
4.11.2.9 Head-Spans ...................................................................... 4-29
4.11.2.10 Down-Guys ....................................................................... 4-29
4.11.3 Catenary Suspension ......................................................................... 4-29
4.11.3.1 Selection of Catenary Suspension System ........................ 4-29
4.11.3.2 CPUC Requirements......................................................... 4-30
4.11.3.3 Catenary Conductors Requirements ................................. 4-30
4.11.3.4 Pantographs...................................................................... 4-31
4.11.3.5 Clearance Envelopes and Wire Stagger............................ 4-31
4.11.3.6 Contact Wire Heights ........................................................ 4-32
4.11.3.7 Contact Wire Profiling ....................................................... 4-32
4.11.3.8 Messenger Wire Heights ................................................... 4-33
4.11.3.9 Design Span Lengths ........................................................ 4-34
4.11.3.10 Design Tensions for Auto-Tension (AT) Catenary ............. 4-35
4.11.3.11 Design Tensions for Fixed-Tension (FT) Catenary ............ 4-35
4.11.3.12 Tensioning Methods .......................................................... 4-35
4.11.3.13 Lightning Arrestor Assemblies ........................................... 4-36
4.11.3.14 Midpoint Anchors .............................................................. 4-36
4.11.3.15 Wire Cross Assemblies ..................................................... 4-36
4.11.3.16 Additional Requirements for Full and Low Profile
Catenary ........................................................................... 4-36
4.11.3.17 Additional Requirements for Tunnel Catenary ................... 4-37
4.12 Stray Current/ Reduction Methods ................................................................. 4-37
4.12.1 Stray Current Reduction ..................................................................... 4-37
4.13 Atmospheric Corrosion Control ...................................................................... 4-37
4.13.1.1 General ............................................................................. 4-37
4.13.1.2 Traction Power Substation Enclosures .............................. 4-37
March 2014 vii

Table of Contents
5.0 RAILWAY SIGNALING AND INDICATION SYSTEMS ............................................... 5-1

5.1 General ............................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1 Environmental ...................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Acceptance Testing and Measurements ............................................... 5-2
5.1.2.1 Test Documents .................................................................. 5-2
5.1.2.2 Test Plan............................................................................. 5-2
5.1.2.3 Test Procedures.................................................................. 5-3
5.1.2.4 Test Reports ....................................................................... 5-3
5.1.2.5 Test Categories................................................................... 5-3
5.1.2.6 Compatibility with the Existing Systems .............................. 5-4
5.2 Non Signalized Right-of-Way ........................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1 Trolley and Traffic Signal Interface ....................................................... 5-4
5.2.2 Switch Controls and Indications............................................................ 5-5
5.3 Railway Signaling in Semi-Exclusive or Exclusive Right-of-Way ...................... 5-6
5.3.1 General ................................................................................................ 5-6
5.3.1.1 Applicable Documents ........................................................ 5-6
5.3.1.2 Fail-safe Design .................................................................. 5-7
5.3.1.3 Failure Modes ..................................................................... 5-7
5.3.1.4 Equipment Failures and Conditions ..................................... 5-8
5.3.1.5 Drawings, and Manuals, and Training Requirements .......... 5-8
5.3.1.6 Operating Requirements ................................................... 5-10
5.3.1.7 Electrical Compatibility ...................................................... 5-10
5.3.2 Block Signaling ................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.2.1 Interlocked Control Circuits at Turnout Crossover and
Double Crossovers............................................................ 5-11
5.3.2.2 Requesting and Processing Routes .................................. 5-11
5.3.2.3 Non-Powered Turnout, Crossover, and Double
Crossover ......................................................................... 5-13
5.3.2.4 Restrictions to Block Control Logic .................................... 5-13
5.3.2.5 Clear Block ....................................................................... 5-13
5.3.2.6 Wayside Signals ............................................................... 5-14
5.3.2.7 Permissive Block ............................................................... 5-14
5.3.2.8 Beginning and Ending ABS ............................................... 5-14
March 2014 i
Table of Contents
5.3.2.9 Track Circuits .................................................................... 5-14

5.3.2.10 Raceway Requirements .................................................... 5-15
5.3.2.11 Cabling Requirements....................................................... 5-16
5.3.2.12 Relay Design..................................................................... 5-17
5.3.2.13 Electric Switch and Lock Movements for Mainline
Switches ........................................................................... 5-19
5.3.2.14 Electric Switch Locks with Point Detectors for Main Line
Switches ........................................................................... 5-20
5.3.2.15 Main Line Switch Stands and Targets ............................... 5-21
5.3.2.16 Equipment Enclosures ...................................................... 5-21
5.3.2.17 Push-Button Control Stands .............................................. 5-22
5.3.2.18 Programmable Logic Controllers ....................................... 5-22
5.3.2.19 Vital Logic Controllers ....................................................... 5-22
5.3.2.20 Event Recorders ............................................................... 5-23
5.3.2.21 Train-to-Wayside Communications (TWC) ........................ 5-24
5.3.2.22 Block and Interlocking Signal Numbering Requirements ... 5-24
5.3.2.23 Layout Design Requirements ............................................ 5-25
5.3.3 Special Condition Indications.............................................................. 5-30
5.4 Grade Crossing Warning System ................................................................... 5-31
5.4.1 Circuit Design Requirements .............................................................. 5-33
5.4.2 Crossing Equipment Layout Design Requirements............................. 5-35
5.4.3 Utilization of Existing Equipment ........................................................ 5-37
5.5 Power ............................................................................................................ 5-37
5.6 Interface Requirements .................................................................................. 5-37
5.6.1 General .............................................................................................. 5-37
5.6.2 Civil Facilities ..................................................................................... 5-37
5.6.3 Trackwork........................................................................................... 5-38
5.6.4 Vehicles ............................................................................................. 5-38
5.6.5 Power ................................................................................................. 5-38
5.6.6 Traction Power Substations ................................................................ 5-38
5.6.7 OCS ................................................................................................... 5-38
5.6.8 Wide Area Network and Local Area Network ...................................... 5-38
5.6.9 Traffic Signals .................................................................................... 5-39
ii March 2014
Table of Contents
6.0 COMMUNICATIONS ................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 General ............................................................................................................ 6-2
6.1.1 Communications Systems Overview .................................................... 6-3
6.1.1.1 Digital Communications ...................................................... 6-3
6.1.1.2 Vehicle to Wayside Wi-Fi Wireless Local Area Network
Communications ................................................................. 6-4
6.1.1.3 Voice Radio Communication System ................................. 6-4
6.1.2 Definitions and Terms........................................................................... 6-5
6.1.3 Environment ......................................................................................... 6-8
6.1.4 Regulations, Codes, and Standards ................................................... 6-10
6.1.5 Industry Standard Practices................................................................ 6-11
6.1.6 Testing, Commissioning, and Acceptance Requirements ................... 6-11
6.2 Operations Control Center ............................................................................. 6-11
6.2.1 Operations Control Center - Centralized Train Control ....................... 6-11
6.2.2 Evaluation of OCC Facility Modifications Required to
Support Territorial Expansion ............................................................. 6-12
6.2.3 Design Development of OCC Facility Modifications Required to
Support Territorial Expansion ............................................................. 6-14
6.3 Station Communications Enclosures, Buildings, and Rooms ......................... 6-14
6.3.1 General .............................................................................................. 6-14
6.3.1.1 Grounding and Surge Suppression ................................... 6-14
6.3.1.2 Programmable Logic Controller ......................................... 6-14
6.3.1.3 Locating Communications Cabinets or Buildings............... 6-15
6.3.1.4 Communications Cabinet, Building and
Room Foundations ............................................................ 6-15
6.3.2 Communications Cabinet, Building and Room at Standard Stations ... 6-16
6.3.2.1 Communications Cabinet -
Three Bay Communications Enclosure ............................. 6-16
6.3.2.2 Communications Enclosure -
Prefabricated Communications Building ............................ 6-20
6.3.2.3 Communications Room ..................................................... 6-28
6.3.3 Communications Enclosures at Enclosed or Non-Standard Stations .. 6-35
6.4 Wide Area Network Communications ............................................................. 6-35
6.4.1 Network Architecture .......................................................................... 6-35
6.4.1.1 Vital Wide Area Network ................................................... 6-36
March 2014 iii

Table of Contents
6.4.1.2 Non-Vital WAN .................................................................. 6-36

6.4.2 WAN SMF Cabling ............................................................................. 6-37
6.4.3 WAN Modifications and Equipment Procurement and Installation ...... 6-38
6.4.4 WAN Design....................................................................................... 6-39
6.5 Local Area Network Communications ............................................................ 6-39
6.5.1 Network Architecture .......................................................................... 6-39
6.5.2 LAN Ethernet Cables .......................................................................... 6-39
6.5.3 LAN SMF Cabling ............................................................................... 6-39
6.5.4 Cable Tags ......................................................................................... 6-40
6.5.5 LAN Design ........................................................................................ 6-41
6.6 Cabling Raceways and Access Points ........................................................... 6-41
6.6.1 Cabling Raceways Paralleling the Trackway Except Under Stations .. 6-41
6.6.1.1 Riser Pole Raceways ........................................................ 6-42
6.6.1.2 Cable Tray Raceways ....................................................... 6-42
6.6.1.3 Underground Conduit Raceways....................................... 6-43
6.6.1.4 Railway Signaling Communications and Power Cabling
Through Stations ............................................................... 6-43
6.6.1.5 Station Non-vital WAN and LAN Raceway System............ 6-43
6.6.2 Raceway Materials and Installation .................................................... 6-45
6.6.3 Access Points ..................................................................................... 6-48
6.7 Network Cabling Standard ............................................................................. 6-48
6.8 Public Address ............................................................................................... 6-49
6.8.1 General Description ............................................................................ 6-49
6.8.2 Noise Assessments ............................................................................ 6-50
6.8.3 Layout and Standards ........................................................................ 6-50
6.8.4 Technical and Performance Characteristics ....................................... 6-51
6.8.5 Stations in Enclosed Structures .......................................................... 6-52
6.8.5.1 Supervision and Alarms .................................................... 6-52
6.8.5.2 Enclosed Station System Input Priorities ........................... 6-52
6.8.6 Operation Control Center Remote Access .......................................... 6-52
6.8.7 Ethernet Connection in Enclosed Station............................................ 6-53
6.8.8 Connection to Cabling to Amplifier in Enclosed Station ...................... 6-53
6.8.9 Connection to Cabling to Speakers in Enclosed Station ..................... 6-53
iv March 2014
Table of Contents
6.9 Visual Messaging System .............................................................................. 6-53

6.9.1 General .............................................................................................. 6-53
6.9.2 Description ......................................................................................... 6-54
6.9.3 Location VMS Signs, Frames, and Foundations ................................. 6-54
6.9.4 Communications Provisions ............................................................... 6-55
6.9.5 Electrical Provisions ........................................................................... 6-56
6.9.6 Raceways and Pullboxes ................................................................... 6-56
6.9.7 VMS Messaging ................................................................................. 6-56
6.10 Fare Collection Technology ........................................................................... 6-57
6.10.1 General .............................................................................................. 6-57
6.10.2 Locating Ticket Vending Machines and Passenger Card
Interface Devices................................................................................ 6-57
6.10.3 Ticket Vending Machine Equipment Pads and Connections ............... 6-58
6.10.4 Passenger Card Interface Device Connections .................................. 6-58
6.10.5 Permanent Ticket Kiosks and Portable Ticket Trailers ........................ 6-59
6.11 Traction Power System SCADA ..................................................................... 6-60
6.12 Signaling System SCADA .............................................................................. 6-60
6.13 Bi-Directional Train to Wayside Communications ........................................... 6-60
6.13.1 General .............................................................................................. 6-60
6.13.2 Equipment Compatibility ..................................................................... 6-61
6.13.3 TWC Loop Antenna and Loop Converter ............................................ 6-61
6.13.4 Interrogators ....................................................................................... 6-61
6.13.5 Communications Card ........................................................................ 6-62
6.13.6 Serial Output/Input Card ..................................................................... 6-62
6.14 Electrical Grounding and Power Surge Protection.......................................... 6-62
6.15 Uninterruptible Power System and Power Generation Facilities ..................... 6-64
6.15.1 Topology ............................................................................................ 6-65
6.15.2 Batteries ............................................................................................. 6-65
6.15.3 Voltages ............................................................................................. 6-65
6.15.4 Battery Charging ................................................................................ 6-65
6.16 Temperature Sensing, Intrusion Detection, and TWC Processing System ..... 6-65
6.17 Bicycle Locker Networking Provisions ............................................................ 6-66
6.18 Axel Counters ................................................................................................ 6-66
March 2014 v
Table of Contents
6.19 Vehicle to Wayside Wi-Fi Wireless Local Network Communications .............. 6-66
6.20 Voice Radio Communication System ............................................................. 6-66
6.20.1 RCS Upgrades to Accommodate New Territory.................................. 6-67
6.20.2 Existing RCS Frequencies .................................................................. 6-68
6.20.3 Additional Radio Frequencies ............................................................. 6-69
6.20.4 Transmitters ....................................................................................... 6-69
6.20.5 Receivers ........................................................................................... 6-69
6.20.6 Portable Radios .................................................................................. 6-70
6.20.7 Mobile Radios .................................................................................... 6-70
6.20.8 Operation Control Center ................................................................... 6-70
6.21 Video Surveillance Systems ........................................................................... 6-70
6.22 Phone Service Provisions and Public Pay Phones ......................................... 6-73
6.22.1 Payphone Services ............................................................................ 6-73
6.22.2 Elevator Emergency Phone ................................................................ 6-74
6.22.3 Phone Company Interface .................................................................. 6-74
6.23 Electromagnetic Compatibility ........................................................................ 6-74
6.24 Fixed Double Sided Information Signs ........................................................... 6-75
6.25 Transit Next Bus Messaging System (TNBMS) .............................................. 6-75
6.26 Interactive Kiosks ........................................................................................... 6-75
6.27 Enclosed Stations within Structures ............................................................... 6-75
6.27.1 Fire Detection Systems ...................................................................... 6-76
6.27.2 Fire Alarms and Emergency Response and Management Systems ... 6-76
7.0 VEHICLES .................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1 General ............................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 Operations ....................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.1 Operating Hours ................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.2 Consists ............................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.3 Signaling System and Train to Wayside Communications .................... 7-1
7.2.4 Train Speed.......................................................................................... 7-1
7.2.5 Annual Mileage..................................................................................... 7-2
7.3 Vehicle Design Constraints .............................................................................. 7-2
7.3.1 Safety Requirements ............................................................................ 7-2
7.3.2 Weight Criteria...................................................................................... 7-2
vi March 2014
Table of Contents
7.3.2.1 Weight Distribution .............................................................. 7-3

7.3.3 Vehicle Identification ............................................................................ 7-3
7.3.4 Wayside Noise Control/Criteria............................................................. 7-3
7.3.5 Electrical Noise Control Requirements ................................................. 7-3
7.3.5.1 Radio Frequency Interference Limits ................................... 7-4
7.3.5.2 Electromagnetic Interference .............................................. 7-4
7.3.5.3 Conductive Emission Limits ................................................ 7-4
7.3.6 Smoke and Flammability Requirements .............................................. 7-4
7.3.7 Provisions for Individuals with Disabilities ............................................. 7-4
7.4 Vehicle Clearances .......................................................................................... 7-5
7.5 Vehicle Dimensions ......................................................................................... 7-5
7.6 LRV Loading (lbs) ............................................................................................ 7-9
7.7 Electrical ........................................................................................................ 7-10
7.8 Vehicle Performance...................................................................................... 7-10
7.8.1 Acceleration Requirements................................................................. 7-11
7.8.2 Speed Requirements .......................................................................... 7-11
7.8.3 Deceleration Requirements ................................................................ 7-11
7.8.3.1 Service Brake.................................................................... 7-11
7.8.3.2 Emergency Brake ............................................................. 7-12
7.8.3.3 Parking Brake ................................................................... 7-13
7.8.4 Towing Requirements......................................................................... 7-13
7.8.5 Jerk Limit ............................................................................................ 7-13
7.8.6 Wheel Slip/Slide Protection ................................................................ 7-13
7.8.7 Load Weight System .......................................................................... 7-14
7.8.8 Mode Change Dead Times ................................................................. 7-14
7.9 Car Body ........................................................................................................ 7-15
7.9.1 Strength Requirements....................................................................... 7-15
7.9.2 Roof ................................................................................................... 7-15
7.9.3 Jacking and Hoisting Provisions ......................................................... 7-15
7.9.4 Wheelchair Accommodations ............................................................. 7-15
7.10 Couplers and Draft Gear ................................................................................ 7-16
7.10.1 Mechanical Couplers .......................................................................... 7-16
7.10.2 Draft Gears......................................................................................... 7-16
March 2014 vii

Table of Contents
7.10.3 Electrical Couplers ............................................................................. 7-16

7.11 Operator’s Cab .............................................................................................. 7-16
7.11.1 Operator’s Console ............................................................................ 7-16
7.11.2 Bypass and Cutout Switches .............................................................. 7-16
7.12 Passenger Doors ........................................................................................... 7-16
7.12.1 Normal Operation ............................................................................... 7-17
7.12.2 Emergency Operation......................................................................... 7-17
7.13 Air Comfort System ........................................................................................ 7-17
7.14 Lighting System ............................................................................................. 7-17
7.14.1 Interior Lighting................................................................................... 7-18
7.14.2 Exterior Lighting ................................................................................. 7-18
7.14.3 Emergency Lighting ............................................................................ 7-18
7.15 Auxiliary Electrical Equipment ........................................................................ 7-18
7.15.1 Power Collection ................................................................................ 7-18
7.15.2 Auxiliary Power Supply ....................................................................... 7-18
7.15.3 Low-Voltage DC Power Supply .......................................................... 7-19
7.15.4 Storage Battery .................................................................................. 7-19
7.15.5 Emergency Loads .............................................................................. 7-19
8.0 LRV MAINTENANCE FACILITIES .............................................................................. 8-1
8.1 General ............................................................................................................ 8-1
8.2 Design Codes and Standards .......................................................................... 8-1
8.2.1 Building Code ....................................................................................... 8-1
8.2.2 Permitting ............................................................................................. 8-1
8.3 Basic Design Process ...................................................................................... 8-2
8.3.1 Basis of Design Statement ................................................................... 8-2
8.4 Yard and Shop Facilities .................................................................................. 8-2
8.4.1 Daily Service ........................................................................................ 8-2
8.4.2 Running Repair .................................................................................... 8-2
8.4.3 Heavy Repair ....................................................................................... 8-3
8.4.4 Yard Operations ................................................................................... 8-3
8.4.5 Yard Layout .......................................................................................... 8-3
8.4.6 Lighting ................................................................................................ 8-4
8.4.6.1 Building Lighting .................................................................. 8-4
viii March 2014

Table of Contents
8.4.6.2 Vehicle Storage Lighting ..................................................... 8-4

8.4.6.3 Illumination Plan .................................................................. 8-4
8.5 Vehicle Storage ............................................................................................... 8-4
8.5.1 General ................................................................................................ 8-4
8.5.2 Storage Capacity .................................................................................. 8-5
8.5.3 Parking and Service Roads .................................................................. 8-5
8.6 Maintenance .................................................................................................... 8-5
8.6.1 General ................................................................................................ 8-5
8.6.2 Vehicle Maintenance ............................................................................ 8-6
8.6.2.1 General Criteria................................................................... 8-6
8.6.3 Machinery and Equipment .................................................................... 8-7
8.6.4 Vehicle Cleaning Area .......................................................................... 8-7
8.6.4.1 Daily Interior Cleaning ......................................................... 8-7
8.6.4.2 Heavy Interior Cleaning ....................................................... 8-7
8.6.4.3 Exterior Vehicle Wash ......................................................... 8-8
8.6.5 Maintenance Inspection........................................................................ 8-9
8.6.5.1 Configuration of Floor and Workspace ................................ 8-9
8.6.5.2 Utility Requirements ............................................................ 8-9
8.6.5.3 Special Equipment ............................................................ 8-10
8.6.5.4 Design Requirements........................................................ 8-10
8.6.6 Minor (Running) Repairs .................................................................... 8-10
8.6.7 Major Repairs and Component Change Out ....................................... 8-10
8.6.7.1 Configuration of Floor and Work Space............................. 8-10
8.6.7.2 Utility Requirements .......................................................... 8-10
8.6.8 Wheel Truing ...................................................................................... 8-11
8.6.8.1 Configuration of Floor and Work Space............................. 8-11
8.6.9 Vehicle Body Repairs ......................................................................... 8-12
8.6.9.1 Configuration of Work Area for Minor Damage Repairs ..... 8-12
March 2014 ix
Table of Contents

8.6.10 Vehicle Painting.................................................................................. 8-13
8.6.10.1 Paint Booth ....................................................................... 8-13
8.6.11 Vehicle Sanding ................................................................................. 8-13
8.6.11.1 Configuration of Work Area ............................................... 8-13
8.6.12 Material Storage ................................................................................. 8-14
8.6.13 Central Maintenance, Operations and Administrative Areas ............... 8-14
8.6.13.1 Shop Ancillary Areas ......................................................... 8-14
8.6.14 Building Support Facilities .................................................................. 8-15
8.6.14.1 Administrative Offices ....................................................... 8-15
8.6.14.2 Training/Conference Rooms ............................................. 8-15
8.6.14.3 Utility Power Room............................................................ 8-15
8.6.14.4 Personnel Facilities ........................................................... 8-15
8.6.14.5 Janitor Facilities ................................................................ 8-15
8.6.15 Central Maintenance and Operations Area ......................................... 8-15
8.6.16 Central Control Area ........................................................................... 8-16
8.6.17 Emergency System Requirements ..................................................... 8-16
8.6.17.1 Safety Systems ................................................................. 8-16
8.6.18 Utility Needs ....................................................................................... 8-16
8.6.19 Building Systems ................................................................................ 8-16
8.6.20 Security .............................................................................................. 8-17
x March 2014
List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 2-1. – Typical Station Dimensioning (Plan View) .......................................................... 2-4

Figure 2-2. – Typical Station Dimensioning (Section View) ..................................................... 2-5
Figure 2-3. – Typical Station Signage Configuration ............................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-4. – Typical Layout for Means of Egress (Elevated Structure Shown) ..................... 2-16
Figure 3-1. – Static and Dynamic Envelopes ........................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3-2. – Circular/Spiral Functions and Abbreviations ....................................................... 3-7
Figure 3-3. – Compound Curves and Combining Spiral Formulas and Abbreviations............ 3-11
Figure 3-4. – Superelevation (Ea) .......................................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3-5. – Typical Subgrade Configurations ..................................................................... 3-19
Figure 3-6. – Typical Concrete Tie Configuration (Dimensions Vary) .................................... 3-22
Figure 3-7. – Restraining Rail Detail...................................................................................... 3-24
Figure 3-8. – Typical Rail Fastener for Concrete Tie ............................................................. 3-26
Figure 4-1. – Typical Traction Power Substation Layout ....................................................... 4-13
Figure 4-2. – TPSS Single Line Diagram with 4 DC Breaker ................................................ 4-19
Figure 7-1. – U2 and SD100 Vehicle Dimensions ................................................................... 7-6
Figure 7-2. – SD7 Vehicle Dimensions .................................................................................... 7-7
Figure 7-3. – SD8 Vehicle Dimensions .................................................................................... 7-8
March 2014 xi
List of Tables
List of Tables
Table 4-1. – Clearance Envelopes and Wire Stagger Requirements ..................................... 4-31
Table 5-1. – Stopping Distance for LRV ................................................................................ 5-28
Table 5-2. – Stopping Distance for Freight Train ................................................................... 5-29
Table 6-1. – Environmental Operating Range ......................................................................... 6-9
Table 6-2. – Input Priorities ................................................................................................... 6-52
Table 6-3. – RCS Frequencies .............................................................................................. 6-68
Table 7-1. – Vehicle Identification and Numbering .................................................................. 7-3
Table 7-2. – Wayside Noise Control/Criteria ........................................................................... 7-3
xii March 2014

Terms and Abbreviations

The following acronyms, initialisms, and short forms are used in this report.
List of Terms Acronyms

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AASHTO
Advanced Conceptual Engineering ACE
Americans with Disabilities Act ADA
Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines ADAAG
Area of Potential Effect APE
Advanced Planning Study APS
California Department of Transportation Caltrans
California Environmental Quality Act CEQA
Conditional Letter of Map Revisions CLMR
California Public Utilities Commission CPUC
Design-Build DB
Design-Bid-Build DBB
Disadvantaged Business Enterprise DBE
Environmental Assessment EA
Environmental Consultant EC
Environmental Protection Agency EPA
Federal Emergency Management Agency FEMA
Full Funding Grant Agreement FFGA
Finding of No Significant Impact FONSI
Federal Transit Administration FTA
Interstate 5 I-5
Intergovernmental Agreement IGA
Joint Use and Maintenance Agreement JUMA
Housing and Urban Development HUD
Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design LEED
Letter of Invitation LOI
Letter of Map Revisions LOMR
Letter of No Prejudice LONP
Los Angeles-San Diego-San Luis Obispo Rail Corridor LOSSAN
Locally Preferred Alternative LPA
Light Rail Transit LRT
Master Cooperative Agreement MCA
San Diego Metropolitan Transit System MTS
March 2014 xiii

Terms and Abbreviations (Continued)

Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices MUTCD
North County Transit District NCTD
National Environmental Policy Act NEPA
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA
Notice of Availability NOA
Notice of Intent NOI
National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System NPDES
Notice to Proceed NTP
National Transportation Safety Board NTSD
Overhead Contact System OCS
Office of Equal Opportunity Programs OEOP
Oversight Procedure OP
Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA
Old Town Transit Center OTTC
Preliminary Engineering PE
Professional Engineer P.E
Preliminary Engineering/Environmental Consultant PEC
Preliminary Hazard Analysis PHA
Public Involvement Plan PIP
Project Manager PM
Project Management Consultant PMC
Project Management Oversight Contractor PMOC
Project Management Plan PMP
Project Report PR
Project Study Report PSR
Project Working Group PWG
Quality Assurance / Quality Control QA/QC
Quality Management Plan QMP
Quarterly Review Meeting QRM
Risk and Contingency Management Plan RCMP
Request for Proposal RFP
Right-of-Way ROW
Signals and Communications S&C
San Diego Association of Governments SANDAG
xiv March 2014

Terms and Abbreviations (Continued)

Small Business Enterprise SBE
Standard Cost Categories SCC
San Diego Gas and Electric SDGE
San Diego and Imperial Valley Railroad SD&IV
San Diego Transit Corporation SDTC
San Diego Trolley Inc. SDTI
Subsequent Environmental Impact Report SEIR
Supplemental Environmental Impact Statement SEIS
State Historic Preservation Office SHPO
State Route 52 SR 52
System Safety Certification Plan SSCP
Safety and Security Management Plan SSMP
Safety and Security Officer SSO
State Safety Oversight Agency Subsurface Utility Exploration SSOA
Storm Water Management Plan SWMP
Technical Advisory Committee TAC
Temporary Construction Easement TCE
Traction Electrification System TES
Transportation Investment Generating Economic Recovery TIGER
Traction Power TP
Traction Power Sub station TPSS
Threat and Vulnerability Analysis TVA
Ticket Vending Machine TVM
Utility Cooperative Agreement UCO
University of California at San Diego UCSD
Union Pacific Railroad UPRR
United States Code USC
United States Department of Transportation USDOT
United States Green Building Council USGBC
University Towne Centre UTC
Veteran’s Affairs VA
Year of Expenditure YOE
March 2014 xv
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
xvi March 2014

Chapter 1.0 – Special Civil Work for LRT
1.0 SPECIAL CIVIL WORK FOR LRT

All civil work shall comply with the general design criteria given in Volume 1 of this manual as
well as the following special criteria as it applies to LRT design:
1.1 Drainage
1.1.1 Project Hydrology
All design parameters shall comply with Volume 1, Project Hydrology.
1.1.2 Drainage Discharge in Trackway

All design parameters for drainage analysis shall comply with Volume 1 – Civil Work,
“Drainage” Section.
1.1.2.1 Ballasted Track

In general, drainage for ballasted trackway shall be designed to provide, at a minimum, the
following:
• Water and drainage onto the trackway shall be collected into a system designed to
convey the water off the right-of-way into a natural or urban drainage system;
• Prevent standing water along the right-of-ways and prevent contamination of ballast;
• Be sized to accommodate water entering the right-of-way from new or existing
slopes draining toward the tracks;
• Include facilities for collecting and diverting drainage into the trackway drainage
system. Facilities shall include, but not be limited to, brow ditches on slopes, down
drains, energy dissipaters, and detention/retention basins. Detention/retention
basins, if needed, will be designed so that retained water does not encroach within
10 feet of the centerline of any track.
Subgrade under tracks, to the toe of the ballast shoulder, will be sloped to drain water away
from the tracks and into the trackway drainage system. The standard subgrade transverse
slope shall be 1:40 (see Section 3.2.1 – “Subgrade”). .
For trackway drainage, surface drainage is preferred using earth swales where practical.
Lined swales shall be specified where water velocity would cause erosion or where the slope
is less than 0.5 percent and lining is required to ensure positive drainage. An underground
drainage system of inlets and underground pipe (underdrains) may be used for trackway
drainage where surface drains are not feasible. Except for underdrains, pipes conveying
trackway drainage under the tracks shall be reinforced concrete, minimum of 18 inches in
diameter. These pipes shall have concrete headwalls and aprons or inlet/outlet structures on
both ends of the pipe to prevent erosion. Inlets shall be precast or cast-in-place concrete and
have grate covers that prevent ballast and debris from entering the drain.
Underdrains and perforated underground drains are discouraged as a system to collect

trackway drainage. Underdrains may be used, if required, with the approval of the project
manager. Underdrains shall conform to the requirements of Volume 1, – Civil Work, “Project
1-1 March 2014

Hydraulics” Section. If underdrains are used, the design shall include invert information for all
pipes and cleanouts/manholes for each system segment.
The designer shall, by overlaying project plans, ensure that the trackway drainage system
facilities are not in conflict with, or obstructed by other project elements including, but not
limited to, catenary poles, switches, signal cases, and traction power-vaults.
1.1.2.2 Grade Crossings

At grade crossings, street drainage shall be intercepted immediately up gradient of the grade
crossing and conveyed into the natural or urban drainage system. The street drainage may
be intercepted and conveyed into the trackway drainage system, with the approval of the
SANDAG Project Manager if this is the only feasible alternative for addressing street
drainage. The designer shall calculate the size of the inlets and pipe in accordance with the
requirements of the local agency.The designer shall use the local agency standards and
plans to design and specify drainage facilities. The designer of the drainage system shall
work with the design team, including the signal engineers, to ensure that drainage structures
are not located in the way of crossing warning and traffic signal system equipment.
1.2 Utilities for LRT

1.2.1 Traction Power Requirements
Each traction power substation shall be fed from separate distribution circuits. Adjacent
traction power substations shall not be fed from the same grid unless otherwise approved by
the SANDAG Director of Rail. For additional requirements regarding traction power design,
refer to Chapter 5 –Traction Power.
1.2.2 Design Requirements for Underground Utilities

All wet utilities 30 inches or less in diameter, other than drainage crossing, shall be in steel
casings as mentioned in Volume 1 – Civil Work, “Design Requirements for Underground
Utilities Section”. Casing under LRT tracks and across LRT right-of-way shall not be less
than 35.5 feet from the base of the LRT rail to the top of the casing at its closest point.
1.2.3 Risk Assessment

The designer shall prepare a risk assessment on all utilities within or proposed to be located
within the railroad Right-of-Way, within the project limits. The risk assessment will evaluate
potential impact of utility failure on SANDAG/MTS operations and identify alternatives to
mitigate risk including relocation, removal or reinforcement. The risk assessment shall
identify the utility owner and property rights associated with the utility.
1.3 Right-of-Way Requirements for LRT

1.3.1 At-Grade Construction
1.3.1.1 General
The designer shall recommend right of way requirements for LRT guideway based on track
centers, grade, cross slope, catenary configuration, signal and grade crossing protection
equipment, drainage facilities, construction and maintenance access. Development of right-
of-way recommendation would require coordination between various design disciplines as
1-2 March 2014

well as MTS maintenance personnel. The designer shall in general attempt to minimize right
of way cost and area required for a project. The designer shall consider maintenance,
clearance, working room and inspection requirements when establishing right of way limits.
The designer shall consider realignment, retaining walls, structures and other design
alternatives to avoid expensive right of way impacts for approval by SANDAG. Right-of-way
for joint use of track where heavy rail is involved shall incorporate criteria set forth in Section
3.1.9 – “Joint LRT/Freight Rail Corridor”.
Catenary poles including assemblies, substations, signal cabinets, grade crossing protection
devices and other rail infrastructure facilities shall be placed inside the existing or proposed
guideway right of way limits wherever possible. Where these facilities cannot be designed
within the guideway limits, additional right of way shall be identified. To the extent possible
the additional right of way shall be contiguous with the guideway right of way limits. Where
the additional right of way cannot be contiguous, legal access to a public right of way shall be
provided.
1.3.1.2 Height Limits

California Public Utilities Commission General Order No. 95 and 26 D must be used to
determine the minimum aerial right of way easements or use restrictions for encroachments
over the railroad right of way for any proposed encroachments as part of a SANDAG project
or project proposed by an outside entity.
1.3.1.3 Lateral Limits

The minimum width of right-of-way for a level track cross-section, including the trackbed and
the catenary system support poles, is 35 feet for open track areas.
Tracks placed in streets shall have a minimum right-of-way width of 27 feet.
1.3.2 Aerial Construction

Right-of-way for LRT bridges and viaducts shall not be less than the width of the structure
plus two feet on either side of the drip line of the bridge, but shall be greater as needed for
maintenance and inspection. Right of way for aerial structures shall include legal access
from public right of way to all columns and abutments. California Public Utilities Commission
General Order No. 95 must be used to determine vertical right of way required between the
overhead catenary system and any height limiting structure.
1.3.3 Drainage and Utility Easements

LRT facilities shall avoid existing drainage or utility easements where possible.
1.3.4 Traction Power Substations

Right-of-way required for traction power substations shall include legal access from a public
street or the railroad right of way to a substation site with sufficient area to provide a level pad
in a size to accommodate substation configuration including ground mats and perimeter
fencing. Typical sizes for substation sites are given in Section 4.9 – “Traction Power
Substations”. Substations may also be placed in secured locations at LRT station sites.
1-3 March 2014

1.3.5 Right-of-Way Safety

1.3.5.1 Access
The general public shall be prohibited from entering restricted or non-pubic ROW areas
through the use of barriers and signs. Access to restricted ROW areas shall be limited to
authorized personnel and vehicles only, including operations and maintenance personnel,
other agencies with specific access requirements such as utility companies, and emergency
response teams.
1.3.5.2 Means of Egress

By no means shall any barrier inhibit egress of the general public, within a publicly accessible
area, to an area of safety. Egress from a publicly accessible area into any designated area of
safety shall be clearly identified per Title 24, Part 2, Volume 1, Section 1114B.2.
1-4 March 2014

Chapter 2.0 – LRT Stations
2.0 LRT STATIONS

LRT stations shall be designed to fit the operational and community environment. Station
design shall consider patron load, access and exiting requirements, accessibility, fare
collection, safety and security, sight line visibility, cover, amenities and where applicable
intermodal connections, parking and joint development. Station concepts shall be prepared
as part of the project development phase of a project.
Stations shall be on constant grade tangent track. Track grade through a station shall be 0.5
percent preferred and maximum 2 percent. All tracks shall have the same elevation and
profile. Any variance from these requirements shall require approval as a separate design
deviation or deviation included in a basis of design report.
Typical station layout consists of two outside platforms, one for each direction of train travel.
At high volume stations, a center platform in conjunction with side platforms (see Section 2.3
–“Platform Geometry”) shall be provided as approved in project development by the
SANDAG Project Manager.
General design criteria for LRT stations shall comply with Volume 1 – Transit Centers.
Additional criteria specific to LRT stations are as follows:
2.1 Site Layout

2.1.1 Platform General Circulation and Access
LRT station platforms shall be designed to facilitate good pedestrian and wheelchair
movement and access. Platforms shall have a minimum of an 8 foot setback to any
obstructions from the loading edge of platform. Platform design shall minimize obstructions
and channelize access to encourage safe, convenient and direct patron access to loading
areas. Platform design shall place fare vending and validation equipment at station access
points in a manner that provides visibility to the equipment without creating obstructions.
At-grade stations shall be open ballast track for the full length of the platform with precast or
placed concrete pedestrian crossings at the ends of the platform and two mid-platform
crossings 180 feet apart symmetrical to the center of the platform. ADA compliant curb
ramps and crossings shall be provided at each end crossing of the platforms. The two mid-
platform crossings shall not have curb ramps (See Figure 2-1).
At-grade stations at locations expected to have high volumes of pedestrian crossings

between platforms such as: urban center environments, stations with large special event
crowds, or in areas where the trackway outside the station limits is paved, shall have fully
paved trackway for the full length of the platform.
Aerial stations shall have removable pre-cast concrete panels in the trackway, for the full
length of the platform.
2.1.2 Bus and Parking Circulation Access

LRT stations with bus routes onto the station and parking lots shall be designed to encourage
safe, convenient, and direct patron access between the bus and parking areas to the platform
2-1 March 2014

loading areas. Access from bus bays, bus islands, on-street bus stops and parking areas
shall be designed to maximize accessibility; buses shall have at least one ADA compliant
path of travel to the platform loading areas. Stations with parking shall include ADA
compliant parking spaces, and as directed kiss-and-ride parking that has full ADA
accessibility between the parking area and the platform loading areas.
2.2 Service Access

Station platforms shall be designed to maximize access for revenue collection, maintenance,
security and emergency response vehicles, while at the same time discouraging access by
private vehicles. The design shall consider the following:
• Access points shall be clearly marked with signage indicating authorized personnel
only;
• Lockable and movable barriers such as swing gates, chains, or bollards shall only be
installed as directed by the SANDAG Project Manager and with the concurrence of
MTS;
• Lockable, movable barriers shall not be used in areas of access for emergency
response vehicles;
• Service access for fare collection vehicles shall be as close to the platform at-grade
or station access locations for aerial stations as feasible and provide a clear line of
sight to the fare vending equipment.
2.3 Platform Geometry

Stations shall be located on tangent track. If horizontal curves are approved by design
exception, tracks shall not be superelevated. Side platforms shall be used in LRT stations
unless site-specific factors, such as clearances or right-of-way limits, prevent their use (See
Figures 2-1 and 2-2 for typical station layout). Center platforms will require the approval of the
SANDAG MMPI Director of Rail. Stations at junctions or with high passenger or special
event loads shall be considered for center loading platforms in conjunction with side loading
platforms.
2.3.1 Platform Length

Platforms shall be 360 feet in length to accommodate a four-car train.
2.3.2 Platform Height

Top of platform at boarding edge (or curb height) from top of rail profile shall be a uniform 8-
inch along entire length of platform. Top of platform means the finished top of curb elevation.
2.3.3 Platform Width

The minimum standard platform width shall be 15 feet. The platforms, mezzanines, and
passenger assembly areas shall be sized based on the reasonably expected maximum
demand, using 6squared feet of space per person. If a platform's only exit is across the
tracks, the platform should be wide enough to accommodate a full-train load of people (see
Section 7.6 – “LRV Loading” for car loading capacities). The absolute minimum width for a
2-2 March 2014

platform is 10.5 feet. Any width other than 15 feet will require the approval of the SANDAG
Director of Rail.
The front edge of the platform curb line shall be 4 feet-10 inches from the centerline of the
adjacent track.
2.3.4 Grade
Track and platforms shall have a uniform straight grade through the full length of the platform
and end of station crossings. The preferred longitudinal grade is 0.5 percent for ballast track.
The maximum longitudinal grade through a platform shall not exceed 2 percent, except
where a station is at a location with existing track or street grades in excess of 2 percent; in
these locations station grade shall match the existing. Stations shall not be placed on grades
in excess of 4 percent. The maximum cross slope on the platform shall not exceed 2
percent. Platform shall slope away from the boarding edge unless a drainage system is
provided in the trackway, and aerial stations slope towards the trackway. Grades for curb
ramps and any other ramps included on the platform shall comply with current ADA
requirements (see Volume 1 – Transit Centers, “General Circulation and Access –
Pedestrian Circulation” Section).
2-3 March 2014

Figure 2-1. – Typical Station Dimensioning (Plan View)
2-4 March 2014

Figure 2-2. – Typical Station Dimensioning (Section View)
2.4 Station Amenities

2.4.1 Shelters
In general, shelter design shall comply with Volume 1 – Transit Centers, “Shelters” Section.
Where stations are limited in space or service a low volume of patrons, one shelter may be
used on each platform.
2.4.2 Public Information Communications

(Note: Public Information Communications criteria shall also apply to transit centers)
2.4.2.1 Signs - General

Station signs shall be designed in coordination with MTS. The location and mounting details
for all signs shall be called out in the plans and comply with the general layout as shown on
Figure 2-3 and the MTS Sign Design Guidelines Manual. If possible, station signs will be
mounted to light poles at a height of 8-11 ft. Other station appurtenances such as public
address speakers shall be placed so as not to conflict with sign locations.
2-5 March 2014

Station signage shall have a minimum clear head room of 7 feet and vehicle clearance
requirements. Station signage shall comply with ADAAG Sections 4.4.2, and 4.30.1 through
7, and 10.3.1 (4), (5), (6), California Accessibility Reference Manual (CARM) Section 61,
California Title 24, Part 2, Volume 1, Sections 1103.1.4, 1117B.5, and 1127B.3, and
California Public Utilities Commission General Orders 26-D and 143-B as applicable.
Figure 2-3. – Typical Station Signage Configuration
2-6 March 2014

2.4.2.2 Signs - Track ID

At stations with more than two platforms, signs designating track numbers may be required.
2.4.2.3 Station Identification Signs
Station identification signs shall be placed on each station platform to inform persons on the
train what station they are arriving in. Identification signs shall be parallel to the LRT tracks,
facing station platforms, and shall be located roughly every 60 feet. Each station
identification sign shall be accompanied by a station number sign.
2.4.2.4 Tactile Signs
One tactile sign shall be located on each platform, at the back of platform directly behind the
directional bar mat (Volume 1 – Architectural Treatments, “Directional Bar Mat” Section). The
tactile signs will repeat information given on the station destination and station identification
signs. The tactile signs shall have raised letters or numerals accompanied with Grade 2
Braille, in accordance with ADAAG, Sections 10.3.1 (4), 10.3.1 (6), 4.30.4, and 4.30.6.
Because they are within reach of the public, and therefore subject to above average levels of
theft, the tactile signs shall be welded or otherwise securely fastened to their supports with
tamperproof hardware.
2.4.2.5 Fare Paid Zone Signs

Fare paid zone signs shall be located at all access points to the platform, and along the
platform to ensure that individuals are aware of the requirement to possess a ticket. The
signs shall be consistent with sign procurement specifications from previous SANDAG LRT
projects. As directed by the SANDAG Project Manager, fare paid zones may also be
indicated with a distinctive change in pavement color or texture.
2.4.2.6 Advance Station Signs

Advance station signs shall be placed along the right-of-way, on catenary poles,
approximately 400 feet to 500 feet from each station and facing the travel direction of the
approaching train. These signs shall notify the LRT operator of the upcoming station so an
announcement can be made to passengers in advance of the station stop. Advance signs
shall be placed to face oncoming LRVs as shown in Figure 2-3. For sign lettering
specifications, mounting requirements, and height, refer to operator requirements.
2.4.2.7 Miscellaneous Directional Signs

Other signs shall be included to direct patrons to accessible routes, major nearby attractions,
and various station facilities. Station signs shall be located with consideration for other station
amenities and landscaping to assure that a clear line-of-sight is provided.
2.4.2.8 Variable Messaging System (See Section 6.9) and Public Address (See Section 6.8)
2.4.2.9 Transit Next Bus Messaging System (TNBMS)
MTS has certain routes equipped with a Next Bus Messaging System. Trolley stations
designated transfer or transit centers or stations with dedicated bus bays within the station
limits shall be designed with power and communications conduit from the Next Bus sign
locations to a cabinet or connection point for this system.
2.4.2.10 Information Sign Frames

Each station shall have at least one double sided information sign frame per platform,
typically located near the fare vending machines. Design plans shall show the location of the
2-7 March 2014

sign frames and reference the SANDAG standard sign frame drawing. Where non-standard
sign frames need to be designed to accommodate specific station conditions, the designer
shall provide a detailed design. To the extent feasible, non-standard frames shall be similar
in design to standard sign frames in size and construction.
2.5 Fare Collection (See Fare Collection Technology, Section 6.10)

2.6 Station System (See Communications, Chapter 6.0)
2.7 Electrical
2.7.1 General
Stations shall be provided with an electrical service, service equipment, and distribution
systems designed to supply power to electrical loads associated with the station. The
station’s loads will typically consist of lighting systems, revenue equipment, communications
systems, convenience receptacles, and irrigation systems. Additionally loads that may
require an electrical service, as part of the Station’s electrical design, include Railway
Signaling and Indicating Systems equipment, and vendor provided equipment.
The Station’s electrical design shall be in accordance with the latest effective version of the
California Electrical Code (CEC), California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 3; SDG&E’s
Service Standards & Guide; the “Environmental Operating Range”, Table 6.1; and with the
requirements identified within these design criterions.
Electrical equipment shall be in accordance with Section 6.1.4 - “Regulations, Codes, and
Standards”.
2.7.2 Electrical Service

An electrical service shall be designed to provide power for the present and anticipated future
loads. The electrical service equipment shall house the utility revenue meter and be provided
with a main circuit breaker type disconnect switch, a bolt-on type circuit breaker panelboard,
and lighting contactor and controls. When present, Railway Signaling and Indicating Systems
equipment and vendor provided equipment shall be powered from individual utility revenue
meters and main circuit breaker type disconnect switches. An exception to this requirement
is for vending machines located on or adjacent to the Station’s platforms which are permitted
to be powered by dedicated branch circuits from the Station’s panelboard. The designer shall
verify the presence of all electrical loads associated with the station and provide a design for
the electrical service and equipment. The design shall include the following, as a minimum:
• Service Equipment and Wiring Diagram: This shall be based on Caltrans’ Standard
Plans and Standard Specifications, except as modified below, for services with up to
two 200 amp utility revenue meters. For services with more than two 200 amp utility
revenue meters or of larger ampacity, the design shall be for custom engineered
service equipment with the appropriate number of utility revenue meters, main circuit
breaker type disconnect switches, panelboard(s), and other required equipment.
The minimum service equipment ampacity for a Station is 200 amps. Modifications
to the Caltrans Standard Specifications for service equipment include the following:
– Service equipment, including panelboard and ancillary equipment contained therein,
shall be rated for a minimum fault current or 42,000 amps.
2-8 March 2014

– Service equipment enclosures shall be shall be manufactured from Type 304

stainless steel, 14-gauge minimum.
• Load Calculations and Panelboard Schedule(s): The load calculations shall show the
total service ampacity at the rated voltage and number of phases, the load(s) to be
served by each utility revenue meter/ main circuit breaker type disconnect switch
pair, and for any new station’s electrical service, it shall include the calculated loads
plus 20 percent spare usable ampacity, but shall not be less than 200 amps.
Panelboard schedules shall explicitly identify the loads served, as required by the
CEC Article 408, and show assumptions used to determine loads on each circuit.
• Electrical Plan: A design drawing shall be provided which shows the location of the
service equipment, identifies associated conduits, pull boxes and conductors, and in
general, complies with the requirements for Section 6.3.1.3 - “Locating
Communications Enclosures”. In addition, the drawing shall identify work required
for the electrical service based on SDG&E’s requirements.
Additions or modifications to existing electrical systems, and designs requiring a new

electrical service shall be coordinated with the SANDAG Utility Coordinator in accordance
with Volume 1 – Civil Work, “Utilities” Section. As a minimum, the design information
identified above shall be provided to the SANDAG Utility Coordinator. The Plans shall identify
the required AIC rating for circuit breakers. Typically, a 42 kAIC is available at the service
from SDG&E and shall be verified by the designer. A short circuit current analysis shall be
done to determine the appropriate rating.
2.7.3 Electrical Distribution System

The electrical design shall include an electrical distribution system to provide power to the
Station’s various pieces of electrical and communications equipment requiring power. As a
minimum, the distribution system shall consist of a circuit breaker panelboard, fed from the
electrical service, conduits, conductors, and pull boxes. The Station’s conduits will typically
consist of a main ductbank of direct buried or concrete encased 3-inch conduits routed from
end-to-end of each of the Station’s platforms with an interconnection between platforms to
allow conductors to be routed from their point of origin to the electrical and communications
utilization equipment.
The ductbanks will contain conductors and cables from electrical and communications
systems installed in conduits and associated pull boxes for each of the two systems. The
separation into systems will be determined by operating voltages and as required by the CEC
Articles 725, 770, 800, and 830. Typically separation is 50 volts and greater-electrical, less
than 50 volts-communications.
The ductbank design shall allow for the future addition of conductors and cables by supplying
empty conduits, a minimum of one 3 inch conduit in each main ductbank run or segment.
The ductbanks installed along the length of the platform with have pull boxes installed at the
platforms’ ends, off of the platforms for future access, and at midpoint of the platforms, as a
minimum.
The ductbanks are to be installed in or under the Station’s platforms.
2-9 March 2014

The ductbank will also contain conduits from the main ductbank’s pull boxes to the various
pieces of electrical and communications utilization equipment for the routing of conductors.
Refer to Chapter 6 – Communications for additional distribution system requirements for

communications equipment.
2.7.3.1 Panelboards
Panelboards shall be sized for the connected loads, including anticipated future loads, and
shall have usable spare spaces or installed spare circuit breakers, shall have 20 percent
minimum spare usable capacity, shall not be less than 200 amps, and contain a minimum of
24 branch circuit spaces for the Station’s main panelboard. Bus bars shall be 98 percent
conductive copper conforming to ASTM B187, and contact surfaces shall be silver plated.
2.7.3.2 Circuit Breakers

Circuit breakers shall be of suitable ratings and type to protect conductors and electrical and
communications utilization equipment from the effects of short circuits, or overloads. Circuit
breakers shall be 80 percent rated, molded case, quick-make/quick-break bolt-on type,
thermal magnetic type trip with interchangeable trip units for circuit breakers rate 125
amperes and above, and comply with the requirements of UL 489. The design shall indicate
the ampere-rating, number of poles, and interrupting capacity on the plans.
GFCI circuit breakers shall be used for the Stations’ platforms duplex receptacle circuits in
conformance with the CEC Article 210.
2.7.3.3 Conduits
Conduit and fittings shall comply with and be of the types identified in the Caltrans Standard
Specifications, Section 86, “Conduit”. Direct buried or concrete encased conduits shall be
Caltrans Type 3. Exposed conduits shall be Caltrans Type 1. Caltrans Type 4 conduit shall
be used in exposed locations where the conditions require flexibility, not as a substitute for
conduit bends or fittings.
The design shall show and identify existing conduits sizes, if applicable, and new conduit
sizes and types with proposed routings. The use of “homeruns” does not satisfy this
requirement. Conduit sizes shall be based on the fill requirements of the CEC Chapter 9,
Table 1. The minimum size for direct buried or concrete encased conduits is 1 inch, and
typical main ductbank conduits shall be a 3-inch.
Bell end shall be provided on Caltrans Type 3 conduits not terminated to an enclosure, and
grounding type bushings or hubs shall be provided on Caltrans Type 1 conduits
A pull tape shall be provided in each spare or unused conduit.
Refer to Chapter 6 – Communications for additional conduit requirements.
2.7.3.4 Pull Boxes

Pull boxes shall be traffic rated and comply with the Caltrans Standard Plans and Standard
Specifications, Section 86, “Pull Boxes”, or comply with the SDG&E Standard 3313 detail,
and as identified herein. Pull boxes shall be installed flush with platforms or other pedestrian
walkways.
2-10 March 2014

Plastic or non-concrete pull boxes are not acceptable.
Pull box cover markings shall include the text “MTS” and text identifying the type of system
conductors or cables contained therein. Typical system types are:
• Electrical
• Communications
• Lighting
• Signal
• Fiber Optic
Pull boxes installed for the installation of utility conductors or cables shall be in accordance
with the utility companies’ requirements.
The design shall identify the pull box types, sizes, and systems. Pull box sizing shall comply
with the CEC Article 314.
2.7.3.5 Conductors and Cables

Electrical power circuit conductors shall comply with the Caltrans Standard Specifications,
Section 86, “Circuit Conductors” and CEC Articles 200, 210, 215, and 310.
The design shall identify conductor sizes and quantities. Conductor sizing shall account for
temperature, conduit fill, and voltage drop adjustment factors. Voltage drops shall be limited
to 3 percent for feeders and branch circuits with as a maximum total voltage drop for feeders
and branch circuits of 5 percent.
Conductors and cables shall be continuous between terminations, without splices, except as
permitted. Permitted splices shall be with junction boxes, pull boxes, hand holes or other
accessible locations. Permitted splices include taps for lighting circuits, and receptacle
branch circuits. The request for splicing for other wiring will require SANDAG approval.
Refer to Chapter 6 - Communications for additional conductor and cable requirements for
communications equipment.
2.7.3.6 Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment

Each of the station’s platforms will be provided with three receptacles, in lockable,
weatherproof enclosures, distributed along the length of the platforms. The receptacles
will be connected to GFCI type circuit breakers. The receptacles shall be Commercial
Specification Grade, weather resistant, NEMA Type 2-20R.
2.7.4 Grounding
The design shall provide a Grounding Plan that identifies the requirements for a Grounding
Electrode System (GES) as defined in the CEC, Article 250 and complies with the Caltrans
Standard Plans and Standard Specifications, Section 86, “Bonding and Grounding”. The
GES shall provide a continuous low impedance connection to the grounding electrodes and
exposed structural steel elements of the station, such as passenger shelters, that may
become energized. Metal benches under or within six feet of passenger shelters shall be
2-11 March 2014

bonded to the GES. In addition, the GES shall be connected to the Communications
system’s ground grid. Refer to Chapter 6 – Communications for additional grounding
requirements.
The GES shall consist of at least one ground rod housed within an accessible ground well at
or near the electrical service equipment, the grounding electrode conductor, and other
available grounding electrodes and bonding connections. The GES shall include bonding
connections to the electrical service equipment, Communication Enclosure or Building
ground grid, and electrical pull boxes and enclosures. The GES shall be tested by the
Contractor in conformance with the “fall of potential” method described in IEEE Bulletin No.
82, using a Biddle “Earth Megger” or a SANDAG approved equivalent method and test
procedure. Should the test results show that the ground resistance is not less than 5 ohms,
then additional grounding material (e.g. ground rods, cables, exothermic connections) shall
be added to reduce the ground resistance to less than 5 ohms.
Electrical conduits shall contain an Equipment Grounding Conductor (EGC) sized and
installed as required by CEC Article 250. The EGC conductor shall be insulated.
2.7.5 Lighting
2.7.5.1 General
Stations shall be provided with adequate lighting systems powered by the electrical
distribution system. The lighting systems shall be in accordance with Volume 1 –
Architectural Treatments, “Lighting” Section.
2.7.5.2 Contactors and Controls

Lighting contactors and photoelectric controls shall be the Caltrans Type V and equipment
shall be in accordance with the Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 86, “Photoelectric
Controls”.
Time clocks shall be of the astronomical type.
2.7.6 Utilization Voltages

The preferred utilization voltages for electrical equipment and lighting are identified in the
following:
Platform Lighting 240 volts (or 208 volts), single phase
Shelter Lighting 120 volts, single phase
Parking Lot Lighting 240 volts (or 208, 277, or 480 volts), single phase
Receptacle Outlets 120 volts, single phase
Communications Cabinet 120/240 volts, single phase
The designer shall determine the utilization voltages present at existing stations and
confirm the available utilization voltages with the SANDAG’s Utility Coordinator within
the vicinity for new stations and provide a design based on these voltages.
2-12 March 2014

2.8 Ventilation for Subterranean Station

Refer to Volume 1 – Safety and Security, “Tunnels – Emergency Ventilation” Section, for
ventilation requirements.
2.9 Fire Protection, Alarm, and Emergency Management Systems

The designer shall prepare complete Plans, Special Provisions, and Engineer's Estimate for
a fire protection, alarm, and emergency management systems where specified or required
that shall conform to all applicable federal, state, and local requirements for fire protection
systems and fire-resistant materials and construction including, but not limited to, the
requirements of the NFPA 72, 13 and NFPA 130 most important and other associated NFPA
Codes, Uniform Building Code (UBC) and California Building Code (CBC). Provide a dry
standpipe at elevated stations and any other station location that is not easily accessible for
firefighting activities.
Elevated stations with elevators shall have an Intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)
that: a) receives information from environment sensors (e.g. fire), b) monitors sensor integrity,
c) automatically controls response equipment, and d) transmission of information that is used
to respond to fire based on a predetermined sequence. The FACP shall not only prepare the
station facility for fire based on predetermined sequence, but it shall also provide active status
information, alarms, and other alerts to the incident commander, the AIMs, system and other
predetermined facilities. The FACP shall interface with the existing Simplex Grinnell Incident
Commander (IC) located in the San Diego Trolley Inc. (SDTI) Operations Control Center
(OCC) via existing and new dedicated fiber optic strands in the non-vital WAN cables that
form a redundant ring solely for the use of the Fire Life Safety System in conformance with all
NFPA, MTS, and state or local jurisdiction requirements.
Enclosed stations, typically in tunnels, shall have an Emergency Management Panel that: a)
receives information from environment sensors (e.g. fire), b) monitors sensor integrity, c)
automatically controls response equipment, d) transmission of information that is used to
respond to fire based on a predetermined sequence, and e) provide first responders with a
location to manage the response to the fire including, but not limited to, control of ventilation
fans, public address, and electronic messaging systems within the tunnel and station facilities
and/or station platforms. The EMP shall communicate with the existing Simplex Grinnell
Incident Commander (IC) located in the San Diego Trolley Inc. (SDTI) Operations Control
Center (OCC) via existing and new dedicated fiber optic strands in the non-vital WAN cables
that form a redundant ring solely for the use of the Fire Life Safety System.
Dedicated fiber optic strands within the 144 strand SMF cable shall be allocated to form a
Fire Alarm Management System solely dedicated to link Intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panels
(FACP) at elevated stations and Emergency Management Panels (EMP) at underground
stations to the existing Simplex Grinnell Incident Commander (IC) located in the Operation
Control Center. In order simplify system integration with the Incident Commander at the OCC
the FACP shall be a Simplex 4100 series panel or accepted equivalent. The dedicated Fire
Alarm Management System fiber optic strands shall form a redundant ring connecting all of
the panels to each other and linking them with the OCC. The designer shall meet with
SANDAG and MTS to obtain information about the existing dedicated fiber connections and
determine how to connect in the additional FACP located along a new line segment or to link
up an existing station that is being upgraded with new Simplex Grinnell compatible Intelligent
Fire Alarm Control Panels.
2-13 March 2014

Early in the design phase the designer shall meet with MTS, SANDAG, and the CalFire
deputy Fire Marshal and/or local jurisdiction if available to present preliminary design
concepts for the station Fire Alarm and Control System at elevated and enclosed
underground stations and obtain input on desired system functionality and configuration. At
the meeting the designer shall present: a) preliminary site layout identify locations of egress
and present preliminary concepts of environmental detection sensors (fire), FACP or EMP
location, fire response system features, etc., b) functional description of environmental
sensing system, alarm and response system required to conform the minimum NFPA
requirements, c) a functional description of additional features not required by NFPA, but
suggested by the designer, d) a preliminary list of sensor, alarm and control features that will
interface with the incident commander at central control. Following the preliminary meeting
the designer shall finalize the design concepts based on the input received at the meeting
and then distribute the draft concept document. Once accepted by MTS and SANDAG
meetings shall be arranged the State of California Deputy Fire Marshal, “State Fire Marshall”
(SFM) or city having jurisdiction (CITY) to review the design concept and confirm system
conforms to minimum requirements. Design concept shall be modified as needed to
adequately address the SFM/CITY requirements.
The SANDAG LRT Design Criteria, conceptual report, NFPA 72 current 2013, ADA, federal,
state, and local jurisdiction codes and requirements and requirements shall collectively form
the basis of design of the system.
The final design documents shall include plans, special provisions and estimate for the
system and include, at a minimum: a) regulatory requirements, b) standard references (e.g.
UL and Factory Mutually Approved) c) product specifications, d) Training, Certification, and
Licensing Requirements of Technicians by the State of California for Fire Alarm Installation
work, e) OCC Incident Commander interface requirements including, but not limited to,
interface schematics, IP and Bit Addressing tables, e.g., f) Contractor Qualification
Requirements, g) Submittal Requirements, h) site plans showing equipment, devices,
sensors, control or management panels, and all other pertinent information, i) system
description and functional requirements, j) Single Line Diagrams showing system
configuration and wiring diagrams, k) FACP/ EMP power supply panel schedules and circuit
configurations including primary and secondary power supplies and circuit disconnects, l)
remote power supply requirements for audio and visual notification systems and auxiliary
features (when desired or required), m) FACP and EMP annunciator display requirements, n)
product specifications, o) installation specifications, p) automated system notifications, q)
circuit break down testing, functional and operational acceptance testing requirements, r)
SFM/City acceptance and certification requirements, s) test records, t) as-built record
requirements, u) warranty requirements, and v) various other requirements.
During the design development phase the designer shall provide / obtain and review sample
specifications and arrange a meeting with SANDAG and MTS to identify specific product
requirements inclusion in the Specifications to ensure the products will conform to the desired
operation with existing equipment, performance and functional needs of MTS.
All fire life safety computer aided drawing files shall be provided by the designer to SANDAG
Systems Configuration Manager. The contractor shall update design drawings with as-built
information and submit final drawings for the installed system.
2-14 March 2014

2.10 Fire/Life Safety (Elevated or Underground Station)

Stations shall be provided with a minimum of two means of egress; one at each end of the
platform, on both sides of track, such that “dead ends” will not exceed 20 feet (Figure 2-4).
Passenger holding areas at the end of station platform shall be considered for mobility
impaired patrons, or where emergency exit is limited. This requirement shall be coordinated
with the Fire Marshal of the appropriate jurisdiction.
All underground stations shall be designed with a deluge and fire auto-detect system and
traction power isolation and disconnects integrated with the fire control system in accordance
with the requirements of the CPUC, CBC and State Fire Marshal. For additional safety
requirements see Volume 1, – Safety and Security.
2-15 March 2014

Figure 2-4. – Typical Layout for Means of Egress (Elevated Structure Shown)
2-16 March 2014

Chapter 3.0 – Trackwork
3.0 TRACKWORK
This section addresses minimum standards for and design of LRT only and joint LRT and
freight/passenger train trackage, and trackwork requirements. Track design shall be in
accordance with the American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association
(AREMA) Manual unless otherwise modified herein. The basis for all track design work shall
meet the current track safety standards of the California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC)
General Order (GO) Nos. as follows:
• G.O. No. 26 (Effective Version G.O. No. 26-D: Clearances on railroads and street
railroads as to side and overhead structures, parallel tracks and crossings);
• G.O. No. 33 (Effective Version G.O. No. 33-B: Construction, reconstruction,
maintenance and operation of interlocking plants of railroads);
• G.O. No. 95 (Overhead electric line construction);
• G.O. No. 143 (Effective Version G.O. No. 143-B: Design, construction and operation
of light rail transit systems);
• G.O. No. 164 (Effective Version G.O. No. 164-D: Hazard Analysis sections only).
In addition, where the LRT System operates in a public street, applicable design
requirements of the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO), the California Department of Transportation (Caltrans), the CPUC, or the local
municipality shall also be applied as required or determined to be appropriate by the designer
and SANDAG.
Track is divided into classifications: LRT only mainlines, Joint LRT and Freight/Passenger -
use mainlines, Tracks in streets (street running), Yards, and Shops, and Stations.
3.1 Alignment and Clearance

3.1.1 General
3.1.1.1 Alignment
The track alignment shall be designed to maximize passenger ride quality at the highest
permissible operating speeds. LRV maximum speed is based on PUC General Order 143-B.
The design speed for the alignment shall be based upon the normal operating speeds as
provided on speed-distance profiles generated from a train performance simulation program,
constrained by maximum speeds through curves and stations, and areas where maximum
speed is limited by stopping sight distance. Consideration shall also be made for locations
where operations considerations make it likely that a train could be stopped or forced to
operate at reduced speeds. Curves shall be designed to provide a smooth speed-distance
profile, maximizing speed, and minimizing speed restrictions between stations.
Where two or more tracks are constructed along parallel alignments, one track may be
designated the "stationed track." All horizontal stationing is directly related to the horizontal
tangent, curve, and spiral lengths measured along the centerline of that track. The other
track (or tracks) is constructed parallel to the stationed track, and the stationing is that of the
stationed track and measured radially or normally thereto. Where tracks diverge, a station
3-1 March 2014

equation will be placed at the point of divergence. Where diverging tracks come back
together, the divergent stationing will be equated to the "stationed track."
Track gauge shall be a standard gauge of 4 feet 8-1/2 inches. The gauge is measured
between the inner sides of the rail head 5/8 inches below and perpendicular to the top of rail
(TOR). Track gauge can be widened for curves having a radius of curvature less than 150
feet with approval from SANDAG Director of Rail. The proximity to special trackwork shall be
reviewed when considering a change in track gauge.
3.1.1.2 Clearance
The criteria developed in this section apply to the design of the entire system. All designs
shall provide not less than the minimum clearances as specified in this section.
In addition to train clearances, the design engineer shall obtain current maintenance
equipment dimensions and confirm adequate clearance for the rail maintenance of way
(MOW) equipment.
3.1.2 Horizontal Alignment

The horizontal alignment of mainline tracks consists of tangents joined to circular curves by
spiral transition curves. Spirals are generally not used in yards, service areas, other low
speed tracks, and on large radius curves as identified in this manual.
Wherever possible, track geometry is designed for the design speed defined under this
Section, which considers vehicle performance characteristics, station spacing, sight distance,
and vertical and horizontal alignments.
3.1.2.1 Horizontal Clearances

Clearance shall be determined using the static and dynamic envelopes of the LRV as
required by the CPUC, AREMA and these criteria. Dimensions for the static and dynamic
envelopes for all SANDAG LRV models are shown in Figure 3.3. SANDAG's existing fleet of
LRVs consists of Siemens Duewag Models U2, SD100, S70, and SD8 vehicles.
3.1.2.2 Minimum Clearances

Minimum distance between the centerline of tracks shall be generally spaced as follows:
• 14 feet 9 inches for exclusive or semi-exclusive LRT right-of-way with catenary poles
installed between the tracks including the center walkway;
• 14 feet for joint use right-of-way with catenary poles installed on the outside of
tracks;
• 12feet for LRT-only right-of-way with catenary poles and walkways installed on the
outside of tracks;
• Where freight trains operate, the distance shall be in accordance with the
requirements of CPUC General Order No. 26-D.
3.1.2.3 Standard Clearances

Standard distance between centerline of a track and obstruction on a tangent shall be
generally spaced as follows:
3-2 March 2014

• Absolute minimum of 5 feet 6 inches shall be provided from the centerline of track to
any obstruction for LRT only territory, for obstructions less than 36 inches parallel to
the track and higher than six inches above top of rail. Track mounted maintenance
equipment shall be considered prior to inclusion of any limited or minimum
clearances;
• Provide 8 feet from centerline of track to any obstruction greater than 36 inches
parallel to the track and higher than the height of the trolley mirrors. Provide 7 feet 6
inches from centerline of the track to any obstruction greater than 36 inches parallel
to the track and higher than 6 inches above top of rail. Obstructions include but are
not limited to: retaining walls, cabinets and house, and fencing.
3-3 March 2014

Figure 3-1. – Static and Dynamic Envelopes
3-4 March 2014

3.1.2.4 Adjustments
The horizontal clearance and track centers shall also include the following adjustments:
• Superelevation: Additional clearance to compensate for the tilt of the LRV to the
inside of the curve:
Ec = Ea x H
60
Where: Ec = Superelevation correction, inch
Ea = Actual superelevation, inch
H = Height on LRV, inch
Notes: LRV Height (Max.) = 155.9 inches
Walkway Height = 84 inches
• Vehicle In-Swing: Additional clearance to compensate for vehicle overhang at a

point midway between the LRV trucks on the inside of a curve:
VI = 0.17 Dc
Where: VI = Vehicle in-swing, inch
Dc = Degree of curve, degrees
• Vehicle Out-Swing: Additional clearance to compensate for vehicle overhang at the

end of the vehicle on the outside of the curve:
VO = 0.61 Dc
Where: VO = Vehicle out-swing, inch
Dc = Degree of curve, degrees
• Construction Tolerance: Additional clearance to compensate for track or associated

facilities not constructed in their intended position. Use 1 inch for tracks and poles,
and 1-1/2 inches for walls. When calculating clearances between two items to be
constructed, the construction tolerances of each should be added.
• Maintenance Tolerance: Additional clearance to compensate for tracks that can shift
under use. Allow 2 inches for ballasted track. No maintenance tolerance is necessary for
direct fixation track.
3.1.2.5 Emergency Walkways

Walkways along Structures and Tunnels: An emergency/maintenance walkway shall be
provided along structures and tunnels. There shall be at least one walkway adjacent to any
track. The walkway shall be at or above Top of Tie (or top of plinth) and below TOR at the
track edge for structures and at or above TOR (but no higher than 8 inches) at track edge for
3-5 March 2014

tunnels. Both shall be located at a horizontal distance from track centerline as determined by
regulations. The walkway shall have a minimum width of 30 inches.
Walkways along all Trackways: Emergency walkways between tracks required by Section
9.05 of CPUC General Order No. 143-B shall be 30 inches in width measured from the static
envelope of the LRT vehicle, and extend 7 ft. 0 in. in height. The clearance requirements of
Section 9.06 of CPUC General Order No. 143-B shall be based on the dynamic envelope.
3.1.3 Tangent Alignment

The minimum desired tangent length is 320 feet and minimum of 80 feet for LRT only track. If
the tangent section is less than 80 feet, the spiral may be lengthened to run together with the
approval of an exception from the SANDAG Director of Rail. For joint use trackage, the
minimum tangent length shall conform to AREMA standard unless otherwise approved by the
Director of Rail. If the spirals need to be lengthened, the spirals will be extended to provide a
smooth reverse curve without a tangent segment between the reversing spiral curves. At
stations, extend the tangent alignment a minimum of 75 feet beyond the platform in each
direction.
3.1.4 Curved Alignment

3.1.4.1 Circular Curves
Circular curves are defined by the arc definition of curvature as specified by degree of
curvature or radii. The relationship may be expressed as follows:
Dc = 5729.575 (English)
R
Where: Dc = Degree of curvature, degrees
R = Radius, feet
3-6 March 2014

Figure 3-2. – Circular/Spiral Functions and Abbreviations
3-7 March 2014

3-8 March 2014

3.1.4.2 Minimum Radii

The desirable minimum radius for LRT mainline track is 1,500 feet for 50 mph and 1,650 feet
for 55 mph reaches. The desirable minimum radius for LRT in street running is 150 feet. The
desirable minimum radius for secondary LRT tracks and for yard tracks is 250 feet. The
absolute minimum radius a vehicle can negotiate is 90 feet. The maximum allowable curve
radius for any given alignment should normally be utilized.
3.1.4.3 Minimum Length of Circular Curve

The desirable minimum length of a circular curve (excluding spiral transitions) is given by the
formula:
L = 3V (English)
Where: L = Minimum curve length, feet
V = Design speed through tangent, mph
Tracks are placed on concentric curves for multi-track alignments.
The length of the curve shall equal or exceed 1/12 the radius.
3.1.4.4 Spiral Transition Curves

Spiral transitions shall be used in mainline tracks to connect curves and tangents and to
provide superelevation transition length for curves with radius less than or equal to 10,000 ft.
For multi-track layouts, where tracks follow the same general alignment, and where the
distance between track centerlines in the circular curve is the same as for adjacent tangents,
the tracks are placed on parallel spirals. If the distance between track enters in the circular
curve is different from that in the tangents, each spiral is a "true" spiral and its geometry is
defined individually.
Figure 3-2 gives formulas and abbreviations for the spirals and curves used by SANDAG.
3.1.4.5 Minimum Length

The absolute minimum length for a mainline spiral is 50 feet where velocity is less than 35
mph. Where velocity is greater than 35 mph, the minimum length for spirals is 100 feet. The
recommended length for spirals is the greater of the lengths given by the following formulas:
Ls = 30Ea
Ls = 1.22EuV
Ls = 1.17EaV
Where: Ls = Minimum spiral length, feet
Ea = Actual superelevation, inch
Eu = Unbalanced superelevation, inch
V = Design velocity, mph
3-9 March 2014

3.1.4.6 Curves without Spirals

As a practical consideration, transition spirals for simple curves are omitted where the length
for spiral (Ls) divided by the radius of circular curvature (R) using either feet or meters is less
than 0.01. Where the spiral is not provided, the superelevation is attained over equal lengths
of tangent and curve throughout the greater of the lengths given by the formulas in Section
3.1.4.5. One-half of the superelevation shall be developed on the tangent and one-half shall
be developed on the curve.
3.1.4.7 Compound Circular Curves

Any compound curves will require the approval of the SANDAG Director of Rail.
Where compound circular curves are required, a spiral is inserted between the circular
curves. The minimum length of such a spiral is the greater of the lengths as determined by
the earlier formulas, modified as follows:
Ls = 30 (Ea2 – Ea1)
Ls = 1.22 (Eu2 – Eu1) V
Ls = 1.17 (Ea2 – Ea1) V
Where: Ls = Minimum spiral length, feet
Ea = Actual superelevation,inch
Eu = Unbalanced superelevation, inch
Subscripts 1 and 2 denote first and second circular curves. Figure 3-3 gives compound
circular curve formulas and abbreviations.
3-10 March 2014

Figure 3-3. – Compound Curves and Combining Spiral Formulas and Abbreviations
3-11 March 2014

3.1.4.8 Superelevation
Superelevation of tracks is generally required for curves in mainlines, but not for low-speed
tracks, such as secondary tracks and yard tracks.
The theoretical superelevation for equilibrium (Er) can be expressed in terms of velocity as
follows:
Er = 3.782V2 (English)
R
Where:
V = Actual velocity, mph
R = Radius of curve, feet
Er = Theoretical superelevation, inch
Superelevation of the outer rail above the inner rail is required in horizontal track curves when
the desired vehicle speed is greater than that which would provide a comfortable ride for
passengers and equipment, and limit wear on vehicle wheels and the outer rails. In final
design, the superelevation shall be set consistent with the design speed as described in
Section 3.1 – “Alignment and Clearance”.
The total theoretical superelevation for equilibrium (Er) assigned to LRT trackage is
customarily comprised of two elements, one real and one imaginary. The first is the actual
difference in rail elevations and is called "actual superelevation (Ea)." The second is an
expression of the amount of superelevation that would be required to overcome a tolerable
level of passenger discomfort, and is called "unbalanced superelevation (Eu)."
This results in the expression: Er = Ea + Eu
Recommended maximum superelevation values are:
Maximum LRT Only Maximum LRT and Freight
Ea = 4 inch Ea= 3 inch
Eu = 3 inch Eu= 3 inch
Er = 7 inch Er= 6 inch
On LRT-only trackage, the actual superelevation may be increased to 6 inches with the
approval of the SANDAG Director of Rail.
3-12 March 2014

Figure 3-4. – Superelevation (Ea)
Typically, for track design, Eu would remain zero inch until the maximum Ea is used. The
unbalanced superelevation Eu would be increased as necessary until the maximum Eu is
used. If the design speed cannot be met at the maximum Er, the curve radius may have to be
lengthened, or the speed limited.
Actual superelevation is attained or removed linearly throughout the full length of the spiral
transition curve. This is normally done by raising the rail farthest from the curve center while
maintaining the top of the inside rail at profile grade. There are exceptions to the general rule
that superelevation is held constant through the circular curve and is attained and removed in
spiral transitions by raising the outer rail.
3.1.5 Vertical Alignment

Profile grade represents the elevation of the low rail. When only one track profile is given for
curved alignment, the profile of the second track is adjusted uniformly to accommodate the
difference in length through the curve. No compensation of grades is required for horizontal
curvature.
All changes in grade are connected by parabolic vertical curves with a constant rate of
change.
Stations and special trackwork, such as turnouts and crossovers, shall be located where both
horizontal and vertical alignments are on tangent sections.
3-13 March 2014

3.1.6 Vertical Grade

3.1.6.1 Grade Rates and Lengths
All grades should be the lowest percentage that is practical not to exceed 4.3 percent.
3.1.6.2 Mainline
The maximum design grade for any vehicle shall not exceed 4.3 percent without prior
approval of the SANDAG Director of Rail. Where it may be beneficial to the design a
constant grade of up to 6.0 percent may be allowed upon approval by the SANDAG Director
of Rail if it is applied to a track length of 800 feet or less.
A minimum grade of zero percent is acceptable for at-grade construction, if drainage can be
accommodated. A minimum grade of 0.50 percent should be maintained for underground
and aerial structures to accommodate drainage.
The minimum length of constant grade between vertical curves shall be determined as
follows:
Lg = 3V
Where: Lg = Minimum length of constant grade, feet
V = Design velocity through tangent, mph
The absolute minimum length of constant grade between vertical curves used in the design
of new track shall be 100 feet.
3.1.6.3 Stations
A grade of 0.5 percent is the desired grade in all station areas, if drainage can be
accommodated. The maximum grade through LRT stations is 2 percent except when
stations are used for vehicle storage where the maximum grade shall not be greater than 0.3
percent.
Constant grade tangents shall extend 75 feet beyond the limits of station platforms.
Vertical curves through stations will be allowed only by approval from the SANDAG Director
of Rail and where the curve is crested and no gradient through the vertical curve exceeds the
maximum allowed under the constant grade criteria. A sag vertical curve will not be allowed
in a station.
3.1.6.4 Yard and Secondary Tracks

For yard and secondary tracks in general, the minimum grade is usually specified as 0.20 or
0.30 percent and the maximum grade is typically 1.0 percent.
For storage tracks, a level grade is often desirable and 0.30 percent is the allowed maximum.
Stub-end storage tracks shall slope away from the turnout, and through storage tracks shall
have a sag in their profiles, otherwise derails shall be included in the design in accordance
with the CPUC General Order No. 33B.
3-14 March 2014

Turnback and center pocket tracks to be used for train storage and train consist changes
should also be limited to a maximum grade of 0.30 percent where possible. Tracks located
within a shop building should be set at a level grade.
3.1.7 Vertical Curve

All changes in grade are connected by parabolic vertical curves at crests and sags. The
maximum vertical curve possible should be used where practicable.
3.1.7.1 Mainline
For mainline track, the absolute minimum length of vertical curve is 100 feet. For design of
new and proposed LRT track, a desired minimum length of 200 feet should be used. This
minimum shall not be exceeded without approval from the SANDAG Director of Rail. The
desired length of mainline vertical curves above the minimum is determined by the following
formulas:
• Crest: L = V2(G1 – G2)

30
• Sag: L = V2(G1 – G2)
60
Where: L = Length of vertical curve, feet
(G1 – G2) = Algebraic difference in grades, percent
The lengths of vertical curve are generally rounded up to the next even 50 feet length.
3.1.7.2 Ride Quality

• Both sag and crest vertical curves should be as long as possible, especially if connecting
long constant-grade lines;
• The tops of rails and edges of aerial structures should be profiled to avoid a
"rollercoaster appearance." Profiles plotted to an exaggerated scale are helpful in
this analysis;
• Track construction tolerances shall be as specified by the Federal Railroad Administration
(FRA) for a Class 6 railroad.
3.1.7.3 Stations
Vertical curves shall be located outside station platforms. See Section 3.1.6.3 – “Stations” for
exception.
3.1.7.4 Compound Vertical Curves

Compound vertical curves may be used provided the requirements of this chapter are met,
and prior written approval has been obtained from SANDAG.
3-15 March 2014

3.1.7.5 Combined Vertical and Horizontal Curves

The designer shall consider the effect of horizontal and vertical curves on sight distance to
signals, grade crossings, and stations.
The minimum combined (horizontal and vertical) curved section a four-vehicle train is capable
of negotiating is as follows:
• 90 foot radius horizontal curve and 1640 foot vertical crest curve;
• 90 foot radius horizontal curve and an 1150 foot vertical sag curve; and
Combined horizontal and vertical curves shall not be more restrictive than these absolute
minimum requirements.
3.1.8 Vertical Clearance

Vertical undercar clearance is defined from TOR with the maximum suspension
deflection and car body roll, minimum vertical curve radius and fully worn wheels.
Minimum vertical clearance under floor mounted equipment shall be 4 inches. Minimum
vertical clearance truck mounted equipment shall be 3 inches. With the above
conditions and with any radius curve, clearances between truck components and the car
body shall be no less than 1.5 inches.
3.1.9 Joint LRT/Freight Rail Corridor
3.1.9.1 Freight Clearance
The LRT design criteria is based on Plate F Standard which meets all freight clearances for
standard box cars and tankers. Automobile carrier cars exceed the clearances specified in
this design criteria. Designer shall determine current and/or proposed future freight use prior
to initiating design.
3.1.9.2 Freight Loading

Maximum loads for freight is 286,000 pounds.
3.1.9.3 Temporal Separation

Light Rail Vehicles may operate on the same railway provided there is Temporal Separation
with FRA approval.
3.1.9.4 State of California

California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC)
The General Orders of the CPUC shall apply as follows:
• General Order No. 26-D - Clearances on Railroads and Street Railroads as to Side
and Overhead Structures, Parallel Tracks, and Crossings;
• General Order No. 33-B - Construction, Reconstruction, Maintenance, and Operation
of Interlocking Plants;
• General Order No. 52 - Construction and Operation of Power and Communication
Lines for the Prevention or Mitigation of Inductive Interference;
3-16 March 2014

• General Order No. 72-B - Construction and Maintenance of Crossings at Grade of

Railroads and Public Streets;
• General Order No. 75-D - Protection of Railroad Grade Crossings;
• General Order No. 88-B - Rules for Altering Public Highway-Rail Crossings;
• General Order No. 95 - Rules for Overhead Electrical Construction;
• General Order No. 108 - Filing of Railroad Operating Department Rules;
• General Order No. 110 - Radio Communications on Railroad Operations;
• General Order No. 118-A - Construction, Reconstruction, and Maintenance of
Walkways and Control of Vegetation adjacent to railroad tracks;
• General Order No. 128 - Construction of Underground Electric Supply and
Communication Systems;
• General Order No. 131-D - Planning and Construction of Facilities for the Generation
of Electricity and Certain Electric Transmission Facilities;
• General Order No. 135 - The Occupancy of Public Grade Crossings by Railroads;
• General Order No. 143-B - Rules for the Design, Construction, and Operation of
Light Rail Transit Systems Including Streetcar.
California Public Utilities (CPU) Code
Any public transit guideway planned, acquired, or constructed, on or after January 1, 1979, is
subject to regulations of the CPUC relating to safety appliances and procedures.
The CPUC will oversee major light rail line extensions and rehabilitation projects in
accordance with the CPUC General Orders to ensure safety and compliance with General
Orders in the design, construction, and commissioning of projects. Designer may be required
to prepare safety certification plans, hazard analysis and prepare filings with the CPUC for
review and approval.
Division of Industrial Safety (DIS)
The electrical orders in Title 8 of the Division of Industrial Safety, as applicable to trolley
facilities (Chapter 4, Subchapter 5), shall be complied with in the development of design
drawings and specifications.
Caltrans
Roadways and structures will follow Caltrans design standards and in accordance with
Caltrans design procedures and standards.
• Standard Specifications (latest edition);

• Standard Plans (latest edition);
• Bridge Planning and Design Manual (latest updates).
3-17 March 2014

State of California, Department of Energy, Title 24
Buildings shall be designed to maximize energy efficiency and in accordance with Title 24
and local building requirements.
State of California, Building Code, Title 24
Buildings shall be designed in accordance with Title 24 and local building requirements.
3.2 Mainline Track

New at-grade ballasted mainline track shall be constructed with continuous welded rail
(CWR) on concrete ties and ballast. Direct fixation track shall be considered for at-grade
conditions where appropriate. Direct fixation track shall be used in tunnels, bridges, and
aerial structures where direct fixation provides a cost or maintenance advantage.
Conditions may vary along track alignment requiring modifications to standards set forth
herein. Where designer determines modifications are recommended, the designer shall
request approval as part of a basis of design report or request for deviation from this criteria.
3.2.1 Subgrade
Subgrade design shall be based upon the geotechnical report for the project developed as
described in Volume 1 – Civil Work, “Geotechnical” Section. Issues for consideration include
horizontal and vertical alignments, and typical sections, topographical features, drainage, and
soil and rock data. Environmental concerns such as noise and vibration, erosion control,
wetlands and contaminated soils should also be considered.
Subgrade design, whether cut or fill, shall be designed to support the loads imposed by both
LRT and freight traffic without failure or excessive deformation.
The subgrade shall typically be sloped at 40:1 away from the center point located midway
between the two tracks in double track territory. In single track areas, the subgrade shall
slope toward a swale or underdrain system at 40:1.
Distance to subgrade hinge point from centerline of track shall be 10 feet 6 inches for a non-
confined tangent trackway and 10 feet 10 inches for a non-confined curved trackway. Where
trackway is confined subgrade shall be restricted to the confining limits.
Refer to Figure 3-5 for typical subgrade configurations.
3-18 March 2014

Figure 3-5. – Typical Subgrade Configurations
3.2.2 Geotextile Fabrics

For ballasted track on subgrade, non-woven geotechnical fabric is required between the
ballast and the subgrade. For ballasted track on sub-ballast, the geotechnical engineer shall
determine if geotechnical fabric is required between the sub-ballast and the subgrade. Fabric
will extend the entire interface zone between the ballast and subballast (or subgrade). Fabric
shall extend 6 feet minimum on both sides of the centerline of the track. Geotextile fabric
specifications shall be as recommended by a Geotechnical Engineer. Overlaps of fabric shall
be 24 inches minimum. The minimum weight of filter fabric material shall be recommended
by the geotechnical engineer.
3.2.3 Sub-Ballast
All new trackbeds shall be designed in accordance with AREMA Manual, Chapter 1, Part 2,
Section 2.11, “Sub-ballast Specifications,” using the loads by light rail vehicles and the quality
of the proposed subgrade materials. The thickness of subballast, if any, shall be determined
as a part of this structural section. In most situations, a minimum of 6 inches of subballast
should be used as a barrier between the subgrade material and the ballast.
3-19 March 2014

Sub-ballast, cement-treated base, lime, or cement-treated subgrade of other subgrade

improvements shall be recommended by the designer and specified in the design based
upon in situ testing and analysis.
3.2.4 Ballast
Ballast shall be crushed quarry rock, composed of hard, dense particles of an angular
structure, providing sharp corners and cubical fragments. Ballast gradation shall conform to
AREMA Size No. 3, 2” – 1-1/2”. Ballast gradation for each size shall conform to Table 1-2-2,
"Recommended Ballast Gradations," AREMA Manual, Chapter 1, Part 2 - Ballast.
Ballast depth will be a minimum of 9 inches below the bottom of tie. Ballast shoulder will be a
minimum of 12 inches beyond the ends of ties on tangent and 18 inches curves having a
radius equal to or less than 10,000 feet. Ballast shoulder shall have a downward slope of 2:1.
The final elevation of ballast shall be 1 inch below the top of tie at the rail seat, when
compacted.
3.2.5 Corrosion
To evaluate the potential effects of stray current, soil and water corrosion impact to
underground metallic and concrete structures, and atmospheric corrosion conditions of above
ground metallic structures, the designer shall identify all SANDAG facilities, foreign utilities,
and other structures that could potentially be affected by corrosion within or adjacent to the
project limits. Structures which may be affected by corrosion include, but are not limited to:
• Buried and on-grade metallic and reinforced concrete structures;

• Components of the traction power electrification system;
• Retaining walls;
• Bridges and viaducts;
• Tunnels;
• Pier and pile structures;
• Ferrous pressurized piping (water, fire water, sewage, etc.);
• Metallic pipes, casings, and other metallic structures;
• Hydraulic elevator cylinders;
• Underground storage tanks; and
• Trackwork components.
As directed by SANDAG, the designer shall:
• Ascertain the electrical and chemical characteristics of the soil and water
environments in general accordance with applicable Caltrans Corrosion Guidelines,
dated September 2003 Version 1.0 (or latest);
• Perform soil resistivity tests at various depths;
3-20 March 2014

• Use the soil resistivity test results to evaluate soil properties and water content
effects on structures;
• During geotechnical investigation soil samples should be collected and analyzed for
chloride and sulfate content, for pH and resistivity. A site shall be considered to be
corrosive if one or more of the following conditions exist for the representative soil
and/or water samples taken at the site:
– Chloride concentration is 500 ppm or greater
– Sulfate concentration is 2000 ppm or greater
– The pH is 5.5 or less.
• Prepare reports of findings and recommendations;

• Incorporate design practices employed by SANDAG to limit stray current in the
contract plans and specifications (see Standard Corrosion Control below);
• Specify track-to-earth resistance testing every 1,000 feet in accordance with ASTM G-
165. Provide track-to-earth resistance acceptance criteria. Maximum stray current,
emanating from the LRT System during normal operations shall not exceed a
consecutive target maximum range of 0.2 amperes per 1,000 feet of track;
Use traction power analysis to calculate negative rise. If the negative voltage rise exceeds 45
volts, the designer shall recommend other mitigation techniques to incorporate into the
design.
3.2.5.1 Standard Stray Current Corrosion Control

• Locating substations within 250 feet of the tracks to reduce the electrical potential
difference (See also Section 4.10.1) (locations located beyond 250 feet and where
the consultant has determined the facilities may be adversely affected by electrical
potential differences the designer shall provide recommendations for testing and
mitigation);
• Energized rails shall not be grounded;
• Ties and direct fixation fasteners shall be isolated from the running rails;
• Bridges shall be designed with corrosion control measures and should have
corrosion test stations in accordance with Caltrans standards;
The designer shall recommend which other SANDAG and utility facilities should be provided
with corrosion control measures.
3.2.6 Concrete Cross Ties

Mainline tracks shall use reinforced, prestressed concrete cross ties conforming to the
strength requirements in the AREMA Manual, Chapter 30, Section 4.4. The concrete ties
shall be specified based on rail traffic for a service life of 30 years. Typical tie dimensions are
approximately 8 feet 4 inches in length, 7.5 inches in height at the rail seat, and 10 inches in
width at the base, and 7.5 inches in width at the rail seat. In addition, concrete cross ties shall
provide for a rail seat with a 40:1 cant sloped towards the center of tie. These dimensions are
3-21 March 2014

typical, but the ultimate design dimensions must be determined by the project designer and
tie manufacturer. See Figure 3-6 for typical concrete cross tie configuration. (Note: this figure
is for reference only and is not specifying an exact dimensioning of the cross tie).
Tie spacing shall be 30 inches on center for tangent track and 24 inches on center through
curves with radii of less than 1,000 feet. Refer to the Standard Drawings for special tie
spacing on approach or existing special trackwork, station platform, elevated structure, or
tunnel. All concrete cross ties shall conform to AREMA specifications.
Figure 3-6. – Typical Concrete Tie Configuration (Dimensions Vary)
3.2.7 Timber Cross Ties

Timber Cross Ties shall meet the following criteria:
• Timber cross ties shall conform to the requirements of AREMA Manual, Chapter 30,
Part 3. The cross ties shall be of pressure treated hardwood measuring 7 inches by
9 inches by 8 feet in length or greater in length depending on use and location;
• Requirements for tie fabrication, method of tie treatment and preservation, and tie
handling and placement, including preservative materials, shall conform to AREMA
recommended practices and shall be detailed in the procurement and/or construction
contract documents;
• Bored holes shall be sized in accordance with AREMA requirements for cut spikes or
lag screws;
• End plates shall be used on all timber ties;
3-22 March 2014

• 10 feet timber ties with end plates shall be used at grade crossings.
Timber cross tie spacing shall be as follows:
• In tangent and curved tracks of radius greater than 500 ft. spacing shall be 24 inches
center-to-center;
• In curves of radius less than 500 feetbut greater than or equal to 300 feet spacing
shall be 21 inches center-to-center;
• In curves of radius less than 300 feet spacing shall be 19.5 inches center-to-center.
3.2.8 Rail
3.2.8.1 Running Rail
New Rail for main line ballasted, embedded and direct fixation tracks shall be new 115 RE
section, conforming to the current AREMA Manual, Volume I, Chapter 4, "Rail." Rail shall be
either shop or field welded into continuously welded rail (CWR) lengths.
Rail for curves of 100 feet radii or less shall be pre-curved by a rail bending machine prior to
being delivered to the site.
Designer shall include provisions for rail grinding. At the direction of the SANDAG project
manager rail grinding may be specified for removal of surface imperfections and mill scale,
optimize the rail wheel contact area, and facilitate traction power return and signal shunting,
prior to initiating revenue service on a new line. Rail grinding patterns shall be designed in
conjunction with consideration of alternative LRV wheel contours.
3.2.8.2 High Strength Rail

Unless otherwise directed by the SANDAG Project Manager, all Mainline Track shall be
High Strength Head Hardened Rail conforming to AREMA, Volume 1, Section 2.1.4.2.
3.2.8.3 Restraining Rail

Restraining rails shall be are used to provide continuous wheel support to LRVs negotiating
sharp radius curves.
All mainline track excluding special trackwork with a centerline radius of 500 feet or less shall
have inner restraining rail mounted adjacent to the low rail in accordance with AREMA plans
and specifications. The flangeway width from gauge line of restraining rail to gage line of
running rail shall be 1-7/8 inches. Restraining rail shall extend beyond the curve on both
ends a minimum distance of 20 feet. Restraining rail shall be bolted. Restraining rail detail is
shown on Figure 3-7.
Restraining rails on direct fixation open and embedded track shall be fastened to the running
rail with direct fixation fasteners. A portion of the rail base of each restraining rail shall be
removed on one side to avoid interference with the base of the running rail. Rail ends shall
be predrilled for a 6-hole joint bar in accordance with requirements of AREMA Manual,
Chapter 4, Part 1. Restraining rails shall be predrilled for bolting to running rail at 60 inches
on center, and shall be furnished in minimum lengths of 39 feet. Restraining rail joints shall
3-23 March 2014

be bolted together using D-bar installation. Restraining rail separator blocks shall be designed
with shims to allow for future flangeway width adjustments due to wear.
All tracks having a centerline radius of 150 feet or less shall require both running rails to be
installed with restraining rails.
Figure 3-7. – Restraining Rail Detail
3.2.9 Rail Welding and Joints

All rail used for main and secondary track shall be joined by either flash butt or thermite
welding process in accordance with Section 3.2.9.1 – “Continuous Welded Rail”.
Welded rail joints, on opposing rails, shall not be located at the same location but shall rather
be staggered along the longitudinal axis. The staggering of welded rail joints shall be in
accordance with the following criteria:
• Both welded rail and non-welded joints in opposite rails shall be staggered 10 feet
minimum;
• Welded rail joints in and non-welded joints in rail used for turnouts shall be staggered
2 feet 6 inches minimum.
3.2.9.1 Continuous Welded Rail

All rails shall be continuously welded by either the electric flash-butt or thermite process in
accordance with the current AREMA Manual, Volume I, Chapter 4, "Rail."
3-24 March 2014

Continuously welded rail shall be de-stressed to zero thermal stress at 105°+ 10°/-5°F (40° +
5°/-3°C).
De-stressing procedures shall conform to FRA requirements.
The use of temporary bolted joints during construction may be specified with the requirement
that SANDAG reviews and approves the proposed method of trackwork installation and the
welding procedures.
A program for testing welded joints shall be incorporated into the track installation contract
specifications for acceptance.
3.2.9.2 Bolted (Non-Welded) Rail Joints

Bolted rail joints shall be placed only where required to accommodate LRT signal track
circuits and connections to special trackwork. Bolted rail joints shall be electrically bonded to
provide a continuous path for traction power negative return current and signal circuits.
All rail ends at rail joints shall be beveled and end hardened.
Bolted rail joints shall utilize 36-inches, 6-hole type joint bars using the heavy design criteria
conforming to the current AREMA Manual, Volume I, Chapter 4, "Rail". Track bolts, nuts and
lock washers shall also conform to AREMA standards.
3.2.10 Emergency Guardrail

Emergency guardrail shall be used on joint use freight and light rail track in accordance with
AREMA standards. In light rail only track, the designer shall review the alignment and
recommend the use of guard rail as needed. Emergency guardrail shall be designed for
maximum vehicle speeds.
3.2.11 Rail Seats and Fasteners

The rail seats and fasteners shall hold the rail to the ties. Due to the negative return
requirements, rail seats and fasteners shall also insulate the rail from the ground (see Figure
3-8). Rail anchors will not be needed or used. Other rail fastening methods shall be
evaluated for street track, ballasted track and Special Trackwork.
3.2.11.1 Timber Crossties

Rail shall be secured to timber crossties using screw lagged tie plates and rail clips. Tracks
in yards or existing spiked mainline track may have rail secured to timber crossties with tie
plates and spikes. Tie plates shall have a 40:1 cant to the rail. Tie plates and spikes shall
conform to the current AREMA Manual, Volume I, Chapter 5, Plan No. 7, Punch Pattern A.
3-25 March 2014

Figure 3-8. – Typical Rail Fastener for Concrete Tie
3.2.11.2 Concrete Crossties

Concrete cross ties will use with rail spring clips, isolated from the tie using plastic rail clip
insulators, embedded rail clip shoulders, and elastomeric rail pads shall be used and placed
on an insulating pad. Rail spring clips shall be secured to concrete crossties with Pandrol
SRS FASTCLIP or e-clip type tie clips or approved equal. Elastomeric neoprene tie pads
shall be used on the rail seats of the tie to protect against rail seat abrasion.
3.2.11.3 Direct Fixation

SANDAG uses three types of direct fixation track construction including on-slab, embedded,
and plinth. Direct fixation shall be used on bridge aerial structures in accordance with
Volume 1 – Civil Work, “Structures” Section, in tunnels, and on slab track sections. The
designer shall specify direct fixation rail fastener assemblies including standard
manufactures: track fasteners, insert assemblies, and Pandrol SRS FASTCLIP type of rail
clips. Rail fastener assemblies shall be specified to be corrosion resistant using galvanized
components where practical.
Fastener assemblies shall be placed on 30 inches centers for tangent track and 24 inches
centers on curves.
Direct fixation rail fasteners shall provide the required lateral and longitudinal restraint for
continuous welded rail (CWR) and the electrical insulation required for the negative return
current and the proper operation of 60 Hz track signal circuits.
3-26 March 2014

Direct fixation fasteners shall incorporate, or be placed on, a suitable elastomeric pad for
reducing transmission of high frequency (i.e., greater than 30 Hz) loads to the support
structure.
Rail fasteners for use in direct fixation special trackwork shall be of a design compatible with
the standard fastener used in conventional direct fixation track.
Direct fixation fasteners shall provide a 40:1 cant of the rail.
Rail clips or other devices used in direct fixation fasteners shall produce the required
longitudinal rail restraint after repeated load testing in accordance with AREMA Chapter 30,
except load application angle in that test shall be 27 degrees.
The designer shall specify lateral and vertical adjustments tolerances for the contractor that
preserve 50 percent of the fastener assembly adjustment for use by others in future
adjustments of gauge and grade.
The designer shall recommend a method of rail stress distribution on structures, at tunnel
portals and slab tracks, for approval by the project manager. Zero restraint rail fastener
assemblies may be used when the design also provides for positive seating of the rail on the
track fastener under service conditions.
Fastener assemblies shall be placed on concrete plinths on bridge aerial structures. Plinths
may be used for other direct fixation conditions. Superelevation shall be accomplished on the
plinths. Minimum and maximum plinth dimensions shall be determined by the designer and
approved by SANDAG. The designer shall keep the plinth depths to minimum, but no less
than 6 in. Plinths shall be designed to restrain the fastener under all loading conditions. Plinth
reinforcing shall be designed to limit stray current from the rail to the main structural
reinforcing steel of the structure or slab. Length of plinth sections shall be typically 9.5feet on
tangent and 7.25 feet on curves, and not less than 4.5 feet on tangent track and 5.25 feet on
curved track. Spacing between plinths sections shall be 6 in. minimum.
Plinth curb shall be provided at transitions from ballasted track to direct fixation track on the
structural abutment at the transition point interface. The plinth curb shall be oriented
perpendicular to the rail and shall extend the full width of the structure. Where the transition
occurs on a curve the plinth curb shall incorporate the required track superelevation. Provide
drainage through plinth curb to accommodate anticipated flow.
3.2.12 Track Access

Right-of-Way access for LRT personnel and equipment shall be provided to the maximum
extent possible and at every turnout and crossover. Areas shall be provided at or near these
locations for the parking of maintenance vehicles.
Hi-rail access points shall be located on tangent track whenever possible. Access points
shall be adequately secured to prevent unauthorized entry. Spacing of locations shall be
coordinated with the rail operator.
3-27 March 2014

3.2.13 Noise and Vibration

Noise and vibration shall be measured and mitigated, if necessary, in accordance with the
environmental studies and the current FTA guidelines.
As directed by the SANDAG project manager wayside rail lubricators, using proven lubricants
may also be utilized to provide reduction of airborne noise due to wheel/rail contact in
sensitive locations.
3.3 Special Trackwork

Special trackwork includes turnouts, track crossings, wyes and crossovers. Special
trackwork shall be designed, manufactured and installed in accordance with SANDAG
guidelines and the current AREMA Manual except as modified to meet special conditions
approved by the SANDAG Director Rail. Tolerances shall be in accordance with AREMA
portfolio of Trackwork Plans. All frogs and flangeways shall be designed to accommodate an
AAR wheel profile.
All special trackwork shall be located on vertical and horizontal tangents, except as approved
by the SANDAG Director of Rail. The minimum length between any point of switch and a
passenger station platform shall be 50 feet. Except as approved by SANDAG Director of
Rail, special trackwork shall not be placed inside station limits. The minimum horizontal
distance from any point of switch to any physical constraint (i.e., grade crossing, bridge deck,
etc.) shall be 10 feet.
Special trackwork shall be designed to facilitate operations and maintenance. Final location
of special trackwork shall be reviewed with the operator and approved by SANDAG. Two
single crossovers shall be used instead of double crossovers unless space restrictions dictate
a double crossover. Special trackwork shall not be placed on bridges or elevated structures
that are less than 1,500 feet in length or as approved by the SANDAG. Special trackwork in
paved street running track shall be kept to the minimum needed to meet operational
requirements including single tracking and reverse running. Special trackwork in street
running track shall be paved and with rubber/rail interfaces at least on the gauge side of rails
to form the flangeway. Switch points and switch machines shall be surrounded by galvanized
steel boxes designed to allow for full motion of switches when pavement is placed up to the
boxes. The boxes shall be designed to reduce exposure to the operating mechanisms.
Special trackwork in paved street running track shall not located within 20 feet of an
intersection, measured from the projected face of curb of cross street through the intersection
or in an area where traffic could legally cross the special trackwork.
Special trackwork shall be all new material in accordance with the requirements of AREMA
plans. Turnouts and crossovers shall match the 115 RE rail profile. Turnouts and crossovers
shall include switch rails, stock rails, closure rails, special plates, gauge plates, points, blocks,
manganese turnout frogs, crossing diamonds, guardrails, and all other parts necessary for a
complete installation.
Turnouts and crossovers shall have insulated assemblies. Turnouts shall be designated right
hand or left hand. Typical turnout usage is as follows:
3-28 March 2014

• No. 20 turnouts (39 feet curved split switch points) shall be used on mainline
ballasted track at specific locations where high speed operations is essential;
• No. 10 turnouts (19 feet 6 inches curved switch points) shall be the minimum
standard on all mainline track;
• No. 8 turnouts (19 feet 6 inches curved switch points) shall not be used unless
approved by the SANDAG Director of Rail;
• No. 6 turnouts (11 feet straight switch points) shall be used in the yard or in storage
track areas only.
The designer shall evaluate the site conditions and recommend the tie material, spacing, and
components. The final determination will be made by the SANDAG Project Manager with
concurrence by MTS. Special trackwork shall be placed on hardwood timber /concrete
switch ties spaced as shown on turnout, crossover or crossing diamond drawings. Switch
ties shall typically be 7inches in depth by 9 inches in width pressure-treated hardwood. The
length and number of switch ties shall be as shown on standard plans for Special Trackwork.
Where approved by the SANDAG Director of Rail, special trackwork installed on concrete
elevated structures or in tunnels shall be placed on plinths or concrete slab by direct fixation
using standard components. Switch points for primary and secondary tracks shall be as per
AREMA Detail 5100, Plan 221-08.
All mainline frogs shall be equipped with appropriate guard rails. Yard frogs shall be self-
guarded. Spring frogs, flange bearing frogs, lift-over frogs and other special frog
configurations shall be approved by the SANDAG Director of Rail.
Necessary drainage provisions shall be made in all street turnouts to preclude standing water
in flangeways, tongue areas, and in switch-throwing mechanisms. Special trackwork is a
source of noise and vibration, therefore its location shall be selected to minimize these
effects.
3.4 Other than Mainline Track

Track other than main line track includes yard track, secondary track, and shop track.
3.4.1 Yard Track

All yard track criteria shall conform to the mainline track criteria except as follows in this
section.
3.4.1.1 Ballast
No. 5 ballast conforming to AREMA Manual, Volume 1, Chapter 1, Part 2, “Ballast”
specifications shall be used on all yard tracks.
A minimum depth of 8 inches of ballast shall be used between the bottom of the tie and the
top of subballast. The top of the ballast elevation shall be 1 in. below the base of rail and the
ballast shoulder shall extend beyond the ends of the ties to form a suitable walking surface.
3-29 March 2014

3.4.1.2 Cross Ties

Yard tracks shall use only timber cross ties as described in Section 3.2.7 – “Timber Cross
Ties”. Spacing of cross ties for yard track shall be as follows:
• In tangent and curved track of radius greater than or equal to 500 feet: 30 inches
center-to-center;
• In curves of radius less than 500 feet but greater than or equal to 300 feet: 24 inches
center-to-center;
• In curves of radius less than 300 feet: 21 inches center-to-center;
• For special trackwork spacing shall be spaced per the standard plans.
3.4.1.3 Rail
All rails in the yard tracks shall be new 115 RE section, conforming to the current AREMA
Manual, Volume I, Chapter 4, "Rail." Rail shall be welded to the longest strings possible by
either shop or field welding process. Rails shall be jointed where welding rail is not practical
for construction and handling.
3.4.1.4 Restraining Rail

All yard tracks with a centerline radius of 100 feet or less shall have inner guard restraining
rails mounted adjacent to the inside rail in accordance with AREMA plans and specifications.
3.4.1.5 Rail Joints

Standard bolted rail joints may be used to connect switch points, sections of emergency
guard rail, restraining rail, or running rail and special trackwork in yard. Rail ends shall be
beveled, hardened and drilled for joint bars in accordance with AREMA Manual, Volume 1,
Chapter 4, Part 1,“Design””, Section 1.3
Rails joined with standard bolted joints shall have a gap between rail ends in accordance with
the requirements of the AREMA Manual, Volume 1, Chapter 5, Part 5, “Track Maintenance”,
Section 5.1.
Bolted joints in running rails shall be electrically bonded to provide a continuous path for
traction power negative return current and signal circuits, if applicable.
3.4.1.6 Special Trackwork

All yard turnouts shall be No. 6 with 11 feet straight switch points conforming to AREMA Point
Detail 5100, plan 221-08, with graduated risers. Self-guarded frogs shall be used. Special
Trackwork shall match the 115 RE profile.
3.4.1.7 Paved Trackwork

Trackwork within the limits of the yard where personnel and equipment access is frequently
required shall be paved. Concrete or asphalt may be used and placed on top of ballasted
trackway to the top of rail with provisions for wheel flangeways (See MTDB Standard Plans,
ST-07).
3-30 March 2014

3.4.2 Shop Trackwork

Shop trackwork shall be installed within the limits of the maintenance shop building. This
type of installation shall be similar to the embedded trackwork except in pit areas. In shop pit
area, steel girders installed longitudinally beneath the rail and fastened with crane rail clamps
or similar rail fasteners shall support each rail.
3.4.3 Bumping Posts

Sliding type bumping posts shall be installed at the end of each operating track with
temporary or permanent stub ends. A bumping post equipped with shock absorbing or
cushion head may be installed with prior SANDAG approval. The bumping post shall be
designed so as to engage the anti-climber or end sill of the LRV without any portion of the
bumping post interfering with the LRV coupler, regardless of it position. The design of the
bumping post shall provide the following:
• Bumping posts shall be of one (1) type, suitable for installation in ballasted or direct
fixation trackwork;
• Bumping posts shall be able to withstand a striking force of 60,024 pounds minimum.
3.5 Highway-Railway Crossings

A highway-railway crossing shall be defined as any public or private accessible area, such as
a city street, city sidewalk, or private drive, where non-rail traffic is allowed to cross the tracks
at the same grade.
Design of all vehicular or pedestrian traveled ways, approaching a highway-railway crossing,

unless otherwise noted, shall be in accordance with the current specifications and design
guidelines of the applicable local jurisdictions, California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC)
General Orders, AREMA Chapter 5, Part 8, California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices (CMUTCD) Part 8, United States Code of Federal Regulations Title 23 Part 646
Subpart B, and the diagnostic team’s requirements (see Volume 2, Section 5.4). For those
cases where the local jurisdictions have no design guidelines, the Caltrans Design Standards
shall be used. Design shall also be in conjunction with Section 5.4 - “Grade Crossing
Warning Systems”.
Designer shall take into consideration the potential for vehicular and pedestrian traveled way
widening when designing a highway-railway crossing and be incorporated into the design for
future application. Where vehicular and pedestrian traveled way widening is proposed the
designer shall coordinate with the governing agency.
Highway-railway crossings shall be located on ballasted, tangent track, away from special
trackwork unless otherwise approved by the SANDAG Project Manager. Only monolithic
segments of rail shall be placed through a grade crossing. Rail joints and thermite welds
shall not be located within a grade crossing.
Grade crossings shall incorporate the use of pre-fabricated durable materials including pre-
cast concrete panels or with the approval of the SANDAG Project Manager, rubberized
panels, placed between and adjacent to the running rails including installation of panel end
restraints. Panels shall be removable to allow for track maintenance and provide ease of
3-31 March 2014

reinstallation. Consideration shall also be given to electrical isolation, non-interference with

electrical track circuits or rail fastenings, vehicle tire traction and ride comfort, and slip
resistance for pedestrians.
Cross tie size and spacing shall be analyzed for all highway-railway crossings based on both
LRV loads and traffic loads.
3.5.1 PUC Requirements

• General Order No. 72-B - Construction and Maintenance of Crossings at Grade of
Railroads and Public Streets;
• General Order No. 75-D - Protection of Railroad Grade Crossings;
• General Order No. 88-B - Alteration of Existing Grade Crossing of Public Roads,
Highways, and Streets with Railroads;
• General Order No. 135 - The Occupancy of Public Grade Crossings by Railroads.
3-32 March 2014

Chapter 4.0 – Traction Power
4.0 TRACTION POWER

These criteria govern the design, installation, and performance requirements of the major
traction power system elements, including the traction power substations, DC distribution
system, and overhead catenary system and its supports.
All elements of the traction power systems shall use service-proven technologies that are
readily available and off the shelf. Proprietary equipment systems shall be avoided where
possible.
Traction power systems shall be designed in accordance with California Public Utility
Commission, General Order 95 requirements and, except as otherwise described in this
section or shown in the standard plans, applicable recommended practices described in the
American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA), Manual for
Railway Engineering, Volume 3, Chapter 3: Part 2 “Clearances” (section 2.2); Part 4
“Railroad Electrification System”, and IEEE Guide for Rail Transit Traction Power Systems
Modeling, Standard 1653.3 and IEEE Standard for Supporting Structures for Overhead
Contact Systems for Transit Systems, Standard 1630.
In areas where both freight trains and light rail vehicles will operate over the same tracks the
OCS support structures shall conform to the minimum clearances described in California
Public Utility Commission, General Order 26-D except that the contact wire may be located
within the clearance envelope at a height of not less than 22 feet. SDTI has a deviation
granted by the CPUC for this contact wire height.
In areas were only light rail vehicles will only operate over the tracks the side clearances and
emergency egress walkways shall conform to the minimum requirements described in
California Public Utility Commission, General Order 143-B.
Definitions:
Unless otherwise defined in this section of the design criteria, all of the terms listed in the
AREMA “Manual for Railway Engineering” Chapter 33 Glossary shall be utilized as
definitions. In addition the following descriptions shall be used to define the following terms:
• Ambient Temperature: Outside air temperature at location of assembly or

equipment to be set to a specified setting based on measured air temperature value.
• Catenary Suspension: Same definition as Catenary as defined in the AREMA
“Manual for Railway Engineering” Chapter 33 Glossary.
• Centerline of Track: Is the line drawn perpendicular to the top of the running rails
along the centerline of track and perpendicular to the trackway.
• Joint Use Track: A segment of track over which freight and Light Rail operate.
• Line Fault (Traction Power System): A low resistance electrical connection
enabling current to flow directly between the positive traction power system
conductor(s) and the negative traction power system conductor(s) without passing
through the light rail vehicle traction power motors and control circuits.
4-1 March 2014

• Midspan Offset: Is the distance from the superelevated centerline of track to the
contact wire measured parallel to a line drawn perpendicular to a rail from the top of
the rail to the top of the adjacent running rail of a single track.
• Multiple Operating Line Segment: A segment of track over which two or more Light
Rail lines operate. The complete turnout and diamonds where the line segments
merge on to the same track are included in the Joint Operation Segment.
• Plumb-bob: Is tool composed of a conical metal weight suspended from a string and
used to establish a vertical reference line.
• Power Section: A segment of the overhead catenary contact and traction power
feeder system that extends from a traction power substation (TPSS) to the adjacent
TPSS and power is typically supplied from both ends.
• Single Operating Line Segment: A segment of track over which one Light Rail line
operates. The turnout and diamonds are not included in the non-joint operation
segment.
• Standard System Depth: The vertical distance measured along Vertical Plumb
Line between the catenary system messenger and contact wires at support points in
locations other than overlaps, transitional areas, and crossovers.
• Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA): A digital information
networked computer system that monitors and acquires equipment and system
status, alarm, data (e.g. voltage, current, energy consumption, reactive power), and
indication information and enable command(s) to be sent to field programmable logic
controller(s) (PLC) and device(s) that respond to command(s) with prescribed
action(s) taken by the device(s).
• System Depth: The vertical distance measured along the Vertical Plumb Line
between the catenary system messenger and contact wires at support points.
• Transfer Trip: Act of controlling the opening of remote direct current (DC)
breaker(s) in adjacent traction power substation(s) (TPSS) feeding the same Power
Section when a DC breaker feeding the same Power Section trips (opens) as a result
of a detected traction power system (TPS) Line Fault.
• Vertical Plumb Line: A vertical reference line established using a Plumb-bob.
4.1 Environmental Requirements

All systems shall be designed to operate given the environmental conditions indicated herein.
Ambient Temperature:
Highest: 115 degrees F (46 degrees C)
Lowest: 15 degrees F (-9 degrees C)
Yearly Average: 70 degrees F (21 degrees C)
Humidity: 10 to 100 percent
4-2 March 2014

Precipitation: 4 inches (10 cm) in 24 hours and 1.5 inches (4 cm) in one
hour
Ice Loading: None
Seismic Zone (UBC): 4
Maximum Wind Velocity: As described in the latest edition of the California Building
Code (CBC)
Maximum Wind Velocity for

Train Operations: 56 mph (25 m/s)
Atmosphere (typically): Coastal Environment
Weather (typically): Sunny
Lightning (Isokeraunic level): 5 per Year
4.2 Applicable Documents

All assemblies and components included in the design, manufacture, and installation of the
traction power system shall conform to the latest editions of the standards listed in Volume 1
– Introduction, “Governing Regulations and Laws” Section and applicable standards of the
following agencies or organizations:
• American National Standards Institute (ANSI);

• American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA);
• National Electric Code (NEC);
• State of California Electrical Safety Orders;
• Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA);
• Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE);
• National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
4.3 Standard Plans

SANDAG maintains Standard Plans for the traction power system design. The designer shall
utilize the latest version of the SANDAG Standard Plans where applicable. Where the
Standard Plans do not cover a specific type of application, the designer shall submit
additional drawings to SANDAG for approval. SANDAG is currently working on a standard
plan update.
4.4 Acceptance Testing and Measurements

The designer shall include in the Special Provisions detailed testing procedures, submittal
criteria, and acceptance criteria for each of the tests specified. The designer shall also specify
that the contractor shall submit a Test Plan, Testing Procedures, and Test Data forms for
4-3 March 2014

approval by the SANDAG Construction Manager a minimum of 60 working days prior to the
scheduled start of the test.
The designer shall specify that:
• The test plan and procedures shall be in accordance with all requirements of the
standards of the governing agencies;
• The contractor shall notify the SANDAG construction manager of the location, date,
and time that testing will be performed a minimum of five working days in advance of
the actual testing;
• The contractor shall set up for testing in advance of the actual testing;
• The contractor shall include complete details of test results and corrections or
adjustments performed on the traction power system during testing and all items to
be corrected with the final test results report;
• The contractor shall submit the results of each of the tests within 20 working days
following each test.
The designer shall specify additional acceptance measurements to be taken by the

contractor for contract acceptance. The list of acceptance measurements to be taken by the
contractor shall be submitted by the designer to the SANDAG project manager for approval
with the 65 percent submittal.
4.4.1 Test Documents

The designer shall specify that at least six copies of each test document shall be submitted to
the SANDAG construction manager and that the documents shall be approved prior to
testing. The designer shall also specify that six sets of all revisions to the test document shall
be submitted to the SANDAG construction manager.
4.4.2 Test Plan

The test plan that is prepared by the contractor shall be used as a controlling document for all
tests and shall include the following information:
• The title of each test with reference to the respective article or section number in the
Special Provisions;
• The organization performing each test;
• The test location;
• The submittal date of each test procedure, test report, and/or certified test document;
• The starting date of each test;
• The completion date of each test.
4-4 March 2014

4.4.3 Test Procedures

Test procedures shall be developed by the Contractor and conform to the following minimum
requirements:
• Title of the test, date, and name of individuals who prepared and approved the
procedure;
• Test objectives;
• Test location and date of the test;
• Equipment and instrumentation with the accuracy and calibration data;
• Governing standards and test methodology, including test setup with circuit diagrams
and test sequence;
• Test pass/fail criteria, including data evaluation procedures;
• Test data requirements, including forms and format for recording data.
4.4.4 Test Reports

The test reports that are prepared by the contractor for each test shall document the results
of the test. The test report shall contain the following:
• Title, date, and location of the test;

• Name of individuals who prepared and approved the report;
• Test data forms with signatures of test witnesses;
• Observations and additional data, including tables and photographs;
• Descriptions of failures and modifications;
• Abbreviations and references;
• Summary and conclusions.
4.4.5 Field Test Categories

The following types of field tests, listed in no particular order, shall be specified when
applicable to the scope of work.
• Soil Resistivity Tests using the Wenner method indicated in IEEE 81-2012;
• Grounding Resistance Tests of catenary pole grounding, and of substation grounding
system;
• Power Circuit Continuity Tests (positive and negative return sides) performed on
each of the test sections between adjacent traction power substations of the project;
• Dielectric Tests performed on each of the OCS test sections between substations;
4-5 March 2014

• High Potential Test of all feeder cables at voltages and for time durations in
accordance with ICEA recommendations;
• OCS/LRV Clearance Test;
• Substation Short-circuit Test (Ground Fault Test);
• Train Starting Tests for calibration of dc current rate-of-rise protective relays;
• AC and DC Protective Relay Settings Verification;
• Substation Equipment Integrity and Functional Tests;
• Substation Noise Level Tests, interior and exterior.
Test equipment calibration requirements and additional testing requirements shall be added
by the designer to the Special Provisions, as needed, to ensure a safe and operational
system.
4.5 Compatibility with the Existing Systems

All extensions of the traction power system shall be fully compatible with the existing 650 volt
nominal DC system.
4.6 Energized System

The designer shall specify that no work be performed on an energized traction power facility
unless the Contractor’s qualified lineman is authorized to do so by San Diego Trolley, Inc.
(SDTI), staff and the SANDAG Systems Engineer on a task and site specific basis. The
plans, special provisions, and cost estimate shall include safety requirements, detailed work
plan requirements, and requirements for maintaining operation. All work performed on high
voltage (600 volts or higher) energized structures shall meet the requirements including but
not limited to Cal OSHA and the California Electrical Safety Orders.
4.7 Technical Design Reports

The traction electrification system (TES) designer shall perform a dynamic load flow study to
support the TES design decisions, and all the work necessary to create and submit a written
traction power report to SANDAG containing:
• Executive summary including key results and recommendations;

• Study approach;
• Transit system data and assumptions for the computerized model, including track
alignment and stations; speed limits; vertical profile; essential data for the TES such
as parameters and locations of the traction power substations; overhead contact
system (OCS) wire sizes and sectionalization; dc feeders’ sizes, lengths and
connection points; negative return system details, etc.;
• Design criteria requirements;
• Analysis of simulations results and key findings
4-6 March 2014

The analysis of simulation results shall contain, at a minimum, the follow conclusion
information:
• Worst-case minimum train voltages between the substations. For the contingency
operations with a substation out-of-service, if the worst-case minimum train voltage is
below the minimum acceptable, the report shall also provide the probability of the
train voltage falling below the minimum acceptable level, calculated per methodology
described in Sec. 4.8.5 below;
• Maximum running rails to ground potentials values;
• Maximum Root Mean Square (RMS) load current values in the substations’ feeders;
• Maximum RMS and momentary current values through the substations’
transformer/rectifier units;
• Thermal capacity evaluation and maximum temperature values of the overhead
contact system (OCS), assuming worst-case environmental conditions and worst-
case normal and contingency operations of the TES, to ensure there is no danger of
overheating (especially annealing) of the contact and messenger wires, and no hot
spots.
4.8 System Design Requirements

The traction electrification system (TES) shall be designed to support normal train operations
with the required consist sizes and headways, with any one traction power substation (TPSS)
being out of service. In the outage zone around the out-of-service TPSS it shall be assumed
that the trains are still run normally, at maximum power level by the train operators, without
intentional reduction of acceleration or speed.
Traction Power and Overhead Contact System computer aided drawing files shall be
provided by the designer to SANDAG Systems Configuration Manager. The Construction
Contractor shall update design drawings with as-built information and submit final drawings
for the installed system.
4.8.1 Operational Criteria

Unless otherwise indicated by the train operations plan used for the design or upgrade of a
specific line, the TES shall be designed to support the following operational criteria:
Design headway, peak period: As specified by SANDAG/MTS
Station dwell time: 30 seconds in Downtown, 20 seconds elsewhere
Train passenger load: AW2
Train consist: 4 cars per train
Layover at end of Line: 5 minutes
Duration of the peak period: 3 hours
4-7 March 2014

4.8.2 Minimum Voltage Criteria

The train voltage is measured between the contact wire and running rails at the train, as the
average voltage over the rectification cycle.
The traction electrification system (TES) comprising traction power substations, overhead
contact system (OCS), running rails used for negative return, and dc feeders shall be
designed to satisfy the following voltage requirements:
• Light (0.5 percent) load voltage at the TP substations: 690 volts dc (assuming
nominal primary voltage from the utility system and neutral tap of the rectifier
transformer);
• Minimum voltage at the trains for normal TES configuration and normal train
operations (no train bunching) shall be above 420 volts DC for any directional timing
offset (DTO) between trains moving in the opposite directions on the same line;
• In contingency operations with a traction power substation (TPSS) out of service,
minimum train voltage below 420 V dc is acceptable provided the probability of the
voltage falling below 420 V dc, as a function of the DTO between trains on the
opposing tracks, is less than 10 percent. The load flow study for determining the
worst-case minimum voltage and related probability of occurrence for the voltage
falling below 420 V dc shall be based on multiple simulations with different DTOs,
referred to as statistical run, as explained in Section 4.8.5.
4.8.3 Criteria for Contingency Operations

Contingency operations for the purpose of a traction power load flow study and TES design
are defined as operations with one TPSS out of service. It is also assumed that such
contingency involves loss of the transformer/rectifier unit, or of the utility’s incoming medium-
voltage power; but that the dc feeder circuit breakers remain closed, or section bypass
switches are closed, thus providing for electrical continuity of the OCS near the substation
that is not powering the OCS with transformed and rectified utility power.
4.8.4 Criteria for Light Rail Vehicle (LRV) Storage Facilities

LRV storage facilities, or Yards, shall have their own TES which under normal conditions is
isolated from the TES of the main line, on both the positive and negative side. Provisions
shall be made, however, for the main line to serve as a backup source and supply the Yard’s
TES in contingencies involving the Yard TPSS being out of service.
The Yard’s TES shall be designed to support car voltages above 420 V dc with the storage
facility fully occupied by vehicles, each drawing maximum auxiliary power, at the same time
as a four-car train is under full acceleration at location in the Yard resulting in a worst-case
voltage drop.
4.8.5 Load Flow Analysis of the Traction Electrification System (TES)

The TES performance, such as train voltages, RMS and peak momentary currents in the
TP substations, RMS currents in the TPSS connection feeders, power demand imposed
on the utility’s supply system, etc. shall be determined via load flow simulations using a
4-8 March 2014

computer program that accounts for the following subsystems and aspects of the LRT
operations, as parts of one integrated model:
• LRV with its weight, dimensional, tractive and breaking characteristics;

• Vertical profile;
• Horizontal alignment, including stations, curves and speed limits;
• Line(s) and track configuration;
• Traction power substations;
• Positive dc distribution system;
• Negative dc distribution system;
• Utility medium voltage ac system parameters at the TPSS interface points;
• Train resistance to motion, as impacted by track curves and grades;
• Train operations plan, including service line routing, train consist sizes, headways,
and train passenger loading.
The load flow analysis for each TES configuration shall comprise multiple simulations with
different DTOs. In order to capture practically all possible train status/location combinations of
trains on the opposing tracks that may occur for a given headway pattern, the number of
simple simulations with different DTOs shall be determined as the ratio of the headway to the
DTO increment, where the DTO increment does not exceed the duration of the peak current
of the vehicle during acceleration. In addition, the duration of the individual (simple)
simulations shall at least match the headway cycle.
The set of such simulations is referred to as statistical run, and with the proper settings
(number of simple runs and DTO increment as described above) the statistical run will cover
all possible simultaneous train accelerations from the same and adjacent passenger stations,
as well as other high-power coincidences in a given area, like those involving also trains re-
accelerating after exiting zones with speed restrictions, or moving on steep uphill grades.
For simulation of contingency operations, the probability of the minimum train voltage falling
below 420 V dc, as a function of the DTO, shall be calculated as well. The probability
calculation shall be based on the ratio of the number of simple simulations of the statistical
run for which the minimum voltage is below 420 V dc, to the total number of simulations
comprising the statistical run.
4.8.6 Stray Current Mitigation

In order to minimize stray currents from/to the tracks for purposes of mitigating electrolytic
corrosion in metal structures in the vicinity of the LRT line, as well as for safety, the traction
power system design shall limit peak voltages-to-ground in the running rails to no more than
50 volts in normal system operations, and to 75 volts in contingency operations with a TPSS
out-of-service.
Additional measures for stray current corrosion mitigation shall include:
4-9 March 2014

• Not grounding the substation rectifier cathode or negative return bus, except at the
shop rectifier, where it is grounded;
• Isolating the running rails from concrete station platforms by placing insulating
material around and under the rails and filling the void with low conductive (high el.
resistance) material;
• Insulating the running rails from the ties in case of ballasted track, and from the track
bed in case of direct fixation track, using insulating type fittings and accessories.
The designer shall require the contractor to conduct a corrosion study before and after the
start of revenue operation in accordance with the provisions of Section 3.2.5 – “Corrosion”.
4.8.7 Traction Power System Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

New traction power substations shall be networked to central control via the LAN to the
nearest station LAN and WAN network switches and interface with the AIMS Software
platform provided by Arinc as described in the Communications section of this Design
Criteria, Chapter 6. The system shall remotely monitor substation status and control
AC/DC main breaker and all DC feeder breakers via an approved industrial PLC.
Monitoring status shall include all fault annunciation points, AC breaker, DC main
breaker and all DC feeder breaker positions, line voltage, and other points as directed by
the SANDAG’s System Engineer. The LAN and WAN network connections shall also be
used for transfer trip functionality as described in other sections of this Design Criteria.
All substations shall include substation Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
(SCADA) features. The SCADA system shall enable the following features to be viewed
and controlled at the OCC:
• A line and utility service voltage and current levels;

• AC & DC breaker status and control;
• Transfer trip;
• Transformers winding temperature; and
• Rectifier temperature and diode failure (first and second stage).
SCADA and transfer trip communications shall be achieved by the use of all dielectric
fiber optic cable links from each substation to the Local Area Networks (LAN) at each
station. All stations and the Operation Control Center shall be linked via the Wide Area
Network (WAN).
Commands shall use Modbus Protocols and bit addresses shall be consistent with those
used on the existing system. The designer shall obtain a list of SCADA features, set up
a meeting to review the list and review the list to determine if the list is complete or if
additional features are desired in order to fulfill MTS (SDTI)’s needs. The designer shall
develop additional bid addresses, if needed.
4-10 March 2014

4.8.8 Transfer Trip System

DC feeder circuit breakers of different substations supplying the same electrical OCS section
shall be equipped with a transfer trip system that communicates via the MTS non-vital wide
area network (see the Chapter 6 – “Communications” for additional information on the non-
vital wide area fiber optic network).
Short-circuit type fault detection by one of the circuit breakers shall automatically result in
tripping the remaining circuit breakers feeding the same section in auto-reclose mode, with
auto-reclosing preceded by load measuring.
The Traction Power Substation contract documents shall identify all standard MTS SCADA
interface information including transfer trip.
4.9 Traction Power Substations

This section is intended to ensure proper placement, site preparation, and interconnection of
a substation to the utility and traction power system. The designer shall coordinate design
efforts with the SANDAG Systems Engineer regarding substations.
Each traction power substation (TPSS) shall be self-contained in a pre-engineered metal

building, and capable of working in parallel with other substations anywhere on the San
Diego Trolley system. For new lines and upgrades to the existing lines SANDAG has
standardized the following aspects of the substations:
• 1.5 or 2.0 MW rated TPSS, with a duty cycle conforming to IEEE 1653.2 extra heavy
traction service;
• DC switchgear with a main dc breaker and one dc feeder breaker per track per
direction, with OCS sectionalizing gap at the substation;
• Low resistance grounding of dc switchgear and rectifier frames;
• 660 V dc nominal voltage (at full load and nominal voltage on the primary side);
• 4.5 percent initial voltage regulation of the transformer-rectifier unit (TRU) up to at
least 400 percent loading.
Substations shall be pre-fabricated and prewired, ready for connection to: utility service
points, traction power feeder cables, negative return cables, negative drainage cables and
the system-wide SCADA network. Substations shall be self-contained within a weatherproof
enclosure as shown in the SANDAG Standard Plans.
4.9.1 Substation Site Selection

The number, locations and power ratings of the traction power substations shall be
determined from a load flow study using the ultimate train operations plan (peak period). The
TP substations’ number, locations and ratings shall be selected in such manner that the LRT
system can maintain normal train service and meet the minimum voltage criteria with any one
TPSS being out-of-service for a duration of 2 to 3 hours during the peak period of operations
without overload on any of the TES equipment.
4-11 March 2014

The layout of the traction power system shall result in having a substation at or near the end
of each traction power section. This shall result in the installation of a TPSS with feeder
connections at the end of the line extension. At locations where it is determined to be
impractical for site and economic reasons, approval by the SANDAG Director or Rail is
required to eliminate placing a substation at the terminus of a line.
The designer shall coordinate substation site selection with SANDAG to avoid basing a
design on an unacceptable site. Considerations shall include: catenary system voltage,
environmental land use, visual impact, cost for SDG&E service and availability of right-of-
way.
Substation spacing shall be determined by the designer based on the load flow analysis and
the operational performance criteria establish for the load flow study. Spacing shall provide
for adequate line voltage under worst case conditions with a single traction power substation
off line.
Traction power substations shall be located as close as possible to the tracks, ideally within
250 feet of the nearby track.
4.9.2 Substation Site Requirements

Substation site shall be designated to accommodate two substations unless otherwise
directed by the systems engineer and have a minimum 16 feet wide access road in
accordance with SDG&E access requirements. A typical substation site plan is shown in
Figure 4-1. See SANDAG Standard Plans for more details. A minimum of 12 feet wide
access shall be provided to the substation transformer and rectifier units. Access from a
vehicular access point to the substation access doors shall be provided that is not less than
the width of the substation doorway width.
Where possible, substations shall be oriented so that the maintainer of the system, while
facing the DC breakers, is also facing the LRT tracks. The breaker to the right shall supply
power to the catenary to the right and the breaker to the left shall supply power to the
catenary to the left. Laminated, site-specific schematic drawings shall be furnished and
permanently mounted inside each substation showing the breakers, feeder arrangement, and
the OCS to the next adjacent substation. Each substation site design shall specify the
installation of all ground mats, raceways, conduit, cables, concrete foundation, and pull
boxes.
4-12 March 2014

Figure 4-1. – Typical Traction Power Substation Layout
4.9.2.1 Substation Grounding Requirements

Designer shall specify a ground grid system to support the ultimate number of substations at
each site as determined by the substation site requirements and utility requirements.
The substation ground mat, consisting of copper conductor and copper-clad ground rods,
shall be arranged in a grid under and extending beyond the substation foundation. The
ground mat shall be designed to meet the step and touch potentials criteria per IEEE Std. 80,
Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding.
Each site shall have a soil analysis performed to establish the soil properties, including soil
resistivity. The ground mat at each site shall be sized based on the worst soils conditions
(e.g. moisture content during high summer temperatures with no rain for months and high soil
resistivity values) so as to ensure adequate grounding is achieved at all times of the year.
4-13 March 2014

Substation Ground Grid Testing procedures shall be specified that ensure that substation and
perimeter fence is adequately grounded to ensure the touch potential is low enough to create
a low resistance path to ground.
4.9.2.2 Concrete Slab Foundation and Fencing

The exact location of the concrete foundation shall be coordinated with SANDAG during
design.
Substation sites shall be secured with a 10 feet high chain-link, steel picket, or insulated
perimeter fence typically located 14 feet from the substation enclosure and beyond the limits
of the ground mat. Where the perimeter fence is able to be located completely beyond the
limits of the ground mat, the perimeter fence may be grounded separately.
Where site specific constraints prevent the 10 feet high chain-link, steel picket, or insulated
substation perimeter fence from being located beyond the ground grid, then perimeter fence
shall be grounded to the ground mat to ensure it is at the same touch potential as the ground
mat.
The substation perimeter fence shall not be located closer than 9.5 feet to the nearest joint
use freight and LRT track, or 7.5 feet to the nearest LRT rail only track. All of the area within
the fenced perimeter shall be covered with 6 inches of 1 inch x No. 4 crushed rock as shown
in the Standard Plans.
Steel picket fences are typically used at locations that are more visible to the community and
the steel picket perimeter fence will help to mitigate the visual impact.
At locations where a right of way fence needs to be attached to a substation perimeter fence
that is grounded to the ground mat, the insulated fencing panels should be installed to
electrically isolate the right of way fence from the perimeter fence.
4.9.2.3 Utility Power Supply

A 12 kV ac, 3-phase utility service will be provided by San Diego Gas and Electric (SDG&E)
for each TP substation. SDG&E will furnish, install, terminate, and connect a three-
conductor, 12 kV, 60 Hz, three-phase feeder to each substation for traction power.
Designer shall design:
• A raised concrete landing with a minimum dimension of 60 inches wide by 56 inches

deep with 1 foot tread width stairs in front of the SDG&E 12 kV ac utility metering
access door, 2 inches below the threshold;
• A level pad at the same elevation as the top of TPSS foundation outside the pull
section conforming to the requirements of the SDG&E “Electrical Standards & Guide
Manual”;
• Provide a 2-inch conduit into the metering section conforming to the requirements of
the SDG&E “Electrical Standards & Guide Manual”;
• The metering section in conformance with the requirements of the SDG&E
“Electrical Standards & Guide Manual”;
4-14 March 2014

• A 16 feet wide access road from a publicly accessible roadway to the substation with
minimum curve radius of 40 feet to inside of curve (56 feet to outside of curve) in
conformance with SDG&E “Electrical Standards & Guide Manual”;
• Any other SDG&E requirements contained in the SDG&E “Electrical Standards &
Guide Manual” required to establish 12 kV utility service for each traction power
substation site.
The designer shall work with the SANDAG Utility coordinator and SDG&E with respect to
utility interface requirements, including metering and incoming circuit isolation provisions.
The designer shall incorporate the SDG&E’s service construction order showing the new
primary service conduit plan and ancillary facilities for each substation that will be installed by
SANDAG’s contractor in accordance with SDG&E’s service guide.
The 12 kV utility feeders to adjacent traction power substations shall be independent, and
ideally supplied from different high-voltage substations, or at least different 12 kV buses of the
same SDG&E high-voltage substation.
To ensure reliable service, adjacent substations shall be served by different utility distribution
circuits except as otherwise directed by the SANDAG project manager. Coordination with
utility interface shall be in accordance with Volume 1 – Civil Work, “Utilities” Section.
4.9.2.4 Substation Site Conduits

All conduit shall be nonmetallic, Schedule 40 PVC. Spare conduits shall extend 3 feet
beyond the concrete foundation and shall be capped. Conduits for positive feeder cable and
negative return cable shall not be terminated in the same substructure. The following
conduits, at a minimum, are required for each TPSS:
• Eight (4-inch) For positive feeder return cables (two per DC Breaker
Compartment);
• Two (4-inch) For negative feeder return cables (DC negative compartment to
track);
• One (4-inch) For utility 12kV;
• One (4-inch) For utility spare;
• Four (2-inch) For spare future negative drainage cables;
• One (2-inch) For LAN communication cabling from the nearest signal case or
signal feeder pole to the annunciator panel;
• One (2-inch) For remote metering to telecommunications point of connection.
The designer shall include additional positive and negative feeder conduits between the
pull box located closest to the feeder poles and the pull box near the substation to
provide for future cabling needs. Once a preliminary site plan has been put together for
the sites, the designer shall distribute the site plans and arrange a review meeting. At
the review meeting, the designer shall provide a recommendation regarding additional
4-15 March 2014

spare ducts and MTS and SANDAG will determine if additional conduits should be
added.
4.9.2.5 Visibility Requirement

Substations shall be equipped with an external blue light, mounted above the roof near the
AC switchgear, which will illuminate in response to an annunciator alarm. If necessary, the
designer shall require relocation of the blue light in order for the light to be visible to a trolley
operator.
4.9.3 Yard and Shop Substations

Yard and shop facilities shall be energized by substation(s) dedicated to these loads except
as otherwise directed by the SANDAG Director of Rail. The cathode of the substation
supplying the shop shall be solidly grounded and isolated from utility grounds. The positive
and negative circuits between the shop and Yard systems shall be isolated at the entry/exit
points from the shop building. Non-bridging section insulators shall be used for this purpose
on the positive side.
The positive and negative circuits between the Yard and mainline traction power system shall
be isolated on the Yard side near the interface (on the lead tracks) via non-bridging section
insulators in the OCS and insulated joints in the running rails. Normally open disconnect
switches shall be provided across those section insulators and insulated joints, mutually
interlocked, for backup power supply of the Yard from the mainline in the event the Yard
TPSS is out-of-service.
If a Yard is being added to the system or an existing Yard is being expanded, the designer
shall determine if an additional substation(s) is required. If so, the designer shall develop
contracts for site facilities as well as preparing the procurement contract for the substation.
4.9.4 Setting the Substation On-Site

For SANDAG-furnished substations, the designer shall specify that the substation
manufacturer is responsible for setting the substation on-site upon delivery. Designer shall
also require the substation manufacturer to perform factory inspection and testing of
substation prior to delivery and placement. The substation site Contractor shall be
responsible for: a) confirming in writing with the substation manufacturer the precise conduit
stub up locations and anchor bolt locations a minimum of two weeks prior to casting the pad;
b) prior to substation delivery marking the precise location the substation corners on the pad;
and c) confirming substation is properly set while the crane is on site and connected to the
substation load.
4.9.5 Terminations of Exterior Equipment

The designer shall specify that the contractor is responsible for terminating all exterior
equipment to the TPSS including, but not limited to, feeder cables, comm. cables, fans and
blue lights.
4.9.6 House Power

Each traction power substation shall have an internal step-down transformer (station service
transformer) supplying 240/120 volt, single-phase house power.
4-16 March 2014

4.9.7 SCADA
See Section 4.8.7 “Substation Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition” for system
functional criteria.

The traction power substations for the San Diego LRT system shall consist of the following in
terms of major equipment: ac switchgear, rectifier transformer, silicon-diode rectifier and dc
switchgear. Each TPSS shall have a single transformer-rectifier unit (TRU), and shall be
supplied by a single medium voltage feeder usually at 12 kV, 3-ph nominal voltage from the
local electric utility company. The substation equipment shall be housed in a pre-fabricated,
walk-in, weatherproof metal enclosure.
4.9.8.1 Mode of Operation and Design

Mainline traction power substation shall normally be operated with an ungrounded negative
system. There shall be no direct electrical connections between the negative system and the
substation ground system, or any other grounded structures except through a negative
grounding device (NGD) installed between the TPSS negative bus and ground grid. The
NGD shall close temporarily, thus grounding the TPSS negative bus and running rails for
safety, if elevated rail potentials are detected. Stray current analysis shall be performed by
the consultant using basic parameters of the track configuration, track resistance to ground,
substation spacing and locations, and train operations plan in the stray current analysis.
4.9.8.2 Stray Current Drainage Facilities

A stray current drainage bus (copper) shall be installed within each substation in an area
adjacent to the negative bus. The drainage bus shall be electrically insulated from the
building structural steel and other grounded facilities within the substation.
Four 1 inch PVC conduits shall be installed from within the substation enclosure, adjacent to
the stray current drainage bus, to a pullbox located underground, adjacent to the substation.
These conduits will permit utility companies, at their option, to install drainage cables to drain
stray current from underground utilities to the negative bus. Provisions shall be made to
permit periodic monitoring of stray currents on utility drainage cables.
4.9.8.3 DC Surge Arresters

Leakage current of these surge arresters under normal system operations shall be as low as
practical. If commercially available, gap type dc surge arrestors shall be considered in order
to minimize stray current corrosion, especially due to stray currents from failed metal oxide
varistor (MOV) type arrestors.
4.9.9 Negative Grounding System Protection

Protective device, known as negative grounding device (NGD) shall be installed at each
traction power substation between the negative bus and the ground grid. The NGD shall
automatically ground the negative bus of the substation rectifier unit and thus the adjacent
running rails during the occurrence of excessive dc potentials difference between earth and
the negative bus. The NGD shall also automatically remove the ground connection upon
cessation, or near cessation, of the current flow between the negative bus and ground grid, in
4-17 March 2014

order to minimize the stray currents and associated electrolytic corrosion threat to metal
structures.
4.10 DC Distribution System

This section provides general requirements for design of the DC distribution system
consisting of above and below ground conductors.
The DC distribution system shall be designed as a continuous bus allowing for load sharing
amongst adjacent substations, which also results in better train voltage support.
A sectionalizing gap in the overhead contact system (OCS) shall be provided at each TPSS.
Except were otherwise approved in writing by the SANDAG Systems Engineer on a site by
site basis, catenary tension sections shall be terminated at near the substation using an
insulated overlap which shall be used as a TPSS sectionalizing gap. Where site constraints
prohibit the use of an insulated overlap to create TPSS sectionalizing and approval is granted
by the SANDAG Systems Engineer on a site specific basis, then the sectionalizing gap shall
be achieved by other means, like the use of section insulators. A normally-open disconnect
switch shall be installed across the sectionalizing gap on each mainline track at every
substation, to provide means of electrical continuity of the OCS in the event the substation’s
dc bus has to be de-energized.
In case of an OCS of the catenary type, each track's contact and messenger wires shall
operate in electrical parallel, interconnected at frequent intervals (at every other pole typically)
by in-span jumpers.
For new lines the overhead contact systems of the two tracks shall be electrically separate,
except for the interconnections via the substations’ positive buses.
Connection of TPSS positive feeders to the OCS shall be via pole-mounted disconnect
switches to provide isolation capability for the feeder cables and substations circuit breakers
from the line. The OCS feeder poles shall be equipped also with surge arrestors, preferably
of the air gap type, for protection of the dc power cables and TPSS equipment from voltage
transients.
The running rails shall be used as negative return conductors for each track, with the running
rails of the two tracks cross bonded in accordance with the requirements described in
Section 4.10.10.3.
At locations where two or more mainlines separate or join, additional DC breakers section
breaks shall be added to ensure a fault on the Single Operating Line Segment will not affect
the operation on the other line where the multiple line segment join and operate over a
Multiple Operating Line Segment, see Figure 4-3.
4-18 March 2014

Figure 4-2. – TPSS Single Line Diagram with 4 DC Breaker
4-19 March 2014

Figure 4-3. – DC Breaker Locations for Single to Multiple Operating Line Segment
4-20 March 2014

4.10.1 Yard and Shop Traction Power Facilities

Yard and shop facilities shall be energized by a substation dedicated to the required load
except as otherwise approved by the SANDAG Director of Rail. A non-bridging section break
in the overhead contact system (OCS) shall isolate the yard substation and its load from main
line substations and associated loads. At the section break location, insulated joints shall be
indicated for installation in the track. Provisions shall be made for the interconnection of yard
and main line OCS, and yard and main line tracks by the closing of a lockable two-pole
switch, or separate interlocked single-pole switches. The overhead contact system in shop
buildings shall be provided with local isolation capabilities.
4.10.2 Raceways
Positive feeder cables shall be run underground in non-reinforced red concrete encased duct
banks from the traction power substation to the feeder pole located near the point of
connection to the catenary suspension.
Negative return cables shall be run underground in non-reinforced red concrete encased duct
banks from the traction power substation to the impedance bonds near the running rails in
signalized territory or directly to the running rail pig tails in non-signalized territory.
In areas where the load flow analysis shows positive parallel feeder cables are required, the
positive parallel feeder cables shall be installed in underground non-reinforced red concrete
encased duct banks from a rise pole location near the point of connection to catenary
suspension or substation to a rise pole location near the point of connection to the catenary
suspension or substation at the opposite end of the contact wire only section.
In areas where the load flow analysis shows negative parallel feeder cables are required,
such as areas with single rail track circuits in non-signalized territory, the negative parallel
feeder cables shall be installed in non-reinforced red concrete encased duct banks from point
of connection to the track beyond the signal track circuit limit to the point of connection to the
track beyond the other end of the signal track circuit limit.
Positive feeder cables and negative return cables shall not be terminated in the same
substructure, and shall not pass through the same pull box, hand hole, or manhole.
All traction power pull boxes used in new projects shall be SDG&E standard 3314, 3315, or
3316, handholes conforming to the requirements of the SDG&E “Electrical Standards &
Guide Manual”, except that the covers shall be hot dipped galvanized traffic rated covers
conforming to the requirements of AASHTO H20 and Section 75-1.05 “Galvanizing” of the
Caltrans Standard Specifications and shall be permanently labeled "DANGER - HIGH
VOLTAGE - MTS" in conformance with the requirements of Section 86-2.03B “Cover
Marking” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications..
Traction power feeder conduit shall be a minimum of 30 inches deep and encased in red
concrete. Conduits within a duct bank shall be separated by a minimum of 6 inches on
centerline. Conduit bends shall be a minimum 36 inch-radius. The designer shall establish a
set of unique identification numbers for identifying the conduit runs. All underground conduits
shall be Schedule 40 PVC.
4-21 March 2014

The designer shall specify that the contractor is responsible for showing the conduit layouts
on a conduit layer of the civil drawings in the as-built AutoCAD drawings. All conduit runs
shall be shown as they are to be installed in the field. The runs shall be identified by the
unique identification numbers used, depth below finished surface, offset from centerline of
track for runs along alignment of track or stationing of track for lateral crossings and size and
number of conduits installed. Typical cross sections shall be shown.
The designer shall specify two spare 4-inch conduits beneath LRT station platforms and
paved surfaces; and two spare 4-inch conduits beneath railroad tracks at point of duct bank
crossing unless otherwise specified by SANDAG. The designer shall specify that spare
conduit be stubbed up into a pull box on either end of the raceway and have a tracer wire and
pull rope installed in them.
4.10.3 Positive Feeder System

SANDAG has standardized the cable for the positive feeders as 500 kcmil annealed copper
37-strands conductor conforming to or exceed the requirements of: ASTM B3 and a) B8
(Class B) or b) B-496. Traction Power Cable shall be type RHH, RHW-2 constructed of
ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) insulation rated for 2-kV, non-shielded, with either: a)
chlorinated polyethylene (CPE) thermoset, or b) Cross-Linked Polyolefin (XLPO) thermoset
jacket. Cable shall conform to the latest requirements of NEMA WC8, and UL 44, 1202, and
1581. Cable shall conform to the requirements of: a) NEMA WC-70 and ICEA S-95-658, or
b) UL 1685 and ICEA T-33-655. The cable shall be suitable for installation in wet or dry
environment, and its jacket shall be sunlight resistant. In addition, feeder cables to be placed
in tunnels shall conform to NFPA requirements.
Substation’s positive dc feeders shall be sized to accommodate the highest RMS current in
contingency operations with an adjacent TPSS out of service, with trains operating at rush-
hour headway at a worst-case DTO with respect to thermal load on the circuit.
Every feeder cable shall be labeled with permanent William Frick and Company 7” x 8” Snap
Arounds® PVC cable tags at both ends and in every traction power pull boxes with the circuit
identification number clearly identified in permanent UV resistant ink and covered with clear
polyester overlay protectant sheets.
Feeder assemblies shall be specified at the feeder poles to connect the pole-mounted
pressure bolted switches to the catenary messenger and contact wires and shall not be
located overstation platforms. The feeder assemblies shall utilize the same cable as
specified above for traction power feeder cables. Feeder assembly and jumper assembly
connections to the contact wire shall utilize either 350 or 500 kcmil stranded bare and tinned
concentric rope lay copper conductor with 259 Class G stranding conforming to ASTM B 33
and ASTM B 173 for extra flexibility.
The catenary systems of the two tracks shall be electrically separate, except for the
connections at the traction power substations via the positive dc feeders and TPSS bus.
Span wires shall have a double insulation specified between the catenary over adjacent
tracks to prevent power flow through span wires.
4-22 March 2014

The catenary system shall be designed also to enable one main line catenary section to be
isolated from the adjacent main line catenary section at double crossovers, for maintenance
during nonpeak service operations (see positive feeder section for additional information).
In double-track areas, the catenary over one track shall be able to be isolated electrically in
sections extending between substations and crossovers, for maintenance purposes during
nonpeak revenue service. .Circuit breakers in the substations and normally-closed, non-load-
break, pole-mounted pressure bolted switches shall be arranged to provide this functionality.
All positive feeders from the substations shall be connected to the OCS via pressure bolted
pole-mounted switches. TPSS sectionalizing gaps, such as insulated overlaps shall have
normally-open switches for each track's catenary that can bypass the sectionalizing insulation
and provide electrical continuity of the OCS in the event the adjacent substation needs to be
isolated. The pole-mounted pressure bolted switches shall be operated with a pole mounted
hand throws located at approximately 4.5 feet above the finish surface similar to the
arrangement used on the Old Town segment and shall be sized to handle the worst-case
RMS current through the switch in contingency operations. Pole mounted, no-load, manually
operated bypass and feeder switches shall have padlock lockable hand throw levers
mounted at approximately 4.5 feet above the finish surface similar to those installed along the
existing Old Town Corridor.
Pole-mounted, no-load, manually operated pressure bolted OCS sectionalizing gap bypass,
or sectionalizing switches shall be sized to handle the maximum RMS current during
operations at the peak headways, maximum consist sizes, worst-case timing offset, and
TPSS out-of-service contingency conditions.
At all substation positive dc feeder locations, there shall be pole-mounted feeder switches,
which shall enable the each dc feeder’s cable to be isolated from the energized catenary.
OCS feed-through, normally-open bypass switches shall permit the catenary insulated
overlap, or section insulators in case of no overlap at the TPSS, to be bypassed.
The designer shall specify that the contractor shall notify SANDAG’s systems engineering
department of the location, date, and time of all positive feeder cable pulls a minimum of 48
hours in advance of the start of each cable pull. The designer shall also specify that the
contractor shall pull a mandrel of the correct size through all feeder conduits immediately prior
to pulling cable. Furthermore, the designer shall specify that the contractor shall submit
manufacturer recommended pulling procedures with the feeder cable submittal and that all
cables shall be well lubricated for at least the first 60 percent of each cable pull. All cables
shall be installed per the manufacturer's cable pulling procedures.
Traction power feeder cables in vertical raceways over 30 feet in height shall be supported in
traction power pull boxes and at top of feeder spouts to prevent over stressing of the cable
insulation.
A lightning arrestor, connected between the catenary messenger and ground, shall be
specified at each feeder pole assembly. The lightning arrestors shall be surge arrestors
designed for dc overhead contact lines with parameters coordinated with LRT system’s
maximum operating voltage and the impulse withstand voltage of the protected equipment
(feeder cables and substation equipment).
4-23 March 2014

4.10.4 Negative Distribution System

The running rails insulation leakage resistance to ground for various types of track installation
shall be as indicated under Section 4.8.6, “Stray Current Mitigation”.
The cable used for the negative return feeders from substation to impedance bonds shall be
the same as the one specified for the positive feeders in the preceding section. Bonding
cables connected to rails shall be copper class I rope lay cables insulated bonds strand
cables conforming to ASTM B-172 with the same cable insulation and jacket used on the
feeder cables.
Every negative distribution system cable shall be labeled with permanent William Frick and
company 7” x 8” Snap Arounds® PVC cable tags at both ends and in every traction power
pull boxes with the circuit identification number clearly identified in permanent UV resistant ink
and covered with clear polyester overlay protectant sheets.
Substation negative return feeders shall be sized to accommodate the highest RMS currents
in contingency operations that the TPSS may experience, in the event of an out-of-service
adjacent TPSS and train schedule with a timing offset at the peak headway that results in the
maximum RMS load on the subject TPSS.
Notifications and cable pulling requirements shall conform to those given in Section 4.4.3 –
“Test Procedures”.
Impedance bonds shall be placed around rail insulated joints to allow traction power return to
the substations by using both running rails of the track. The impedance bond equipment
shall be placed outside the two tracks in double-track configuration, except where regular
tamping is not anticipated because of non-removable pavement. The designer shall specify
that all bonding to the rail of the cables leading from the impedance bond to the rails shall be
within 12 inches of the insulated joint bars.
The cross bonds between running rails of the two tracks shall be coordinated with impedance
bond design. Unless otherwise limited due to the signaling system block layout design,
crossbond spacing shall not exceed approximately 2,500 feet, with average spacing typically
in the 2,000-2,200 feet range.
The center point of impedance bonds where negative cables are to be installed shall be
electrically isolated from impedance bond housings to ensure that the negative rail system is
not accidentally grounded at this location.
500 kcmil connections to the rails shall utilize flexible bond strand cables connected to the
rails utilizing Cembre USA AR60D rail web electrical connection systems or an approved
equivalent method. Designer shall prepare a specification for the materials and installation
methods to ensure a proper installation conforming to the manufacturers recommended
installation methods. Non-corrosive grease shall be applied to the welds and bare cables
immediately after welding and inspection.
4-24 March 2014

4.11 Overhead Contact System

This section provides general requirements for the overhead contact system (OCS). The
OCS consists of the catenary system, the physical support system, and the feeder system.
The system shall be designed to enable a pantograph to collect current from the contact wire
satisfactorily at speeds up to 55 mph, under climate conditions set forth herein.
4.11.1 General
The following requirements apply to all of the components of the overhead contact system:
4.11.1.1 OCS Limits

The OCS shall distribute DC power from substations to light rail transit vehicles operating on
the main tracks, yard tracks, and within shop buildings. For more information regarding the
traction power system near yard facilities, see Section 4.11.1 – “Yard and Shop Traction
Power Facilities”.
4.11.1.2 OCS Electrical Requirements

Catenary system shall be sized to accommodate the calculated RMS currents in summertime
operation with ambient air temperature of 115 degrees F (46 degrees C) per Section 4.1 –
“Environmental Requirements” and sun exposure. OCS design shall be such that local
conductor temperature, assuming 25 percent wear on the contact wire, shall not exceed 167
degrees F (75 degrees C) in normal system operations, and 194 degrees F (90 degrees C) in
contingency operations with a TPSS out of service. The thermal capacity evaluation of the
OCS shall be performed assuming directional timing offset between the trains moving in the
opposite direction resulting in the maximum RMS current in the given OCS section.
4.11.1.3 Minimum Resistance-To-Earth Requirements

The positive power distribution circuit, consisting primarily of the overhead distribution
and contact system, shall have a minimum effective in-service resistance to earth of 1.9
mega ohms/mile of a double catenary system (Leakage current less than 1 mA).
4.11.1.4 OCS Crossover Requirements

Crossover catenary shall use the same tensioning method as that used for the mainline
catenaries.
4.11.1.5 OCS Overlap Requirements

Catenary tension sections shall be terminated using an insulated or un-insulated overlap,
section insulator. The contact wire overlapping length shall not be less than 5 feet. Insulated
overlaps shall not be located within 360 feet on approach to a location where light rail
vehicles will commonly come to a stop once revenue service commences (e.g. railway signal,
crossing, and far end of station platform).
The only type of sectionalizing insulation that shall be used with mainline auto-tensioned and
fixed termination catenary is insulated overlaps except at crossovers, sidings, and yard leads.
Where unique site conditions exist that make the installation of insulated overlaps impractical
or cost prohibitive, the designer shall seek special site specific approval from the SANDAG
Systems Engineer to utilize a SDTI approved section insulator assembly. When used, SDTI
approved mainline section insulator assemblies shall not be located where large amounts of
4-25 March 2014

current will be drawn by light rail vehicles(e.g. just leaving a station, exiting a curve, or on
ascending slopes).
4.11.1.6 Length of Tension Sections for Auto Tension Catenary

The designer shall maximize the tension lengths. Tension lengths between a fixed
termination and balance weight termination shall not exceed 3,000 feet. When determining
tension lengths, the designer shall verify that balance weights have sufficient travel to avoid
striking any obstruction (e.g. spreader brackets). Balance weights and OCS hardware need
to be designed for free movement through full temperature range and provide mechanical
clearances under worst conditions as well as ensuring pantograph security.
4.11.1.7 Separation from Aerial Utilities

The designer must maintain separation from aerial utilities in accordance with CPUC General
Order No. 95 and the following criteria:
• The contact wire height must not fall below minimum requirements, including
allowance for acceptable sag;
• If the pole provides mounts for risers to other services, the arrangement shall provide
electrical isolation from 650-volt DC service;
• The force imposed by the catenary system on the poles of others must be sustained
with adequate safety margin, including wind force on the catenary and its support
structure by the common pole structure.
4.11.2 Support System

The physical support subsystem shall consist of all foundations, poles, frames, guys,
insulators, cantilevers, head-spans, backbones, and other assemblies and components
required to support the catenary subsystem in accordance with designed configuration and
allowable loading, deflection, and clearance requirements.
The support system shall be sized in accordance with the latest most conservative
recommendations and requirements of AREMA “Manual for Railway Engineering” Volume 3,
Chapter 33, Part 4, Sections 4.2.7 and 4.2.8, UBC Chapter 16, AISC, ACI, and CPUC
General Order No. 95 unless otherwise specified herein.
Catenary support poles and frames and associated hardware shall be made of non-corrosive
material or be treated to prevent corrosion. All exposed steel and malleable iron shall be
galvanized in accordance with Section 75-1.05, "Galvanizing," of the Caltrans Standard
Specifications.
The support system includes brackets, downguys, cantilevers, bracket arm, headspans,
cross-spans, terminations and counterweights. The specific materials selected shall be of
adequate corrosion resistance to ensure that the required service life of 30 years will not be
compromised because of corrosion related problems. The materials shall not require
maintenance coatings or other procedures relating to corrosion control during the design life
of these facilities. Exposed surfaces of steel or ferrous surfaces shall be hot dipped
galvanized steel conforming to the requirements of Section 75-1.05 “Galvanizing” of the
Caltrans Standard Specifications.
4-26 March 2014

Minimum safety factors associated with structural loading (except for OCS steel poles,
foundations, and cantilevers) shall be determined for the worse case environmental
conditions as specified in Section 4.1 – “Environmental Requirements”. The minimum safety
factor for fiberglass members is 3.0; all other material shall have a safety factor of 2.0.
Porcelain insulators shall be used to the greatest extend practically feasible (e.g. at cantilever
assembly pole attachments, fixed termination assemblies, balance weight termination
assemblies, mid-point anchor assemblies, messenger wire section insulator locations, in-
span insulator assemblies, and headspan assemblies).
4.11.2.1 Pole and Down-Guy Foundations

All foundation locations shall be checked for conflicts with signals anywhere within the signals
sighting distance. Foundations shall not be placed in drainage ditches or at the same
location as other utilities.
4.11.2.2 Foundation Design

Catenary pole foundations shall be designed for no less than one and a half times the total
moment calculated at the base of the pole. Pole foundations installed in fill slopes shall
conform to the recommendations of AREMA “Manual for Railway Engineering” Volume 3,
Chapter 33, Part 4, Section 4.2.8.
4.11.2.3 Elevation of Pole Foundations

The top of foundations located between tracks, and not in station platforms, shall be set at top
of the tie of the adjacent track. Top of foundations not located between the tracks and not in
station platforms or not in the pedestrian sidewalk shall be set 6 inches above the highest
elevation of the existing slope that is in contact with the foundation. In station platforms or
pedestrian sidewalk areas, the top of foundation shall be installed at least 10 inches below
top of finished platform. Where pole base plates are embedded below the finish surface of
the station platform, the base plates, bolts, and nuts shall be completely encased in concrete
from top of foundation up to the finish platform.
4.11.2.4 Poles and Moment Resisting Frames

Catenary Poles shall be sized in accordance with the most restrictive recommended design
standards of the IEEE OCS Pole Standard P1630, “Standard for Supporting Structures for
Overhead Contact Systems for Transit Systems”, AREMA “Manual for Railway Engineering”
Volume 3, Chapter 22, Part 4, Section 4.2.7 “Catenary Pole Criteria”, California Public Utilities
Commission General Order 95 and shall conform to the following minimum requirements for
sizing of poles and moment resisting frames:
• Either the wind load (over the pole or frame surface and attached cables) or the
earthquake load (of the system), whichever is greater, shall be used in determining
the pole or frame moment;
• The CBC wind load or earthquake load, whichever is greater, shall be added to the
horizontal load imposed on the pole or frame due to the wire tensions to determine
pole or frame moment;
• The maximum pole or frame bending moment shall not produce a deflection greater
than 2.5 percent of the pole height, or greater than 2 inches at contact wire height
under live loads. Joint-use poles shall be sized to include added loads of other user.
4-27 March 2014

4.11.2.5 Pole and Frame Description

Poles shall be tapered, tubular-steel sections as shown in the Standard Plans. All poles shall
extend a minimum of 18 inches above the highest cantilever or balance weight band, and a
minimum of six inches above the highest cable supported by the pole. Poles may be used
for the support of trackway or station lighting and signs. Standard obstruction clearances
shall apply (see Section 3.1 – “Alignment and Clearance”). Poles, pole base covers and other
rigid support structures shall be galvanized.
4.11.2.6 Grounding of Poles and Frames

The pole grounding system shall be designed so the ground resistance at the pole does not
exceed 10 ohms. Catenary support poles and frames fabricated from conducting materials
shall be grounded to earth by attaching a ground lead(s) to a supplemental ground rod(s).
Where high resistance soils at specific sites do not permit a 10 ohms resistance to be
achieved utilizing a single ground rod, additional ground rods shall be installed until the
ground lead resistance is not more than 25 ohms. For poles with surge arresters and
disconnect switches in high resistance soils, additional deep grounding methods should be
incorporated into the design to limit the ground lead resistance from exceeding 10 ohms.
For locations other than at bridge structures, electrical ground facilities for adjacent OCS
poles shall not be interconnected. This will avoid provisions of a low impedance path in
parallel to stray earth current.
Except for poles on bridge structures, catenary pole grounding shall utilize either: a) separate
ground rods and No. 4/0 AWG bare copper cable shall be provided for each OCS pole or b)
4/0 AWG bare copper cable coiled in bottom of cast in drill hole (CIDH) foundation with lead
extending up through reinforcement cage to pole termination lug.
Where OCS poles are located on elevated structures other than bridges, the poles shall be
grounded individually or in groups.
Where OCS poles will be located on bridge structures, the catenary pole grounding system
shall either: a) connect to the structures reinforcing steel (provided this does not have
adverse longer term effects on the structures integrity, or b) connect poles to No. 4/0 AWG
cable that is installed along the deck to a junction box near the top of the the nearest bridge
column or abutment and down the column or through the abutment to an earth ground.
Embedded anchoring systems shall be used for mounting catenary poles and anchorages to
structures. OCS bridge soffit catenary supports (embedded and externally attached) under
the bridge shall not be utilized, unless there is not a practical alternative and each bridge soffit
support is approved on a site specific basis in writing by the SANDAG Systems Engineer.
Where approved, provisions shall be made for galvanized catenary support channels, hot-dip
galvanized swivel pin and eyebolt, and interconnected through No. 4/0 AWG copper
grounding cable. This No. 4/0 AWG grounding cable shall be extended to the ground wells.
Catenary support anchoring system components to be embedded in concrete structures shall
be epoxy coated.
4.11.2.7 Location of Poles and Frames

Generally, center-pole construction is preferred and shall be specified when track centerline
spacing permits. The offset of poles shall be within constraints of available right-of-way, and
4-28 March 2014

in accordance with CPUC General Order Nos. 26-D, 95, 118, and 143B. Moment resisting
frames shall not be used unless otherwise approved by the SANDAG project manager.
CPUC General Order 26-D specifies the following minimum horizontal clearances of
obstructions from centerline of track on tracks supporting joint usage of LRV and freight:
• Tangent track: 8.5 feet

• Curved track: 9.5 feet
These distances are the clearance from the centerline of track to the face of the nearest
obstruction, such as a pole or pole-mounted obstruction.
The minimum distance for LRV-only track is the dynamic envelope of the vehicle plus the
emergency walkway where applicable.
Joint-use poles may be used, where approved, by both SANDAG and the other utility and/or
jurisdiction.
4.11.2.8 Cantilever Supports

The auto-tension (AT) catenary system shall be supported, in general, by hinged cantilevers.
All cantilevers shall be set perpendicular to the track at 80 degrees F ambient.
4.11.2.9 Head-Spans
Head-spans may be used at locations where cantilever supports are not practical, i.e., over
streets, at locations where multiple catenaries are supported, at locations with large offsets,
etc. Where head-spans are used with auto-tension (AT) catenary, the messenger wire shall
be on rollers permitting the along-track movement of the messenger wire. The type of cross
span construction shall permit along-track movement of the contact and messenger wires in
AT catenary.
4.11.2.10 Down-Guys
Guy wires shall be installed at a typical 45 degrees angle from the vertical unless physical
constrains dictate otherwise. Anchor guys shall be enhanced visually by placing a bright
yellow detector over the guy strand that is a minimum of 8 feet long. Down-guy assemblies
shall be anchored to loop anchors cast in down-guy foundations, bridges, or retaining walls.
4.11.3 Catenary Suspension

This section describes the design requirements for selection of automatically tensioned (AT)
and fixed tension (FT) catenary systems.
4.11.3.1 Selection of Catenary Suspension System

On new lines or line extension construction projects; single or dual messenger wire full profile
automatically tensioned (AT) simple catenary system with a 3.3 feet or 4.3 feet standard
system depth at the supports shall be used, except at: a)overlap supports, b) low vertical
clearance areas (such as tunnels) and transition areas. The system depth may be reduced
in transition sections and to go under obstructions. In areas where reduced system depths
are required to accommodate low vertical constraints, reduced system depths and alternative
4-29 March 2014

tensioning systems described below shall be recommended by the design and accepted by
the SANDAG systems engineer.
• Low profile catenary systems, for AT and FT catenary, shall be specified when directed
by SANDAG;
• A single contact wire suspension system without messenger wire shall be specified when
directed by SANDAG. In such cases, parallel, underground feeds shall be specified to
replace the load carrying messenger.
Retrofit of existing lines shall match the type of catenary and system depth of the existing
system, unless a large scale project is being implemented or planned to upgrade the entire
line to the most recent standard. The system depth may be reduced in transition sections and
to go under obstructions.
Material selection for the overhead current carrying conductors and support system shall be
based on the traction power system Load Flow Analysis, the Standard Plans, and Standard
Special Provisions. The specific materials selected shall be of adequate corrosion resistance
to ensure that the service life of the catenary system will not be compromised because of
corrosion related issues. The material specified shall not require maintenance coatings or
other procedures relating to corrosion control during the design life of these facilities.
4.11.3.2 CPUC Requirements

California Public Utilities Commission General Order Nos. 26-D, 95, and 143-B govern the
catenary location with respect to other conductors.
4.11.3.3 Catenary Conductors Requirements

The Catenary Conductors shall be sized in accordance with the results of the system load
flow analysis based on the operational and redundancy requirements of the line segment and
as specified in this design criteria.
SANDAG has standardized the following:
• Messenger Conductor(s):
Single messenger conductor shall be 500 kcmil and dual messenger conductors shall be
either 350 kcmil or 500 kcmil cables conforming to the following requirements:
350 kcmil or 500 kcmil, stranded, hard-drawn copper conforming to ASTM B8, class AA,
for use in auto-tensioned catenary systems.
• Contact Conductor:
The contact wire shall be 350 kcmil solid grooved hard-drawn copper conforming to
ASTM B47, with a minimum breaking strength of 11,800 lbs.
• Jumper wire:
The jumper wire shall be either 350 or 500 kcmil, single conductor, tin-coated soft copper,
Class G, 259 strands, conforming to ASTM B 33 and ASTM B 173.
4-30 March 2014

At TPSS feeder poles, all cables of the positive feeder shall be connected to the
messenger wire(s) using standard feeder assemblies. Connections to contact wire shall
use a minimum of two 350 kcmil or 500 kcmil jumper wire connections between the
feeder cables and contact wire.
4.11.3.4 Pantographs
The design shall define the range, width, sway, position on vehicle in the dynamic pantograph
envelope and shall be consistent with that which is shown in the latest version of the
SANDAG Standard Plans. The design shall provide a 3-inch minimum distance between
catenary support hardware and the dynamic pantograph envelope.
Each car in a train will have a pantograph in service. Each pantograph will exert 20 to 22
pounds (9 to 10 kilograms) of static upward force.
4.11.3.5 Clearance Envelopes and Wire Stagger

The design shall conform to the pantograph security envelope and maximum wire stagger
requirements shown in the standard plans and as shown in the table below at the contact
wire height identified in the table.
Table 4-1. – Clearance Envelopes and Wire Stagger Requirements

Clearance Envelope at
Specified Contact Wire
Maximum Wire Stagger
Height (Minimum Distance
Contact Wire Height at Supports at Specified
from Super-elevated
Contact Wire Height
Centerline to Face of
Obstruction)
14.5 feet above top of rail 12.5 inches 10.2 feet (5.1 feet)
19.5 feet above top of rail 10 inches 11 feet (5.5 feet)
22.4 feet above top of rail 9 inches 11.4 feet (5.7 feet)
The contact wire shall stagger in opposite directions at adjacent supports at maximum
stagger values listed above on tangent track in order to improve pantograph wear, except as
otherwise required by physical conditions. At support structures in curves, the super-elevated
contact wire stagger measured from a line drawn perpendicular to the super-elevated
centerline of track shall not exceed the values listed above. The mid-span offset of the
contact wire shall not exceed 6 inches. The horizontal tolerance on contact stagger is ±0.5
inches
The span lengths and wire staggers shall be designed to: a) provide adequate pantograph
security so contact wire staggers at mid span do not exceed maximums described above b)
to maintain good current collection, and c) ensure uniform wear of the pantograph carbon
collector.
4-31 March 2014

4.11.3.6 Contact Wire Heights

SANDAG has standardized the following in-running contact wire heights above top of rail at
point of suspension for new construction:
• Above tracks used by freight trains : 22.4 feet

• Above tracks and crossings only used by LRVs: 19.5 feet
• In exclusive trolley right-of-way, the heights may be reduced to:
– Over ballast track 14.5 feet
– Over direct fixated track 14.25 feet
The out-of-running contact wire in overlaps shall be installed at 6 to 7 inches above the in-
running contact wire height at out-of-running catenary support assemblies, unless otherwise
approved in writing by the SANDAG Systems Engineer on a site specific basis.
The crossover contact wire shall follow the same profile as the main line contact wire.
4.11.3.7 Contact Wire Profiling

The design shall specify the heights required from top-of-rail to contact wire for all hangers
and supports. The length of the hangers shall not be specified. The actual hangers shall be
sized to fit. The contact wire height tolerance is ± 0.5 inches.
The catenary shall be profiled to the recommended maximum gradients listed in AREMA
“Manual for Railway Engineering” Volume 3, Chapter 33, Part 4, Section 4.2.6. If physical
constraints dictate that the transition rate be greater than the recommended maximum
gradients listed in AREMA Section 4.2.6, the designer shall request a variance from the
SANDAG Director of Rail. Under no circumstance shall the transition rate exceed the
following:
15 mph 4.00 percent
25 mph 2.90 percent
35 mph 2.00 percent
45 mph 1.15 percent
55 mph 0.67 percent
Except for yard condition, the change of grade from one span to the next should not exceed
one half the values shown below.
If the vertical rise of top-of-rail is too steep to permit the contact wire to rest in its supports,
and thus causes supports to push downward on the wire, the catenary designer shall notify
the track designer and SANDAG Systems Engineer and meet to consider changes to the
track profile to ensure the wire can be transitioned using its’ self-weight.
If the contact wires are transitioning over a crossover or double crossover, both main line
contact wire profiles shall transition at the same rate at the same stationing; based on the
4-32 March 2014

stationing of one of the mainline tracks. The crossover contact wire shall be profiled the
same as the main line contact wire.
4.11.3.8 Messenger Wire Heights

The messenger wire heights at the supports listed below shall be used for full profile catenary
except as otherwise required. The messenger wire height tolerance is +1 inch. At locations
where there are overhead obstructions that require the messenger wire heights to be
reduced to fit under the obstructions, the messenger wire heights may be reduced as
required. The messenger wire height reduction should be within a couple of poles on either
side of the obstruction.
The following messenger wire heights at the supports, above in-running contact wire (AIRC)
or above main line contact wire (AMC), shall be used for full profile catenary with 4 feet 3
inches system depth (adjacent long and short cantilevers shall be within 10 feet of each
other).
• Standard System Depth: 4.3 feet AIRC

• At overlaps, simple crossovers, and double crossovers other than No. 6:
– Long cantilever assembly messenger height: 4.3 feet AIRC
– Short cantilever assembly messenger height: 5.3 feet AIRC
• At No. 6 double crossovers with center poles or outside poles:

Over one of the crossover movements:
– Long cantilever assembly messenger height: 4.3 feet AMC
– Short cantilever assembly messenger height: 5.3 feet AMC

Over the other crossover movement:
– Long cantilever assembly messenger height: 4.8 feet AMC

The following messenger wire heights at the supports, above in-running contact wire (AIRC)
or above main line contact wire (AMC), shall be used for full profile catenary with 3 feet 4
inches system depth (adjacent long and short cantilevers shall be within 10 feet of each
other).
• Standard System Depth: 3.3 feet AIRC

• At overlaps, simple crossovers, and double crossover other than No. 6:
- Long cantilever assembly messenger height: 3.3 feet AIRC
- Short cantilever assembly messenger height: 4.3 feet AIRC
• At No. 6 double crossovers with center poles or outside poles:

Over one of the crossover movements:
4-33 March 2014

- Long cantilever assembly messenger height: 3.3 feet AMC
- Short cantilever assembly messenger height: 4.3 feet AMC
Over the other crossover movement:
- Long cantilever assembly messenger height: 3.8 feet AMC
If additional head-spans are used at double crossovers, the messenger wire height for the
messenger wires shall be specified to maintain a minimum of 6-inch gap at the point of the
crossover crossing.
If both center poles and outside poles are used to support the crossover catenary near the
points of switch or to support the in-running and out-of-running catenaries at overlap areas,
the messenger wire heights shall be changed so as to maintain a minimum 6-inch gap
between the messenger cables at all points of crossing.
The messenger wire height at the supports shall be 1.5 feet above the main line contact wire
for fixed termination and auto tensioned low profile catenary, except at points where the
messenger wires cross. At locations where the messenger wires cross, they shall be
separated by at least 5 inches under normal conditions.
Alternative low profile system depths may be used in areas with limited vertical clearance, if
approved by the SANDAG Systems Engineer in writing.
Should the system depth along a corridor need to transition from full system depth (either 3.3
feet or 4 feet) to low profile system depth, then the designer shall show the heights of the
messenger and contact wires in the transition section between system depths on the OCS
plans.
4.11.3.9 Design Span Lengths

Design span lengths for tangent track shall be determined by the distance between curves
and crossings. The maximum span lengths shall ensure that the contact wire does not
exceed the maximum pantograph security values and wire staggers so the contact wire will
remain over the pantograph under the worst case operating conditions.
When sizing the maximum span lengths the designer shall review the vertical profile of the
track. In areas with vertical crest curves, the designer shall verify that the minimum length of
the hanger at mid-span is not less than 8 inches. The hanger length and span length
calculations shall assume that the contact wire will maintain a constant height following the
profile of the track. The hanger length calculation shall account for the additional internal
forces in the hangers resulting from the resultant contact wire tensions and the additional sag
in the messenger wire resulting from the internal forces in the hanger assembly.
The determination of span lengths for single wire systems shall take into consideration the
requirements of Rule 74.4 of CPUC General Order 95 regarding broken OCS suspensions
and fastenings.
4-34 March 2014

The span length of full profile and low provide catenary systems shall never exceed the
following absolute maximum span lengths:
• 205 feet for full profile, AT catenary

• 180 feet for full profile, FT catenary
• 170 feet for low profile, AT catenary
• 130 feet for low profile, FT catenary
4.11.3.10 Design Tensions for Auto-Tension (AT) Catenary

Design tensions for AT catenary shall be constant for the temperature range from 15°F to
130°F.
Conductor tensions shall be in accordance with the requirements of CPUC General Order 95.
Thirty percent cross-sectional area loss due to wear of the contact wire and the effect of
temperature change shall be taken into consideration in the design for conductor tension.
The constant tension of the messenger wire shall be:
• 6,000 or 7,000 pounds for catenary suspensions with a single 500 kcmil catenary
messenger wire;
• 3,750 pounds for catenary suspensions with dual 350 or 500 kcmil catenary
messenger wires.
The constant tension of the contact wire shall be:
• 3,000 pounds for single messenger catenary suspension systems;
• 2,500 pounds for dual messenger catenary suspension systems.
4.11.3.11 Design Tensions for Fixed-Tension (FT) Catenary

Design tensions for FT catenary conductors shall be determined based on the span length,
pantograph security, stagger, etc. The wire safety factor under the worst condition needs to
meet the requirements of CPUC General Order 95.
Calculations of tension adjustments due to temperature variation must be approved by

SANDAG.
4.11.3.12 Tensioning Methods

The following tensioning methods shall be used:
• Balance weight assemblies shall be used to tension auto tension catenary. The
designer shall verify at all balance weight locations that there will be sufficient travel
available for the balance weight to move throughout the temperature range of 15
degrees F to 130 degrees F (-9 degrees C to 54 degrees C) ambient. All balance
weights shall have a guide system to prevent the balance weights from swaying into
the dynamic envelope of the vehicles. The designer shall specify that all balance
4-35 March 2014

weight settings be checked by the engineer after all adjustments have been made to
the system. Balance weights shall not be located over a station platform.
• Fixed termination assemblies may be used in both auto tension and fixed tension
systems.
• Spring tensioning assemblies shall not be used except for temporary installations.
4.11.3.13 Lightning Arrestor Assemblies

A lightning arrestor, connected between the catenary messenger and earth ground, shall be
specified at each feeder pole. Lightning arrestors shall not be located over station platforms.
4.11.3.14 Midpoint Anchors

Midpoint anchors shall be used between the termination poles with balance weight
assemblies at both ends. Retainer wire which is to hold catenary messenger and contact wire
conductors in a fixed position shall be used at midpoint. The midpoint anchor assembly shall
be designed to sustain the full tension loads of the catenary under broken wire condition
without failure for not less than the full tension of the catenary suspension tensions delivered
at the balance weight assembly.
4.11.3.15 Wire Cross Assemblies

Wire cross (bridging) assemblies shall be installed over crossovers and turnouts where the
main line and in-running crossover or turnout contact wires cross.
4.11.3.16 Additional Requirements for Full and Low Profile Catenary

The following requirements shall be met for full and low profile catenary:
• The spacing between adjacent wire rope hanger assemblies shall not exceed 30
feet;
• Hanger assemblies shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel wire rope with
ultraviolet resistant black nylon insulated thimbles, crimps, split contact wire clamp,
and messenger wire clamp assemblies properly adjusted to provide a smooth riding
surface at the specified contact wire height(s);
• In-span jumpers between the contact wire and messenger wire(s) shall be specified
at spacing not exceeding 410 feet;
• Full feeding continuity jumpers at uninsulated overlaps shall match or exceed the
thermal capacity of the OCS conductors.
• Standard full feed jumper assemblies shall be used unless determined by the
designer to be in adequate for the intended use in which case the standard assembly
shall be modified to add additional conductor and clamps as needed.
• Cable length between messenger wire clamps shall provide sufficient slack to ensure
lateral movement throughout the temperature range of the catenary suspension
conductors is not obstructed (the cable distance between adjacent messenger
clamps connecting different wire runs shall not be less than 5 feet);
• Potential equalizing jumpers connecting the out-of-running contact to the out-of-
running messenger to the in-running messenger shall be specified at insulated
4-36 March 2014

overlaps to bring the out-of-running conductors to the same potential as the in-
running-conductors to ensure conductors near the support at the same potential;
4.11.3.17 Additional Requirements for Tunnel Catenary
The designer may use other types of catenary in tunnel sections. Reduced profile auto or
fixed tension catenary using a system depth determined by the designer or a conductor rail
system are preferred. Contact wire only with a parallel feeder is not preferred, but may be
used if approved by SANDAG.
4.12 Stray Current/ Reduction Methods

4.12.1 Stray Current Reduction
To the greatest extent reasonably possible, track design shall insulate the running rails to
create a high resistance path to ground to minimize leakage current. Structures,
maintenance and underground facilities shall be designed with stray current reduction
methods. Stray current reduction methods criteria are included in the design criteria for the
various types of facilities and structures.
4.13 Atmospheric Corrosion Control

4.13.1.1 General
The design of exposed equipment and facilities shall consider the possible impact of
atmospheric corrosion conditions, with the primary objective being to ensure that the required
30-year service life of a particular facility is not compromised because of corrosion related
problems or failures.
4.13.1.2 Traction Power Substation Enclosures

Exterior metallic surfaces of the substation enclosures shall be coated with a gray barrier type
coating that is consistent with the most recent substation procurement.
4-37 March 2014

Chapter 5.0 – Railway Signaling and Indication Systems
5.0 RAILWAY SIGNALING AND INDICATION SYSTEMS

Railway circuits shall be properly designed for the intended operation.
When automated trolley switching and indication are required in track that is not designed for
train protection per Table 1 of General Order 143B, then the design of the automated
features and indications shall conform to the requirements of section 5.2 “Non Signalized
Right-of-Way”.
When automated railway switching, control, and indication (signals) are required in
automated railway signaling systems per Table 1 of General Order 143B, then the design of
the automated features shall comply with section 5.3 “Railway Signaling in Semi-Exclusive or
Exclusive Right of Way”.
Refer to the following documents for definition of the terms used herein:
• American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association

Communications and Signal Manual of Recommended Practices;
• Code of Federal Regulations Title 49 (CFR 49) Transportation Parts 234 and 236.
5.1 General
All Railway Signal and Indication Systems shall comply with the following general
requirements.
Railway Signaling System computer aided drawing files shall be provided by the designer to
SANDAG Systems Configuration Manager. The Construction Contractor shall update design
drawings with as-built information and submit final drawings for the installed system.
5.1.1 Environmental
All systems shall be designed to operate given the environmental conditions indicated in
Section 4.1 – “Environmental Requirements”, except as otherwise listed below:
Ambient Outdoor Temperature: -32 degrees C to +71 degrees C.
Relative Humidity: from zero to 100 percent
Maximum Wind Velocity: 100 miles per hour
In addition to the requirements stated above, electronic / software-based products /

equipment used in safety critical (vital) applications and systems shall conform to the
requirements specified the AREMA Communications and Signaling Manual Part 17.3.1.
Note the requirement for conformance to “United State Department of Defense, Military
Standard …System Safety Program Requirements, MIL-STD-882C”.
Non-vital communications equipment in railway signal enclosures shall be designed to

operate given the environmental conditions indicated in Section 4.1 – “Environmental
Requirements”, except as otherwise listed below:
5-1 March 2014

Ambient Outdoor Temperature: -32 degrees C to +71 degrees C.
Relative Humidity: from 10 to 95 percent
5.1.2 Acceptance Testing and Measurements

The designer shall include in the Special Provisions detailed testing procedures, submittal
criteria, and acceptance criteria for each of the tests specified. The designer shall also
specify that the contractor shall submit a Test Plan, Testing Procedures, and Test Data forms
for approval by the SANDAG construction manager a minimum of 60 working days prior to
the scheduled start of the test. The designer shall also specify that the contractor shall
submit the results of each of the tests within five (5) working days following each test.
The designer shall specify that:
• The test plan and procedures shall meet the recommended practices of the AREMA
Communications & Signal Manual of Recommended Practices and all other
requirements of governing agencies;
• The contractor shall perform pretests in advance of actual testing;
• The contractor shall notify the SANDAG construction manager of the location, date,
and time that testing will be performed a minimum of five working days in advance of
actual testing;
• The contractor shall include complete details of test results and corrections or
adjustments performed on the signaling system during testing and all items to be
corrected with the final test results report.
The designer shall specify additional acceptance measurements to be taken by the

contractor for contract acceptance. The list of acceptance measurements to be taken by the
contractor shall be submitted by the designer to the SANDAG project manager for approval
with the 65% submittal.
5.1.2.1 Test Documents

The designer shall specify that at least six copies of each test document shall be submitted to
the SANDAG construction manager and that the documents shall be approved prior to
testing. The designer shall also specify that six sets of all revisions to the test document shall
be submitted to the SANDAG construction manager.
5.1.2.2 Test Plan

The test plan shall include the following information:
• Title of each test with reference to the respective article or section number in the
Special Provisions;
• Organization performing each test;
• Test location;
• Submittal date of each test procedure, test report, and/or certified test document;
• Starting date of each test;
5-2 March 2014

• Completion date of each test.
5.1.2.3 Test Procedures

Test procedures shall conform to the following minimum requirements:
• Title of test, date, and name of individuals who prepared and approved the
procedure;
• Test location and date of test;
• Equipment and instrumentation with the accuracy and calibration data;
• Test methodology, including test setup with circuit diagrams and test sequence;
• Test criteria including data evaluation procedures;
• Test data requirements, including forms and format for recording data.
5.1.2.4 Test Reports

The test report shall contain the following:
• Title, date, and location of test;

• Name of individuals who prepared and approved the report;
• Test data forms with signatures of test witnesses;
• Observations and additional data, including tables and photographs;
• Descriptions of failures and modifications;
• Abbreviations and references;
• Summary and conclusions;
• Pass/Fail Criteria.
5.1.2.5 Test Categories

The following testing categories shall be specified when applicable to the scope of work.
• Ground Verification Test: This test shall verify that the ground at each location is
15 ohms or less.
• Cable Verification Test: This test shall ensure that each exterior cable conductor is
correctly installed, has correct nomenclature, and is continuous from end to end.
• Cable Insulation Resistance Test: This test shall ensure that each exterior cable
conductor meets the minimum conductor-to-conductor and conductor-to-ground
resistance.
• Circuit Breakdown Test: This test shall ensure in a fail-safe manner that all wiring
is in accordance with the approved circuit plans.
5-3 March 2014

• Power Supply Verification Test: This test shall verify that all power supplies
operate properly in accordance with the specified requirements.
• Track Circuit Setup and Test: This test shall establish the proper operating
parameters for all types of track circuits.
• Shunt Sensitivity Test: This test shall measure the shunting margin of each track
circuit to ensure that specified shunting sensitivity is obtained.
• Preliminary Operational Test: This test shall verify that all the individual
components and subsystems are properly adjusted and functional.
• Simulated Operational Test: This test shall simulate train movements by using
manual track occupancies to test the overall functionality of the signaling and
crossing warning systems.
• Dynamic Operational Test: This test shall test the same functions as listed in the
simulated operational test except actual vehicles shall be used to conduct the test.
Test equipment calibration requirements and additional testing requirements shall be added
by the designer to the Special Provisions as needed to ensure a safe and operational system.
5.1.2.6 Compatibility with the Existing Systems

All new signaling equipment shall be fully compatible with the existing systems without
exception. Each interlocking shall be controlled by vital relay circuits, vital logic controllers, or
as otherwise approved by the SANDAG Director of Rail. Route selection shall be made via
field devices and with an interface to the train location wide area network.
5.2 Non Signalized Right-of-Way

All LRT lines operating in non-automatic block signaling right-of-way shall be designed for a
maximum speed of 35 mph and conform to the requirements of CPUC General Order No.
143B. Light rail vehicles and freight trains shall travel at reduce speeds on a line-of-sight
basis.
5.2.1 Trolley and Traffic Signal Interface

Non-block signaling controlled alignments in non-exclusive or semi-exclusive right of way (per
alignment classifications described in section 9.04 of CPUC G.O. 143B) with active grade
crossing warning devices conforming to CPUC GO 75-D shall have grade crossing control
systems interface with traffic signaling systems via a traffic preemption system in conform to
section 10D.05 “Traffic Control Signals” of the California MUTCD. Light rail vehicle signal
indications and controls in non-exclusive or semi-exclusive right of way (per alignment
classifications described in section 9.04 of CPUC G.O. 143B) with non-gated grade
crossings and without block signals shall conform to section 10D.07 “Use of Traffic Control
Signals for Control of Light Rail Transit Vehicles at Grade Crossing” of the California MUTCD.
Automatic block signaling shall not be used in street segments. Emergency vehicles will
have a higher priority than a trolley, but will not preempt an accepted trolley preemption. In all
cases, the freight train shall have highest priority. Therefore, joint trackage shall have
separate detection equipment.
5-4 March 2014

5.2.2 Switch Controls and Indications

The designer shall review the locations of crossovers and the operating plan and recommend
to SANDAG where to locate power switches.
The following types of switch stands shall be used in mixed traffic right-of-way and in the
yard.
Ground throw or spring and return switches shall be used at embedded switch locations
unless otherwise directed. Spring switches shall not be used in the yard unless otherwise
directed. The number of the switch will be shown in white letters and numbers on a black
background on the pavement between the rails facing the train on the facing point side of the
switch.
The adjustable automatic switch stands shall only be used in the yard unless otherwise
directed by the engineer. Adjustable automatic switch stands - 22P (variable switch stands)
shall not be used in switches that are used by freight trains. When the switch is in the normal
position, the switch stand target shall display reflective white to the approaching trains. When
the switch point is not in the normal position, the target shall display reflective red to the
approaching train. For main line switches not in ABS limits, the number of the switch along
with its type will be painted in black letters and numbers on a white background on the switch
stand tie adjacent to the switch at a location identified by SANDAG. The location is usually on
the switch ties, immediately adjacent to the mechanism or between the running rails on
paved track.
The type of switch movement to be used shall be determined as follows unless otherwise
specified.
If the switch machine is in the traveled way of mixed traffic (pedestrian, automobile, etc.) or
below the 100-year floodplain, or in an area that is known to flood, or in a situation which
requires the machine to be embedded, or mounted between the rails due to space limitations,
the designer shall specify a submersible switch machine and earth box configuration which is
NEMA 6P complaint and a split point switch with a Hanning & Kahl HW 61 series or equal
shall be used. The switch machine shall be equipped with a locking system that locks both
the point / tongue detector rods and drive rods which shall function independently of each
other. The machine shall be trailable by rail vehicles with the closed point being positively
locked and the open point being held in position with spring-actuated locking. When trailed
the machine shall unlock via the open point without damage to machine components. The
machine motor control voltage shall be 208VAC, other voltage configuration must be
approved by the SANDAG Systems Engineer in writing. The designer shall work with the
special trackwork designer to ensure that the switch machine specified will be fully
compatible. Embedded switch machines shall have a traffic rated cover.
If the switch machine is in open track areas, not below the 100-year floodplain and not in an
area that floods, a standard Ansaldo STS Style M-23A with electronic circuit controller (ECC)
or Alstom Model 5F dual-control, or equal, either of which will be 110VDC motor control shall
be used, unless otherwise directed by the SANDAG project manager. The machine will be
right or left hand configured form the factory as required.
5-5 March 2014

A complete switch movement assembly shall be specified. Switch movement control circuits
shall conform to "Cabling Requirements" and "Relay Design" requirements of Sections
5.3.2.11 and 5.3.2.12 respectively. Switch route selection shall be made by the train-to-
wayside communication (TWC) and wayside push-button controls as specified the "Push
button" and "TWC Requirements" specified in Sections 5.3.2.17 and 5.3.2.21 respectively,
unless otherwise specified. The TWC loops shall be installed 30 ft. in advance of the switch
position indicator unless physical constraints dictate otherwise or another loop is in close
proximity and can be used for this purpose. Track circuits shall be used to prevent switch
movements while there is a train over the switch. All switches and rail shall be bonded and
insulated as required.
Switch position indicators shall indicate the position of the established switch route. Switch
position indicators shall be a McCain Traffic Supply pedestrian-type signal with 12 inches
(305 mm) black polycarbonate housing and doors, black cutaway visors, and polycarbonate
lenses or equal. The lenses shall be white with the appropriate diagonal or vertical switch
route alignment displayed. Switch position indicators configuration shall be consistent with
existing indicator configurations. When the switch is in correspondence, a solid lunar indicator
shall illuminate.
5.3 Railway Signaling in Semi-Exclusive or Exclusive Right-of-Way

The signaling system shall be comprised of interlockings, intermediate signals, and
automated route request systems conforming to the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title
49 Parts 234, 235, and 236.
5.3.1 General
All LRT lines operating on semi-exclusive or exclusive right-of-way shall be designed with
signal circuits as defined below. These criteria govern the design of the signaling system,
including signals, indicators, switch lock mechanisms, switch movements, circuit elements
and housings, highway crossing equipment, TWC interfaces, and traffic interfaces.
5.3.1.1 Applicable Documents

All apparatus and work included in the design, manufacture, and installation of the signaling
system shall conform to the latest standards listed in Volume 1 – Introduction, “Governing
Regulations and Laws” Section and the following:
• American Railway and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA) Communication

and Signal Manuals of Recommended Practice and Typical Circuits Representing
Current Signal Practice for Railway Signaling;
• California Public Utilities Commission, General Orders (G.O.):
– G.O. 26-D (Clearances on Railroads and Street Railroads as to side and
Overhead Structures, Parallel Tracks, and Crossings);
– G.O. 33- B (Construction, Reconstruction, Maintenance and Operation of
Interlocking Plants of Railroads);
– G.O. 52 (Construction and Operation of Power and Communications Lines for
the Prevention or Mitigation of Inductive Interference);
5-6 March 2014

– G.O. 75-D (Regulations Governing Standards for Warning Devices for At-Grade
Highway –Rail Crossings);
– G.O. 88-B (Rules for Altering Public Highway-Rail Crossings);
– G.O. 95 (Overhead Electrical Construction);
– G.O. 118 (Construction, Reconstruction, and Maintenance of Walkways and
Control of Vegetation Adjacent to Railroad Tracks);
– G.O. 128 (Construction of Underground Electric Supply and Communication
Systems);
– G.O. 164-D (Rules and Regulations Governing State Safety Oversight of Rail
Fixed Guideway Systems)
United States Code of Federal Regulations Title 23, Subpart B.
Conformance with rules and regulations that are only applicable to freight train railways are
not required of railways exclusively operated by Light Rail Vehicles.
United States Code of federal Regulations Title 49, Parts 233, 234, 235, and 236.
The designer shall comply with all rules and regulations when designing railway signal
systems that are intended for use by both LRT and freight train operations.
5.3.1.2 Fail-safe Design

The signaling system shall incorporate the fail-safe design principle. This means that
whenever an equipment failure or adverse environmental condition affects the specified
operation of a system involved with safety, the system shall revert to a state known to be
safe.
Failure of a circuit or equipment that results in an indication of a dangerous or restrictive

condition, whether there is, in fact, actual danger, shall have met the fail-safe requirements.
Conversely, a failure that results in an indication of safe or nonrestrictive condition when, in
fact, a dangerous condition may exist, shall not have met the fail-safe requirements.
5.3.1.3 Failure Modes

The signaling system shall be based on principles that permit the attainment of fail-safe
operation in all known or discovered modes.
• Closed Loops: Fail-safe circuits shall employ the closed-loop principles that protect
against open circuits, shorts, or any combination thereof.
• Vital Relays: Relays used in vital circuits shall meet AAR vital standards.
• Vital Circuits: All line circuits that energize a vital relay shall be two-wire, double-
break circuits and shall be energized from an ungrounded DC power supply.
• Grounds: Components or wires becoming grounded shall not cause an unsafe
condition.
• Spurious Oscillations: Any amplifier, generator, device, or active or passive
element breaking into spurious oscillations shall not cause an unsafe condition.
5-7 March 2014

• Filters: Filters used in fail-safe circuits shall be designed to prevent undesired

signals from appearing at the filter output at levels that could cause an unsafe
condition.
5.3.1.4 Equipment Failures and Conditions

Listed below are equipment failures and conditions that could compromise the fail-safe
design. Therefore, the designer shall specify equipment and hardware and design circuits
that would prevent compromise of the fail-safe design.
• Relays (Non-vital) Open coil, fused contacts, high contact resistance, shorted coil,
armature sticking, contacts sticking, and broken spring.
• Relays (Vital as Defined by the AREMA) Open coil, shorted coil, or high contact
resistance.
• Transformers Open primary, open secondary, shorted turns, primary to secondary
shorts, or combinations thereof.
• Capacitors Short, open, or leakage.
• Resistors Increase or decrease in resistance.
• Transistors Short, open, or leakage.
• Diodes Short, open, or reverse leakage.
• Coils Open or shorted turns.
• Loss or degradation of power sources.
• Appearance of abnormal signal levels, electrical noise levels, frequencies, and
delays.
• Effects of electrical interference.
• Absent or abnormal input signals.
• Opens or shorts in internal circuitry at inputs and at outputs.
• Mechanical vibration or shock.
• Drift or instability of amplifiers, receivers, transmitters, oscillators, switching circuits,
and power supplies.
• Deterioration of contacts, connectors, terminals, solder connections, printed circuits,
circuit adjusting devices, and mechanical devices.
5.3.1.5 Drawings, and Manuals, and Training Requirements

The designer shall furnish complete plans and specifications that include, but are not limited
to: single-line track plans, tabulation sheets, interlocking drawings, and an index referencing
the SANDAG Standard Plans. Plans and specifications shall be furnished on both full-size
sheets and electronic files. The number of plans and specifications to be provided will be
determined by the SANDAG project manager.
5-8 March 2014

The designer shall also require the contractor to furnish the following drawings:
• Location plan(s) with a scale approved by the SANDAG Director of Rail showing
eastbound and westbound trackage on a track plan and the location, chaining,
outline, and installation details of all wayside equipment, including, but not limited to:
signals, flashers, gates, bells, cantilevers, impedance bonds, track circuits, switches,
derails, equipment enclosures, junction boxes, push-button stands, TWC, and
electric locks. Details shown shall include mounting requirements, clearances, rail
connections, foundations, stations, bridge abutment faces, and all data necessary for
complete physical installation.
• Track circuit drawing(s). The track circuits shall be placed on the drawing so that
their physical placement on the drawing coincides with the actual location of the track
circuit.
• Line circuit drawing(s) showing all line circuits terminating at the location, with circuits
continuing eastward to the right.
• Signal control circuit drawing(s), including control plans for flashers and gate lamps.
• Signal lighting circuit drawing(s), including lighting of flashers and gate.
• Switch control circuit drawing(s).
• Drawing(s) of repeater and miscellaneous circuits.
• Power distribution drawing(s), including bus loops for each relay rack.
• Rack layout drawing(s) showing the physical position and material reference number
of each piece of equipment on each rack.
• Terminal board layout drawing(s) for each terminal board at the location showing
each terminal, terminal number, and nomenclature of each wire connected to it.
• Physical layout drawing(s) of each equipment enclosure showing door positions,
racks, shelves, terminal boards, and cable entrances.
• Physical layout drawing(s) of all conduit runs on a 1"=40' scale drawing.
• Drawings shall list the number and size, offset or stationing, and depth of every
conduit run, above or below finish grade.
• Wiring diagrams.
The circuits and information from two or more consecutive drawing types may be
consolidated into one drawing provided the order of the drawing information remains as
shown.
The designer shall specify that the contractor shall furnish SANDAG's systems engineering
department via the SANDAG construction manager with twenty (20) sets of installation,
operating, and maintenance manuals of all equipment and systems utilized under the
contract. Designer shall also specify that the contractor shall furnish twenty (20) sets of 11-in.
x 17-in. half-size drawings as well as electronic files of all layout drawings. An additional set
5-9 March 2014

of as-built circuit drawings of each signal case shall be furnished in each of the signal
enclosures.
Designer shall include training requirements in the contract documents for all new equipment
not currently deployed on the existing San Diego Trolley Inc. (SDTI) system. Training shall
be provided by a Professional Railway Signaling Instructor or a Manufacturer Certified Trainer
certified on the new equipment being supplied. The training shall be performed during a
series of classes to include all SANDAG systems engineers and MTS/San Diego Trolley
Inc.(SDTI) Signaling System Maintenance of Way Maintainers. Designer shall meet with
SANDAG and MTS/SDTI staff to determine the total number of Trainees to attend the training
sessions. Training sessions shall include all training materials and equipment and shall
enable trainees to gain a “hands on” understanding of the equipment’s functionality,
hardware, software, and interface wiring.
5.3.1.6 Operating Requirements

The principal functional requirements for signaling and its subsystems shall be derived from
SANDAG's operating requirements.
• Normal Operation: Signal design shall provide for all normal operations and usual
contingencies in a manner generally accepted in the railroad and transit industries,
and not for abnormal circumstances. The signal system shall be designed for normal
direction running or reverse running as directed by the SANDAG Project Manager.
• Highway Crossing Warning Equipment: The signaling subsystem shall include
provisions for highway crossing warning at all public crossings within semi-exclusive
right-of-way (see Section 5.4, "Grade Crossing Warning Equipment").
• Special Condition Indications: The signaling subsystem shall include provisions
for special indications such as high water indicators and gas leak Indicators (see
Section 5.3.3., "Special Condition Indications").
5.3.1.7 Electrical Compatibility

The signaling system shall not be interfered with by the vehicle borne equipment, traction
power system, communication system, or foreign utilities.
5.3.2 Block Signaling

This section addresses the requirements for designing block signaling systems. A block is
defined as a length of track of defined limits, the use of which is governed by block signals.
Signals shall govern freight and LRT trains with indications as defined in the LRT standard
operating procedures. Block signaling is required by the California PUC General Order No.
143B. Block signaling shall be used in all semi-exclusive or exclusive right-of-way unless
otherwise directed by SANDAG. Absolute block signaling shall be specified where both
freight and LRT trains operate jointly.
Block signals shall be designed so that the arrangement of signal apparatus, controls, and
equipment prevents conflicting movements through an arrangement of tracks such as
junctions, crossovers, or double crossovers. The arrangement of the signals and signal
appliances shall be so interconnected that their movements must succeed each other in
proper sequence. An interlocking shall be designed so that it is impossible to give clear
signals to trains unless the route to be used is proved to be safe.
5-10 March 2014

The designer shall ensure by overlaying civil designs in AutoCAD that signals are not
obstructed by poles, retaining walls, and wayside equipment within the signal stopping sight
distance.
The block signaling circuits shall control the aspects of signals to indicate that a safe route is
established for train movement through either:
• Absolute block protection on sections of single track;

• Permissive block protection on sections of double track used exclusively for LRVs; or
• Absolute block protection on a section of double track used for LRT and freight
trains.
5.3.2.1 Interlocked Control Circuits at Turnout Crossover and Double Crossovers

The block signaling system shall automatically align and lock a route through the interlocking
limits, and indicate that a safe route is established for the train movement. Unless otherwise
directed by the SANDAG Systems Engineer, routes shall be stored and processed in the
order in which they are received when opposing traffic clears the interlocking.
Additional Absolute Signals shall be provided to facilitate “Turnback” movements. Absolute

signals shall remain normally red until a route has been requested and assigned.
5.3.2.2 Requesting and Processing Routes

Routes through interlockings shall be automatically requested via all of the following methods
at all new interlocking locations, unless otherwise directed by SANDAG:
• Central Train Control (CTC),

• Bi-Direction Train & Wayside Communication (BDTWC), or
Approach track circuit block occupancy shall be used to automatically request a route through
an interlocking as follows:
• Central Train Control (CTC) Route Request: The line dispatcher shall be able to
submit route requests and cancellations to the interlocking system via the network
communications system described in Section 3.6.3 “Network Communications”. The
interlocking system shall provide route request, signal indication, track circuit, TWC
and other status information to the CTC system via the Network Communication
system. The signal designer shall provide interface information to the Network
Communication system designer so that all desired signal status information will be
available for use by the CTC system.
• Bi-Direction Train & Wayside Communication (BDTWC) Route Request: The
BDTWC loop shall be located a minimum of 10 feet in advance of the track circuit,
which, when occupied, establishes the route. The BDTWC equipment shall be fully
compatible with the existing BDTWC equipment on the existing SDTI SD8 light rail
vehicles. Should wayside equipment not currently deployed on the system be
proposed, then the manufacturer shall demonstrate the equipment is fully
compatible.
5-11 March 2014

• Approach Track Circuit Block Occupancy Route Request: In the absence of a

route request via CTC or BDTWC, a normal route shall be established upon
occupancy of the track circuits. Since freight trains are not equipped with BDTWC
the primary method for automatic routing of freight trains is the occupancy of the
approach track circuit. The system will align and lock switches for the normal
direction if there is no opposing traffic. Otherwise, the route request initiated by the
track circuit shall be stored as described below.
The following sequence of events shall occur in establishment and occupancy of a route:
• A CTC route request is received from the Operations Control Center via the
Communications Network. The request is processed by field devices that will store
routes if necessary and when appropriate a request for a clear route through the
blocks in advance of the train is made;
• A TWC route request is received from the approaching train via the TWC loop
mentioned above. The request is processed by field devices that will store routes if
necessary and when appropriate a request for a clear route through the blocks in
advance of the train is made;
• If approaching train is detected by the track circuit located before the signal in
advance of the home signal. If a route has not been requested, then a request for
clearance through the blocks for a normal route in advance of the train is made;
• Using vital circuits, check that advance blocks are clear;
• Using vital circuits, check that no opposing traffic is in effect;
• Using vital circuits, check that all electric locks in advance blocks indicate locked,
and that their respective switch points are aligned for main line moves;
• Using vital circuits, check that all highway grade-crossing equipment is functioning
and that gates are down if a train is on the crossing approach, when required;
• Using vital circuits, check that all special indications are clear, when required;
• Using vital circuits, occupancy of the track between opposing signals at adjacent
control points shall prevent changing the direction of traffic from which obtained at
the time the track became occupied in conformance with AREMA 16.4.3 and CFR
requirements;
• Using vital circuits move and lock switches;
• Using vital circuits, provide a clear signal;
• Upon occupancy of block, establish route locking using vital circuits;
• Upon clearance of the block by the train, cancel route locking using vital circuits.
Interlocking shall be designed to function in accordance with the operating plan.
At a turnback interlocking with trailing point movements, the following additional functional
requirements shall be provided. Once a train has passed through the interlocking, and while
occupying the following track circuit, no following train may be assigned a route at the
5-12 March 2014

interlocking until the train clears the track circuit following the interlocking detector track. After
completing the first movement through the interlocking and while on the following track circuit,
the unlock light on the push button shall be automatically illuminated permitting the turn back
train to request a route.
New extensions and complete line segment signaling system overhauls shall incorporate
protected reverse running movements from interlocking to interlocking. The designer shall
design the system to include track blocks and approach circuit removal features like those
used on the Blue Line from Downtown to San Ysidro.
The system shall be designed to enable previously requested routes to be canceled.
The system shall process a route cancellation request from any of the following: CTC, TWC,
or wayside push button. Whenever a route cancellation is requested at an interlocking the
circuits shall drop out all route requests and run time before processing a revised route
request.
5.3.2.3 Non-Powered Turnout, Crossover, and Double Crossover

All non-powered turnouts, crossovers, and double crossovers in block signal territory shall
have electric locks and point detection systems that when improperly aligned prohibits a clear
signal to be displayed at the governing signal in accordance with AREMA C&S Manual
requirements.
5.3.2.4 Restrictions to Block Control Logic

The following restrictions shall apply to block control logic, where a block is defined as a
length of track over which the red control limit of the respective block signal is extended:
• One train, and one train only, shall occupy a block at any one time;
• Simultaneous clearance of a block from its opposite end shall be prevented;
• Block requests shall be stored in a one-stage buffer and be processed as soon as
clearance can be granted;
• Block cancellation shall establish time locking. Time locking shall be calculated in
accordance with AREMA Communications and Signals Manual, Section 2, Part
2.4.20.
5.3.2.5 Clear Block
A clear block means the block is absolutely clear of trains, and that all main line switches are
aligned to the route of the block and locked.
All interlocking home signals in the block signal system shall be self-clearing upon approach
of a train intending to take the respective route and block. The design shall protect against
overrun due to an inability to stop when a clear signal fails due to simultaneous entry into a
block, unauthorized entry into a block from a spur track, crossover, or like causes. LRT shall
not be assigned a route previously assigned to freight trains until sufficient time has elapsed
for freight trains to clear the interlocking, typically four minutes.
5-13 March 2014

5.3.2.6 Wayside Signals

Wayside signals (intermediate and interlocking) shall display aspects in accordance with the
current edition of SDTI Rules and Instructions for Employees, Section 4.5.
Wayside signals shall conform to AREMA recommendations and the following unless
otherwise approved by the SANDAG Systems Engineer:
• Green aspects shall be placed above other aspects in all signal light assemblies;
• Wayside signals shall utilize Light Emitting Diode (LED) lamp units not less than
8.75 inches in diameter except for signals in tunnels and dwarf signals may be 6
inches in diameter. Signals shall be visible to LRV operators from not less than 500
feet away. Designers shall verify a clear line of sight; signals shall not be located
behind catenary poles;
• On a single-head signal the center of the bottom aspect shall be approximately 13
feet above top-of-rail for joint-use track, and the center of the top aspect shall be
approximately 13 feet above top-of-rail for LRT exclusive track;
• On a two-head signal the center of the bottom aspect shall be approximately 10 feet
above top-of-rail for Joint LRT and Freight/Passenger-use track and 7 feet from
center of the bottom aspect on the lower head to the center of the lower aspect on
the upper head. On LRT exclusive track the bottom aspect shall be approximately 7
feet above top-of-rail for joint-use track and 5 feet from center of the bottom aspect
on the lower head to the center of the lower aspect on the upper head;
• Signal number plates shall be a black image on a white reflective background at
minimum of 5 inches high conforming to part 7.1 of the AREMA Signal Manual;
• The signal system shall support a maximum LRV operating speed of 55 mph, 40
mph for freight trains;
• All signals shall be equipped with equipment permitting them to be monitored from a
remote location.
5.3.2.7 Permissive Block

Permissive blocks shall permit clear block indications for LRVs operating at minimum
headway for the number of LRT lines served by the track segment.
5.3.2.8 Beginning and Ending ABS

The beginning of block signaling shall be indicated by placing a sign reading, "Begin ABS," at
the point of entry. The end of block signaling shall be indicated by placing a sign reading,
"End ABS," at the block end location. Signals preceding the end of block sign shall provide a
yellow aspect during best condition and assume the track beyond the sign is occupied.
5.3.2.9 Track Circuits

Track circuits shall be designed to detect vehicle occupancy, throughout the length of the
circuit, whenever a shunt of 0.2 ohms is applied to the rails, including turnouts. Momentary
loss of shunt shall not affect the block signaling system.
5-14 March 2014

Track circuits shall be designed to detect broken rail, and prevent trains from entering the
affected block on track used jointly by LRT and freight trains.
All track circuit connections to the rails shall utilize Cembre USA AR60D and AR69D rail web
electrical connection systems or an approved equivalent method. Designer shall prepare a
specification for the materials and installation methods to ensure a proper installation
conforming to the manufacturers recommended installation methods. Non-corrosive grease
shall be applied to the welds and bare cables immediately after welding and inspection.
All track circuit connections to embedded track shall be installed in a hand-hole large enough
to permit maintenance to access all rail connection and reconnect the track leads. All hand-
holes shall be H-20 traffic rated and have a bolted removable lid.
At all impedance bond locations, track circuits shall be attached to the impedance bond
terminals where the 500 MCM cables that attach to the rails terminate to the impedance
bond.
The designer is to indicate the location of insulated joints, power bonds, and all other
appurtenances common to the signaling-and traction power Systems with separate contract
bid items for each.
Track circuits shall be one of the following types unless otherwise authorized by SANDAG:
• Power frequency track circuits when used to detect trains shall derive 110-volt AC
power for opposite ends of the same track circuit from the same source. Where a
power cable is not required between locations at ends of a track circuit, signal cable
conductors may be used to carry 110-volt AC power from the feed end of the track
circuit to the relay end as a reference for the track relay. Power frequency (60 Hz)
track circuits are generally used for this purpose; however, 100 Hz track circuits are
used on tracks located in the vicinity of a possibility for interference from 60 Hz
power utility lines.
• Audio frequency overlay track circuits may be provided for train presence detection
within interlocking limits, for electric lock release, special control features, grade
crossing approach, and grade crossing island circuits.
• Electronic coded track circuits designed for use on electrified railways may be used
in lieu of power frequency track circuits between interlockings and intermediate
signals.
5.3.2.10 Raceway Requirements

All cables shall be run in raceways or lashed to 0.375 inches, extra high-strength galvanized
steel signal messenger cables. All underground cables shall be installed in Schedule 40 PVC
conduit. Aboveground cables shall be installed in either galvanized rigid steel conduit,
Schedule 80 conduit, cable tray, or lashed to an aerial signal messenger. Cable trays shall
only be used on bridges or in tunnels. Cable tray or galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be
used in tunnels. The designer shall determine the location of the signal messenger unless
otherwise directed by the SANDAG project manager. The fill factor for the conduit and cable
tray shall not exceed 50 percent based on the original design.
5-15 March 2014

Junction boxes shall be used where aerial signal cables connect to underground or surface
attached signal cables unless otherwise specified in the scope of work or by SANDAG's
systems engineering department. Junction boxes shall comply with all CPUC clearance
requirements.
All signal cables shall be run through subsurface conduits through station platforms.
5.3.2.11 Cabling Requirements

All stranded conductors shall be coated copper conforming to ASTM B 8, Class B. They
shall be sized as required for the installation. Cabling in enclosed spaces such as tunnels or
under station and buildings shall be specified by the design and in accordance with all
applicable codes and regulations. All cables shall be run in conduit. SANDAG has
standardized the following cable criteria:
• Power Supply Cable: Cable shall be No. 6 AWG or No. 2 AWG stranded copper,
rated 600V, and have type RHW insulation.
• Power Bond and Cross-Bond Cable: Cable shall be single-conductor 500 MCM,
rated 2000V, extra flexible copper Class I rope-lay cables insulated bonds strand
cables conforming to ASTM B-172, and have the same insulation and jacket
specified in the traction power section for traction power feeder cable.
• Track Circuits: Cable shall be No. 6 AWG solid copper, insulated, and jacketed
twisted pair (with 3 turns per foot) from the instrument enclosure to a handhold
adjacent to the track. A No. 6 AWG stranded copper, insulated, and jacketed
conductor shall be spliced to the solid copper conductor in the handhold and ran to
each rail. Jacket shall be polyethylene and insulation shall be ethylene-propylene
(EPR) meeting the requirements of AREMA, Communication and Signals Manual,
Volume 3, Part 10.3.16 and have an average minimum jacket thickness of 60 mil
and average minimum insulation thickness of 90 mil.
• Signal Cable: The aerial cable placed on the messenger shall be insulated,
jacketed, and have at least 25 percent spare conductors and no less than 19 No. 14
conductors. All other signal cables shall be sized as needed. Insulation for all signal
cable shall be EPR, meeting the requirements of AREMA, Communication and
Signals Manual, Volume 3, Part 10.3.16. A polyethylene jacket shall be extruded
overall. The average minimum jjacket thickness shall not be less than 80 mils and
the average minimum insulation thickness shall not be less than 60 mils.
• Case Wiring: All case wiring shall be stranded, single conductor, and shall be tin
coated copper conforming to ASTM B8 Class B, ASTM B3, and ASTM B33-94.
Minimum conductor size for case wiring shall be AWG 16. Insulation shall be
ethylene tetrafluorothylene (ETFE) conforming to ASTM D3159 and shall be Okozel
type Z manufactured by Okonite Co. or acceptable equivalent. Unless otherwise
specified herein, case internal wiring shall conform to AREMA, Communications and
Signals Manual, Volume 3, Part 10.3.14 and Part 10.3.24. TWC cabling shall meet
the requirements of the NEC.
• TWC Cable: Cable shall be two pairs (four conductors) twisted shielded No.12 AWG
as required, and conform to the standard conductor requirements listed in Items A
and E above.
5-16 March 2014

Exterior cable entering instrument shelters and junction boxes shall have sufficient
length to extend to within 6 inches of the top of the instrument shelter and then run down
to the applicable terminal post as which it is terminated.
Every signal cable conductor shall be properly tagged and labeled in accordance with
AREMA Communications and Signaling (C&S) Manual Part 10.4.1 using Raychem
Corporation, Thermofit Marker System (TMS), or acceptable equivalent, cable tags at
both ends of each conductor with the circuit nomenclature (as shown on the Contract
Drawings or approved shop drawing) and the “location” or “terminal” designation
information clearly identified in permanently bonded and legible identification.
Every signal cable jacket shall be labeled with permanent William Frick and Company 7”
x 8” SnapArounds® PVC cable tags, or acceptable equivalent, at both ends and in every
pull boxes with the circuit nomenclature (as shown on the Contract Drawings or
approved shop drawing) and the “location” or “terminal” designation information clearly
identified in permanent UV resistant ink and covered with clear polyester overlay
protectant sheets.
5.3.2.12 Relay Design

Relays shall be plug-connected unless specifically and individually specified or authorized
otherwise. Relays of each type shall be uniform in design and contact assembly. Relays
shall have a sufficient number of contacts for the number of circuits to be controlled. Each
relay or relay-repeater combination shall have at least two spare dependent front-back
contacts. All relays specified shall be capable of rated performance through an operating
temperature range of -4 degrees F to +160 degrees F (-20 degrees C to +71degrees C). The
designer shall specify that the contractor shall furnish the factory test data for all relays as
part of the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Vital relays shall conform to AREMA, Communications and Signals Manual, Volume 2,
Section 6, except as otherwise specified. Relays shall be of the biased-neutral, plug-in type
with a transparent dust cover made of a nonflammable composition. Relays shall have
nominal operating voltage of 12 volts. They shall be capable of picking up and operating
continuously, without damage, when energized with 7 volts to 21 volts. The nominal voltage
for special function vital DC relays may vary. Each biased-neutral vital relay shall have a
minimum of six front-back contacts. All front contacts shall be silver-to-metalized carbon. Arc
suppression for vital relays shall be built into the relay or into its plugboard. Contact
arrangements shall be identical for similar types of relays except for special function relays.
The designer shall indicate that the contractor shall provide test documents verifying that vital
relay contacts used in high-current applications are rated for a minimum of 150 percent of the
maximum current that will be conducted through the contact. Paralleling contacts for high-
current applications shall be allowed only with the prior approval of the SANDAG project
manager. Each contact used in parallel shall be rated for a minimum of 100 percent of the
maximum current that will be conducted through the parallel contacts. Factory test calibration
records shall be provided for each vital relay furnished.
Vital switch operating relays used for control of switch-and-lock movements shall meet the
same requirements as specified for vital biased-neutral relays, except that a minimum of two
front-back dependent contacts shall be supplied, and contacts shall be heavy-duty, metal-to-
metal construction. Each contact shall be equipped with a magnetic blowout feature
5-17 March 2014

effectively interrupt high currents and minimize contact wear. All switch operating relays shall
be identical. One normal and one reverse switch operating relay shall be provided for each
switch-and-lock movement. Switch operating relays shall be Invensys Rail Magnetic Stick,
Alstom Type B, Ansaldo STS Model PN150BM, or equal.
Vital overload relays shall meet the requirements of vital relays, except as modified herein,
and shall be used to detect a switch-and-lock movement. Each overload relay shall be
furnished with two coils and a sufficient number of contacts to perform the designed and shall
be indicated on the Plans. The time for pick up of the overload relay shall not exceed ten
seconds. Overload relays shall be Invensys Rail, Alstom Type B, Ansaldo STS Model PN
150S, or equal.
Vital time-element relays shall be of the plug-in type for nominal 12-volts DC operation.
Thermal relays or pendulum relays shall not be used as vital time-element relays. Vital time-
element relays shall have a minimum of two contacts that will close only at the end of the
adjusted timing cycle and at least two independent check contacts which, when closed, shall
check the normal or de-energized position of the relay.
Each vital time-element relay or vital timing module shall be provided with a time adjustment
that can be sealed. Timing shall be adjusted between 1 second and 15 minutes, in 1-second
intervals. The timing interval shall be capable of repeated operation with an error of not more
than +0.5 seconds when the applied voltage is between 9 volts and 14 volts.
The output relay for the timing module shall have the same minimum contact configuration as
described above.
Electronic vital time-element relays or modules shall be microprocessor controlled and

employ proven fail-safe design principles. They shall be Alstom Microchron relay and
Ansaldo STS Flexichron module or equal. Surge protectors, filters, etc., shall be used to
protect the electronic timers.
Vital AC relays shall meet the requirements established by the AREMA Signal Manual
Section Specification, unless otherwise specified herein, with the exception that these relays
shall be plug-in type and therefore shall not have a screened breather and shall not be
equipped with binding posts. Vital AC relays shall be two-element, 60 Hz or 100 Hz, vane-
type induction relays. Vital AC relays shall be capable of operating continuously and
successfully without resultant damage with a minimum voltage range of 100 volts to 135
volts, inclusive, applied to the local winding and with a minimum voltage range of 0.75 volt to
5.0 volts, inclusive, applied to the control winding. Each relay shall have a minimum of two
dependent front-back contacts. Each front contact shall be of the silver-to-metalized carbon
type.
If power frequency track circuits using matching transformers are supplied by the contractor,
the vital AC relays supplied shall meet all of the requirements herein above, except that a
voltage range of at least 8 volts to 50 volts, inclusive, shall be required for application to the
control winding.
Non-vital Relays shall be of the plug-in type, as manufactured by GRS Co., Type J, or US&S
Co. LP-100, or equal. Each non-vital relay shall be equipped with a minimum of six front-
5-18 March 2014

back contacts. Stationary contacts shall be bifurcated silver, palladium, or an approved

equal. Movable contacts shall be bifurcated silver, palladium with gold overlay, or an
approved equal.
It shall be possible to readily determine whether each relay is picked up or dropped out
without disassembly or other mechanical manipulation of the relays.
The nominal operating voltage shall be 24 volts. The relay shall pick up with 18 volts or more
applied to their coils, and must drop out when this voltage decreases below 6 volts. These
relays shall be capable of operating continuously with up to 42 volts applied to their coils.
Non-vital relays shall pick up in less than 25 milliseconds when energized with 18 volts, and
shall drop out when de-energized from 28 volts in less than 50 milliseconds. These times
shall be measured as a front contact closure or opening from the instant the switch applying
the voltage closes, and from the instant the switch removing the voltage opens. All non-vital
relays shall be identical by type and class, or function.
The designer shall specify a means for mounting an approved typed or printed relay nametag
for each relay. The nametag shall be easily replaceable, but shall not come off during normal
service.
5.3.2.13 Electric Switch and Lock Movements for Mainline Switches

Electric switch and lock movements shall conform to the requirements of the AREMA,
Communications and Signals Manual, Volume 3 Section 12, Parts 12.2.1, 12.2.5, 12.2.15,
and 12.2.16, and shall meet the following requirements:
Movements shall be Ansaldo STS Style M-23A/E, or equal. Operating time shall not exceed
five seconds. The switch and lock movements shall be 110V DC, high speed. Lock, detector,
and front rods shall be insulated and conform to the AREMA requirements. Each switch and
lock movement shall include a standard railroad type junction box suitable for terminating the
interconnecting wire and cable. A complete switch movement assembly shall be specified.
Switch lock control and indication shall be provided for all main line switches in block signal
territory.
Switches at the end of double-track sections shall be power-operated and interlocked.
Event monitoring equipment shall be specified at each interlocking and conform to the
requirements specified in section 5.3.2.20 “Event Recorders”.
If a switch machine is located in an area that is below the 100-year floodplain or in an area
that is known to flood, one of the following measures shall be taken unless otherwise directed
by the SANDAG project manager.
• The design shall be changed so as to move the switch above the 100-year floodplain
or out of the area that is known to flood. This is the preferred option.
• Use a switch machine that is functionally equivalent to an Ansaldo STS Style M-
23A/E and is fully submersible. Alternative switch machines shall be submitted for
5-19 March 2014

approval of the SANDAG systems engineering department. If approval is given, the

designer shall incorporate the submersible switch machine into the design.
• The switch machine shall be protected against flooding through some other
measures. The concept of the flood protecting measures shall be submitted to the
SANDAG systems engineering department for approval. If approved, the designer
shall incorporate the measures into the design.
Regardless of which alternative is chosen, all circuit control equipment shall be designed for
installation above the 100-year floodplain and out of the areas that are known to flood.
5.3.2.14 Electric Switch Locks with Point Detectors for Main Line Switches
Electric switch locks with point detectors shall conform to the requirements of the AREMA,
Communications and Signals Manual, Volume 3, Section 12, Part 12.4.5, and shall meet the
following requirements:
Electric lock shall be either Alstom Model 9B, or equal. Provide pedestal bases except where
physical constraints dictate the use of a dwarf base. All rods shall be insulated, adjustable,
and conform to the AREMA requirements. Each switch lock shall include a standard railroad-
type junction box suitable for terminating the interconnecting wire and cable.
Switch lock control and indication shall be provided for all main line switches in block signal
territory that is not equipped with an electric switch and lock movement.
On main line spur and yard tracks wherever the operation does not require clearing, as for a
yard entrance, a short industrial siding, a facing point entry to a switching lead or runaround,
or the like, the switch lock shall release by local presence only. A derail with circuit controller
shall be required if the siding is on a downgrade to the main line.
On single main line track, wherever the operation requires clearing, the switch lock shall
release by local presence and clear block traffic indication after a predetermined time. Some
of the areas where the operation requires clearing are, but are not limited to: along industrial
siding, a trailing point exit from a switching lead, a run-around, or a junction with an operating
branch line. Timer setting shall be calculated in accordance with the AREMA,
Communications and Signals Manual, Volume 1, Section 2. Part 2.4.20.
If a switch lock and point detector is located in an area that is below the 100-year floodplain or
in an area that is known to flood, one of the following measures shall be taken unless
otherwise directed by SANDAG.
• The design shall be changed so as to move the switch above the 100-year floodplain
or out of the area that is known to flood. This is the preferred option.
• Use a switch lock and point detector that is functionally equivalent to a Alstom Model
9B and is fully submersible. Alternative switch machines shall be submitted for
approval of the SANDAG systems engineering department. If approval is given, the
designer shall incorporate the submersible switch machine into the design.
5-20 March 2014

• The switch lock and point detector shall be protected against flooding through some
other measures. The concept of the flood protecting measures shall be submitted to
the SANDAG systems engineering department for approval. If approved, the
designer shall incorporate the measures into the design.
Regardless of which alternative is chosen, all circuit control equipment shall be installed
above the 100-year floodplain and out of the areas that are known to flood.
5.3.2.15 Main Line Switch Stands and Targets

Switch stands and switch stand targets shall satisfy the following criteria:
Rigid parallel throw gearless switch stands shall be used at all main line track switch stand
locations except for embedded switch locations and in the yard, unless otherwise directed by
the SANDAG project manager. When the main line switch is in the normal position and
locked, the switch stand target shall display reflective white to the approaching trains. When
the switch point is not in the normal position, the target shall display reflective red to the
approaching train. The number of the switch will be shown in white letters and numbers on
the face of the electric lock mechanism or power unit.
Switch stands for switches in pavements (ground-throw or spring switches) and adjustable
automatic switch stand (Raycor 22P) shall not be used on main line switches unless
otherwise directed by the SANDAG project manager.
5.3.2.16 Equipment Enclosures

Wayside signal control equipment shall be housed in water resistant, filtered, ventilated
instrument enclosures along the track right-of-way, as commonly used in the railroad and
transit industries. Enclosures shall be designed for the equipment climate requirements.
Enclosures shall have hinged doors with three-point catch and handle with hasp for padlock.
Enclosures shall be of quality grade stainless steel with moveable shelves, wire chase, and
backboard.
Equipment cases shall be equipped with a thermostatic-controlled exhaust fan when the case
is equipped with solid-state electronic devices.
Equipment cases and housings shall be completely factory-wired with all necessary
equipment unless changes are being made to existing facilities.
Terminals and both ends of all wires shall be tagged with the circuit nomenclatures and "to
and from" terminal designation assigned by the plans.
Equipment housings shall be furnished with interior lighting and a ground fault duplex 120V
AC power receptacle.
Equipment cases shall be sized for 125 percent of the required equipment backboard area.
Equipment Layouts shall be similar to the configuration method used on the Blue Line with an
equipment grid labeling system using numbers and letters to identify equipment locations.
5-21 March 2014

5.3.2.17 Push-Button Control Stands

Push-button control stands shall be specified for installation in advance of interlocking signals
or switch indicators as shown in the SANDAG Standard Plans. Push buttons are to only be
used as a backup to the TWC equipment. The TWC loops located in advance of the push-
button control stand is for manual requests at the interlocking and should not be confused
with the TWC loops for route requests at the approach to the interlocking. Push buttons shall
not be used as the primary means for establishing a route. All push-button control stands
shall have an exterior red unlock light that is visible to a trolley operator, after time locking has
been completed, when a new route may be selected.
5.3.2.18 Programmable Logic Controllers

Industrial-type programmable logic controllers (PLCs) may be used in lieu of non-vital relay
logic circuits. PLCs shall be programmed to provide functionality that is consistent with the
operation plan. The PLCs shall be equipped with five spare 110 connections.
5.3.2.19 Vital Logic Controllers

Vital Logic Controllers (VLC) shall be used in lieu of vital relay networks at interlockings,
intermediate signal, and grade crossing locations. Vital Logic Controllers shall be capable of
interfacing with existing VLC’s presently operating on the LRT system.
VLC’s shall be a Siemens Sicas 7 Programmable Logic Controller or equal. The VLC shall
have been approved for use to control safety critical railway signal and train control networks
by the Federal Railroad Administration (FRA) in accordance with 49 CFR Part 236, Subpart
H.
The system shall be designed such that a centralized vital and non-vital processor (CPU) can
control multiple wayside elements by utilizing a distributed architecture of system
components. It shall be possible to install system components (CPU, I/O, signal drivers) in
various locations and interconnect these components via fiber cables.
• The system shall comply with the intent of all applicable AREMA “Recommended
Best Practices” for the control and indication of interlocking safety functions;
• The system shall operate in temperature range of -40 degrees F and 160 degrees F
and relative humidity ranging from zero percent to 95 percent non-condensing if
located in signal buildings according to AREMA recommendations Class C
equipment;
• The system shall meet shock and vibration according to AREMA C&S manual for
Class C equipment;
• The system shall meet EMI and EMC immunity according to AREMA C&S manual
for Class C equipment;
• The system shall operate without forced air ventilation;
• The processor shall be capable of being operated by a traditional battery rectifier
power supply system;
• The processor shall be of a type that has been successfully operating in an
electrified transit system;
5-22 March 2014

• The system shall be designed such that a centralized vital and non-vital processor
(CPU) can control multiple wayside elements by utilizing a distributed architecture of
system components. It shall be possible to install system components (CPU, I/O,
signal drivers) in various locations and interconnect these components via fiber optic
cables. The use of copper cables shall be minimized;
• The system shall be designed to provide a scalable hardware and software platform
to accommodate future expansions. A non-vital local control panel (LCP) shall
interconnect with the VLC at each interlocking. The LCP shall be utilized to
graphically display operating status, diagnostic functions, and system and hardware
faults. The LCP shall provide local control functionality (call/cancel signals, request
switch movements, etc). The LCP shall display a graphical track layout.
A non-vital local control panel (LCP) shall interconnect with the VLC at each interlocking. The
LCP shall be utilized to graphically display operating status, diagnostic functions, and system
and hardware faults. The LCP shall provide local control functionality (call/cancel signals,
request switch movements, etc). The LCP shall display a graphical track layout.
Two dedicated signaling networks shall be provided for interfacing with a VLC: a vital railway
signaling WAN, and a signal maintenance network connected via the 24-strand Vital WAN
signaling network cable to the SDTI Wayside Maintenance Offices currently located in
Building A at 12 South 13th Street, San Diego, CA 92113. Additionally, a non-vital
connection via the non-vital LAN/WAN to the Operations Control Center (OCC) shall be
provided at all interlocking per Chapter 6 of the Design Criteria.
The vital network shall be a closed, protected network for the transmission of vital signal
information between signal locations. This shall be a two fiber single mode (2SM) fiber optic
transmission system in a ring configuration. The signal supplier shall provide hardened,
industrial communication switches which provide the interface between the fiber system and
the signaling equipment. The interface to the signaling equipment shall be Ethernet. An
additional port shall be provided in each signal room which provides for the ability to access
the CPUs and programs in other locations.
The maintenance network shall provide for remote access to the LCPs and external event
recorders. Hardened, industrial communication switches shall provide the interface between
the fiber system and the equipment. The interface to the equipment shall be Ethernet.
The interface to the central control office shall be an Ethernet connection provided by the
signal equipment. Protocol shall be Genesis.
Designer shall ensure the specifications require the Contractor to adhere to the SDTI
Software Management Control Plan for Processor-Based Signal and Train Control.
Contractor shall be required to submit a comprehensive software configuration control plan
for approval of SANDAG’s Construction Manager.
5.3.2.20 Event Recorders

Event recorders to monitor signal and LRV operation are required at each interlocking and
grade crossing and shall be Micro-Aide CWR-24E or an acceptable equivalent. The event
recorders shall be of the microprocessor type. The event monitor shall have a proven history
5-23 March 2014

of a minimum of three years and shall be capable of storing up to 12,000 event changes
before depletion of data. The monitor shall record the time, date, and state of all inputs upon
the change of state or any input, with an accuracy of one change per second. The event
recorder shall be equipped with: a) Universal Serial Bus (USB) port to enable to enable
downloading directly to a flash drive, b) a female RJ-45 10/100 Base T Ethernet port to
enable local or remote access to the microprocessor via a link to the LAN network utilizing
TCP/IP protocols, c) User Friendly Software for Easy Navigation, and d) preprogrammed
Graphical Displays of Recorded Events.
5.3.2.21 Train-to-Wayside Communications (TWC)

The train-to-wayside communications (TWC) system shall be used for automatic and manual
route selection requests, manual canceling of route selection requests, nearside grade
crossing protection route requests, and for providing train-location information. Loops may be
used for multiple functions.
See Section 6.4 – “Wide Area Network Communications” for additional requirements for the
TWC system.
5.3.2.22 Block and Interlocking Signal Numbering Requirements

Block and interlocking signals shall have a nameplate with a reflective letter prefix and a
number. SDTI designates lines east (traveling away from Mile Post 0.00 at India and C
Streets in downtown San Diego) and west (traveling towards Mile Post 0.00).
The following letter prefixes shall be used:
• South Line signal identification has the prefix "S."

• East Line signal identification has the prefix "E."
• Old Town Line signal identification has the prefix "0."
• Mission Valley Line signal identification has the prefix "M."
• Each successive operating line shall be assigned an identification prefix by SDTI.
The following signal numbers shall be used:
• Automatic block signals shall be identified by mile post mileage for the line in
question to the nearest hundredth mile without decimal and have at least three digits.
Mile post signs shall be of reflecting materials;
• Signals governing westward trains will have odd numbers;
• Signals governing eastward trains will have even numbers;
• Crossovers are to be odd-numbered, increasing in the eastbound direction by two;
• Interlocking signals are to be even-numbered, one number higher than the crossover
number.
Interlocking signals are identified by an even single- or double-digit number followed by a

letter suffix.
5-24 March 2014

• Opposing signals of the same route shall have the same number but suffix "L" for
governing westward trains and "R for governing eastward trains;
• If a home signal has more than one set of route aspects, each set of signals is
identified by a common prefix, number, and "L" or "R" suffix, except a suffix "A," "B,"
or "C" will follow the suffix "L" or "R."
On new line extension projects or a project that is a complete overhaul of an existing line
segment the designer shall design the system with nomenclature consistent with that
used on the Blue Line from Downtown San Diego to San Ysidro. Modifications of
existing signaling systems shall utilize nomenclature that is consistent with that used on
the line segment, unless a complete overhaul of the line is planned. Should the designer
not be sure as to the path to take, then the designer shall consult with the SANDAG
Systems Engineer prior to starting work on the design.
5.3.2.23 Layout Design Requirements

Repeater signals shall not be used except where approval is granted by the SANDAG
systems engineering department, Operator of the system, and the SANDAG Director of Rail.
Repeater signals may be approved for locations when there are not any other locations
available that will improve the stopping sight distance of the signal.
The location of signals and equipment enclosures shall be put on a layer of the civil drawings
and reviewed for conflicts. This work shall be completed before the 65 percent submittal.
Wayside signal equipment shall be housed in equipment enclosures located along the
trackway in readily accessible areas. Where a equipment enclosure is installed near a slope,
a retaining wall and platform shall be installed as required for access. The designer shall
submit calculations for voltage drop for enclosures that are not in close proximity to the power
source. Calculations shall check to ensure that there is sufficient power at the remotely
located enclosure to drive the equipment. All signal enclosures shall be located above the
100-year floodplain. Signal enclosures not located in paved areas shall be surrounded by a 4-
feet wide level area that is 6 inches deep with ballast. The bottom of the signal enclosures
shall be a minimum of 8 inches above the top of final grade.
Line circuits and power feeds shall be double-lashed to a 3/8-inch extra high strength (EHS)
galvanized steel strand aerial messenger attached via standard J-hooks banded to the
catenary poles, except when required otherwise by local circumstances. Splices shall not be
permitted in the signal cable. Lashing wire shall be stainless steel wire, 0.045-inches
diameter minimum. At approximately 1,000 feet intervals, insulators shall be provided in the
strand to minimize traction power negative return current flow and both sides of all feeder
poles.
When any facilities are placed below grade, a detailed conduit cable layout and facilities plan
is required.
Power supply for the signal system shall be taken from a local utility service drop and be on
its own dedicated meter. A standby power supply is not required. The designer shall submit
calculations for the power supply circuits and size all cables as required. Voltage drop shall
5-25 March 2014

be calculated for all signal enclosures that are not located in close proximity of the utility
service drop. The designer shall attempt to minimize the total number of utility service
entrances required. For example, at locations in which a station platform and a grade
crossing are located near each other, the utility entrance cable shall feed both the grade
crossing and the station meters. The voltage drop calculations and conductor sizing shall
demonstrate that supply voltage levels shall be sufficient under the worst case requirements.
Doubling up power distribution conductors is permissible and preferred over utilizing step up
and step down transformers. The designer may use a 240 volts power source and a step-
down transformer at the enclosure location if a utility service connection is not able to be
established with a close proximity to the signaling enclosure and conductor sizing to
overcome the voltage drop becomes excessive in the opinion of the SANDAG Systems
Engineer. Typically, power distribution conductor sizing should not exceed those shown in
Section 5.3.2.11 “Cabling Requirements” for “Power Supply Cable”. When new electrical
service meters for the signaling system are planned to be installed at the station, the signaling
system designer shall work with the station electrical designer to develop a signal electrical
service enclosure containing the station electrical system and signaling system meters
(typically a two or three meters arrangement).
Signal spacing shall be determined by the following requirements:
• Minimum stopping distance based on an express train must be met. An express

train does not stop at station platforms; it travels at 20 mph through the station
platforms. The express train is a freight train in joint-use trackage right-of-way and is
an LRV in LRT-only right-of-way. Freight trains are not required to reduce speed
through the station;
• Should provide even-block occupancy times based on a service train. A service train
stops at all stations for a minimum of 20 seconds;
• Shall satisfy headway requirement under highest demand in accordance with the
operating plan. However, in areas where special event service will be operated,
signals shall be spaced to accommodate closer headways as necessitated by the
special event service, typically 2.5 minutes.
Signals shall be located in areas where the line-of-sight of the signal will not be blocked by an
obstruction. Signals and signs shall be located along the trackway in such a way that they
shall be visible to a trolley operator at least 500 feet and a freight engineer at least 1,000 feet
before their location. Signals shall not be located at the end of curves unless otherwise
approved by the SANDAG project manager. The signal designer shall coordinate the
location of each signal with the catenary designer, drainage designer, utility coordinator, and
all other designers to ensure that the minimum line-of-sight of the signals and indications is
maintained. Signals governing movements in the normal current of direction shall be located
so that when viewed they are to the immediate right of the track they govern. Signals
governing movements against the normal current of direction shall be located so that when
viewed they are to the immediate left of the track.
5-26 March 2014

Special arrangements and/or types of signaling equipment may be used in areas where the
SDTl tracks parallel another railroad with approval of the SANDAG Director of Rail. The
signals of the two paralleling railroads shall be easily distinguishable.
Signal placement shall not allow a train stopped for a red aspect to block a grade crossing.
Signals shall not be placed in roadways, within 350 feet after a roadway, within station
platform limits, or within special trackwork unless approved by the SANDAG Director of Rail.
Signals should be located at the end of station platforms when signals happen to be located
near stations. Block boundaries shall be at least 50 feet in front of facing point switch points
and at or beyond the clearance point for trailing moves.
The designer shall try to avoid locating signals in tunnels except at the far end of a station
platform.
The minimum breaking distance on LRT-only tracks shall not be less than the distance
determined for an LRV on an express route at normal operating speed. LRVs on an express
route travel through stations at 20 mph without stopping at the station. The minimum breaking
distance on joint-use track, shall not be less than largest distance determined by the
minimum breaking distance formulas for both an LRV and a freight train on express routes at
normal operating speeds. Joint-use track is defined as track that is used by LRVs and freight
trains. Refer to Tables 5-1 and 5-2 for minimum stopping distances.
5-27 March 2014

Table 5-1. – Stopping Distance for LRV

Stopping Distance, Uphill
PERCENT GRADE
0 1 2 3 4
mph kph feet meters feet meters feet meters feet meters feet meters
5 8 11 3 10 3 9 3 8 2 8 2
10 16 43 13 39 12 35 11 33 10 30 9
15 24 98 30 88 27 80 24 73 22 68 21
20 32 174 53 156 48 142 43 130 40 120 37
25 40 271 83 244 74 222 68 203 62 188 57
30 48 390 119 351 107 319 97 293 89 270 82
35 56 531 162 478 146 435 133 399 122 368 112
40 64 694 212 625 191 568 173 521 159 481 147
45 72 879 268 791 241 719 219 659 201 608 185
50 80 1085 331 976 297 887 270 813 248 751 229
55 89 1312 400 1181 360 1074 327 984 300 909 277
Stopping Distance, Downhill
PERCENT GRADE
0 1 2 3 4
mph kph feet meters feet meters feet meters feet meters feet meters
5 8 11 3 12 4 14 4 16 5 20 6
10 16 43 13 49 15 56 17 65 20 78 24
15 24 98 30 110 34 126 38 146 45 176 54
20 32 174 53 195 59 223 68 260 79 312 95
25 40 271 83 305 93 349 106 407 124 488 149
30 48 390 119 439 134 502 153 586 179 703 214
35 56 531 162 598 182 683 208 797 243 957 292
40 64 694 212 781 238 893 272 1041 317 1250 381
45 72 879 268 988 301 1130 344 1318 402 1581 482
50 80 1085 331 1220 372 1395 425 1627 496 1952 595
55 89 1312 400 1476 450 1687 514 1969 600 2362 720
Table is based on the minimum braking distance formula for LRVs.
5-28 March 2014

Table 5-2. – Stopping Distance for Freight Train

Stopping Distance, Uphill – 80 Tons per Operative Brake (TPOB)
PERCENT GRADE
0 1 2 3
mph kph feet meters feet meters feet meters feet meters
5 8 420 128 296 90 211 64 152 46
10 16 880 268 610 186 431 131 312 95
15 24 1380 421 955 291 681 208 504 154
20 32 1920 585 1336 407 965 294 729 222
25 40 2500 762 1752 534 1284 391 991 302
30 48 3120 951 2206 672 1640 500 1290 393
35 56 3780 1152 2698 822 2034 620 1626 496
40 64 4480 1366 3227 984 2465 751 2001 610
Stopping Distance, Downhill – 143 Tons per Operative Brake
PERCENT GRADE
0 1 2 3
mph kph feet meters feet meters feet meters feet meters
5 8 435 133 808 246 1530 466 2924 891
10 16 943 287 1811 552 3624 1105 7405 2257
15 24 1521 464 2939 896 6031 1838 12775 3894
20 32 2172 662 4174 1272 8682 2646 18831 5740
25 40 2893 882 5508 1679 11541 3518 NOTE NOTE
30 48 3687 1124 6936 2114 14578 4446 NOTE NOTE
35 56 4551 1387 8455 2577 17803 5426 NOTE NOTE
40 64 5488 1673 10063 3067 21180 6456 NOTE NOTE
Note: Trains shall be restricted to 20 MPH or less on downhill average grades exceeding 2
percent. Table is based on the minimum braking distance for freight trains equation.
5-29 March 2014

Minimum Braking Distance for LRVs
Minimum Braking Distances provided in the table are based on the 70 percent of the maximum AW3
braking rate and an additional 2.5 percent factor of safety.
Minimum Braking Distance for Freight Trains
D = 0.01TV02 + (80V0)[1-(gt/1300)] – (0.01TVF2)[(1-(GT/1900)]
Where:
D = Distance required for safe braking
T = Tons per operative brake
V0 = Velocity at origin, mph
VF = Final velocity, mph
G = Average grade of block
Average Grade = (DG Total) / Total Block Distance
DG Total = (Distance x Grade) + (Distance x Grade) + …
5.3.3 Special Condition Indications

Designer shall submit as part of the 35 percent submittal a list of locations that contain
potential hazards that may have an adverse effect on the normal operation of the trolley
segment. Such potential hazards include, but are not limited to:
• Flooding of the travel way: A high water indicator system shall be installed at
locations in which the top-of-rail is below the 100-year floodplain.
• Plausible leak containing flammable or hazardous gases: A gas indicator system
shall be installed at locations at which there is a major gas distribution facility
immediately adjacent to our facility and the facility loads and unloads fuels.
SANDAG shall review and approve the design for each item on the list.
The indicators shall be mounted on the mast of a high signal in the normal direction at
locations that will assist operations in establishing turn back movements on the system in the
event of a hazardous situation.
The hazard indication system shall detect the hazard, turn all block signals between
indicators red, and turn the hazard indicators from white to red. Hazard indicators shall be a
McCain Traffic Supply pedestrian-type signal with 12-inches black polycarbonate housing
and doors, black cutaway visors, and polycarbonate lenses or equal. The indicator shall
normally display an illuminated white letter aspect and shall be consistent with the indicators
on the existing system. The illuminated letter aspect shall be a "W" for high water indicators
and "G" for gas indicators. If other hazard indicators are required, the designer shall
5-30 March 2014

recommend a new illuminated letter aspect and request approval from the SANDAG Director
of Rail in writing.
All special indicators and equipment in areas where there are special indications shall have
power back-up or be fed off of the traction power system.
5.4 Grade Crossing Warning System

All crossings on semi-exclusive right-of-way shall have highway crossing warning systems
that utilize “active warning devices” at locations and in configurations determined by a
diagnostic team made up of knowledgeable representative of the parties of interest in a
railroad-highway crossing or a group of crossings per Title 23 of the United States Code of
Federal Regulations (CFR) – Highways, Part 646 – Railroads, Subpart B. Whenever
possible Federal-aid Highway funds should be used to fund the crossing improvement
projects in accordance with Title 23 of the CFR, Part 646, Section 208. Some of the types of
warning equipment include, but are not limited to, crossing gate(s) and cantilever(s) complete
with bell(s) and flashers.
5-31 March 2014

Figure 5-1. - Grade Crossing Warning System
5-32 March 2014

The designer working as a member of the diagnostic team shall prepare design concepts in
accordance with the CFR Title 23, Part 646.214 “Design” and all California Public Utilities
Commission Requirements. The diagnostic team shall review the design concepts and
determine what type and configuration of warning devices SANDAG shall use at each
crossing and then design the control circuits for the accepted equipment and configuration.
All designs shall be consistent with the existing system. Railroad warning devices and LRT
devices are to be designed and installed in accordance with Public Utilities Commission
General Order No. 75-D, AREMA Communications and Signals Manual, Volume 1, Section
3; and the manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), Part 5, Chapter 5F and Part
8. Crossing signals and gate devices shall be placed to provide 19 feet of vertical clearance,
for auto and truck traffic, above the base of curb or edge of traveled way when the crossing
arm is prohibited from rising up to its full upright position. See Figure 5-1 for typical
placement. Additional flashers shall be added at pedestrian crossings where the standard
crossing layout does not warn pedestrians visually and audibly of the approaching LRV and
warrant extra protection unless otherwise directed by the SANDAG project manager.
5.4.1 Circuit Design Requirements

In the event the crossing warning equipment is within 200 feet of a traffic signal controlled
intersection, the crossing warning equipment, as a minimum, shall be tied into the railroad
preemption in the traffic signal controller. A traffic signal interconnect circuit shall be used on
all new or reconfigured crossings that are located within 200 feet of a traffic signal controlled
intersection. The traffic signal interconnect circuit shall conform to AREMA Communications
and Signals Manual, Volume 1, Section 3; and MUTCD Part 8 circuit design standards and
requirement and shall preempt the traffic signals upon activation by an approaching train. A
traffic study shall be required with specific recommendations as to design upgrade, if any, for
the existing traffic scheme and shall be approved by the SANDAG Director of Rail. Unless
otherwise directed by the City’s traffic engineer all new and retrofitted traffic signalized
intersections that are interconnected with railroads signal controls shall be provided with
battery backup power for all interconnected devices including, but not limited to, traffic
signals, advance waning flashers, blank out signs, and traffic signal controllers.
"Automatic gate type" signaling shall conform to provisions within General Order No. 75D.
When this type or any other type of automatic railroad crossing warning device is within 200
feet of traffic control signals or required by traffic studies, the traffic control signals shall be
coordinated with the railroad signal by using a typical railroad preemption sequence. The
crossing warning activation time shall comply with the AREMA Communications and Signals
Manual, Volume 3, Section 3, Part 3.3.10 “Recommended Instructions for Determining
Warning Time and Calculating Minimum Approach Distance for Highway-Rail Grade
Crossing Warning Systems” The traffic signal designer shall work with the railroad signaling
designer on the systems interface. If additional software and/or hardware modifications are
required in the traffic signal controller in order to accommodate the pedestrian clearing phase,
then the designer shall provide notification and design requirements to the authority with
jurisdiction for the traffic signal, with the approval of the SANDAG project manager.
Nearside crossing control shall be provided at crossings where an LRT station is located
between the crossing and the beginning of the crossing approach track circuit, unless
5-33 March 2014

approval is not granted by the CPUC. The designer shall prepare all necessary
documentation needed to obtain approval by the CPUC for nearside crossing control
approval. The crossing approach track circuit shall be sized for an express train. TWC shall
be used to initiate the nearside crossing control circuit. The crossing relay shall remain
energized for a predetermined length of time, when the train intends to make a station stop,
by incorporating the latch-out control circuit in the crossing control scheme. The nearside
indicators shall be installed at the beginning of the audio approach track circuit and on the
right side of the tracks when viewed from the normal direction of traffic. The TWC loop shall
be located approximately 500 feet in advance of the nearside indicator except when site
constraints dictate otherwise. The nearside indicator shall be a McCain Traffic Supply
pedestrian-type signal with 12 inches black polycarbonate housing and doors, black cutaway
visors, and polycarbonate lenses or equal. The nearside indicator shall normally display an
illuminated white “E” Light Emitting Diode (LED) aspect under a dark yellow “S” LED aspect.
The train operator, when on a service route, shall be able to see the indication change from
the express route indication “E” to the service route indication “S”. All nearside crossings
shall have an event recorder as specified in Section 3.5.3.2S. The flashing indicator beacon
(FIB) shall remain dark until a train activates the nearside crossing circuit or crossing
approach circuit. The FIB indicator shall be illuminated solid until the latch-out control time
expires and the nearside crossing warning devices are activated at which time the FIB will
flash. The FIB indicator at the crossing shall be a red LED X and flash until the gate is
completely down. The red X FIB indicator shall then remain lit (illuminated) until the gates
begin to rise.
Gate lowering shall be delayed three to ten seconds from initiation of bells and flashers to
allow automobiles to clear the intersection prior to sustaining damage from the crossing
equipment.
Voltage drop and power demand calculations shall be made and submitted for review
whenever more than two gates and/or cantilevers are used at a grade crossing. While on
battery power, every flasher shall have a minimum of 90 percent of the original lamp voltage
following the gate being raised and lowered three times.
Approaches shall be designed to ensure crossing warning equipment is operating at least 25

seconds before an express train occupies the crossing island circuit. Approach circuits for
grade crossings shall be located for the running speed based on maximum permitted speed
without consideration for LRT stations.
AREMA Communications & Signals Manual, Volume 1, Section 3, Part 3.3.10 shall be
utilized in determining grade crossing timing and approach lengths. Additional time may be
provided for advance preemption time (APT) provided the additional time does not result in
longer grade crossing activation time. APT shall be determined by traffic signal engineer and
accepted by the agency that will be accepting ownership of the traffic signals.
If a home signal is installed within the limits of an approach to a grade crossing, there shall be
circuit ties between the grade crossing warning system and the signaling system that prevent
a train operator from seeing a clear indication at the home signal and arriving at the crossing
before the gates are in the down position. This situation can occur if a train is stopped at the
5-34 March 2014

red indication and the indication turns green and the circuit ties do not exist. Circuit design
shall be consistent with circuits used elsewhere on the system.
Gates that are in the down position for ten minutes will timeout and pick up. Upon activation
of the grade crossing, the first signal in advance of a grade crossing approach circuit and any
signal within the approach shall turn red and remain red until the approach circuit of the grade
crossing clears.
Second train logic circuitry shall be provided to prevent gates from momentarily rising when a
train is on the advance preemption approach circuit.
All new grade crossing flashers shall be Light Emitting Diode type.
Generally the use of four quadrant gates (exit gates) should be limited to quite zone and high
speed rail corridor applications at which all alternative traffic management treatments that
limit reverse entry to the crossing have been considered and due to unique features at the
crossings under consideration the alternative treatments are considered to be ineffective at
limiting reverse entry. When exit gates are utilized a vital traffic detection system shall be
utilized to detect the presence of vehicles within the limits of the trackway crossing in
accordance with best practices and all regulatory requirements at all crossings at which four
quadrant gates are recommended for installation.
The railroads signal and traffic signal engineers shall work cooperatively in the development
of a recommended grade crossing and traffic signal timing system that conforms to AREMA,
MUTCD and CPUC requirements and standards. Since it is the traffic engineer’s
responsibility to manage the movement of highway vehicular traffic on the highway and
therefore the traffic engineer has the final say on signal timing provided the timing conforms
to AREMA, MUTCD, and CPUC requirements.
5.4.2 Crossing Equipment Layout Design Requirements

Every highway crossing warning system layout, including gates, flashers, and ancillary
equipment, shall be designed with full regard to the particular railroad and transit operations
at the particular crossing so as to minimize highway closure time. Gate placement shall
conform to CPUC and CAMUTCD requirements while considering future street widening and
double tracking plans.
Crossing gate mast shall extend high enough to accommodate clamp-on wind guard. A wind
guard must be provided on all crossing gate masts to restrict horizontal gate arm movement
in the vertical position and reduce breakage due to high wind.
Flashing lights shall have minimum 12-inch LED flashers per CPUC G.O. 75D.
Warning bells shall conform to AREMA Standards using "Soft Tone Clapper," mechanisms
capable of producing 75 to 85 dBA.
5-35 March 2014

Gates shall have a maximum length of 30 feet unless otherwise authorized by SANDAG and
the system operator. At crossings where there are multiple lanes in one direction and there is
a median that is 9 feet wide or wider with two or more lanes of traffic, a median gate shall be
used. If possible, installation of a center median should be considered to discourage
automobiles from driving around the gate. Warning device placement shall be determined by
the diagnostic team. In no case shall a warning device be located less than 4 feet 3 inches
from the face of the curb, or 6 feet 3 inches from the edge of traveled way at locations in
which there is not a curb. Where gates are located at 4 feet 3 inches behind the curb or 6 feet
3 inches from the edge of traveled way and there is an existing sidewalk along the roadway,
a walkway behind the gate shall be provided. The minimum width of the walkway shall be 4
feet clear of the gate counterweight assembly in the down position. The area under the
counterweight shall not be paved. Special attention shall be made to the Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. No part of the gate should protrude over the sidewalk
when the gate is in the upright position, unless it is above 7 feet from the top of the sidewalk
and a preferred minimum walkway width of 5 feet between obstructions should be
maintained. Where space is limited the absolute minimum walkway width may be reduced
below the preferred 5 feet minimum width and shall conform to the absolute minimum
pathway width requirements of ADA. All gates shall be made of fiberglass. Under no
circumstances shall a gate arm be made out of a conductive material such as aluminum.
When the area between the face of curb and edge of right of way does not provide sufficient
space to create an ADA compliant walkway behind the gate counterweights when the gate is
in the down position, then the gate position should be set back behind the sidewalk providing
an ADA accessible path between the face of curb and the face of the gate assembly in the
upright position. The design layout shall ensure that there is sufficient room within the right of
way behind the gate mechanism to provide for the counterweights when the gate is in the
down position. No part of the gate should protrude over the sidewalk when the gate is in the
upright position, unless it is above 7 ft. from the top of the sidewalk and a preferred minimum
walkway width of 5 ft. between face of curb and the nearest face of the gate (that is less than
7 feet above the planned finish surface) and other existing obstructions should be
maintained. Where space is limited the absolute minimum walkway width may be reduced
below the preferred 5 feet minimum width and shall conform to the absolute minimum
pathway width requirements of Federal and State ADA requirements.
The diagnostic team should consider all of the existing right of way and other site constraints
when developing the crossing layouts. Consistency of layout arrangement along a line
segment should be given consideration by the diagnostic team. The ADA accessible
walkways may pass between the gate and the roadway or behind the gate; it is the diagnostic
team’s responsibility to determine which arrangement is preferable at the crossing.
At locations in which a grade crossing is located adjacent to an interlocking, the signals shall
be located on the nearside of the crossing so trains will stop prior to entering the crossing. In
these situations the signal shall remain red until the gates have descended.
5-36 March 2014

Gate mechanism shall be supported by a mast collar that prevents the mechanism form
descending on the mast when gate mechanism mounting bolts are loosened to enable the
mechanism to be rotated about the mast.
5.4.3 Utilization of Existing Equipment

Wherever the existing crossing gate and flasher assemblies are to be reused, all electrical
equipment (wiring, motors, lights, etc.) shall be replaced as necessary.
5.5 Power
In an effort to limit the number of utility electrical services connection points, electrical power
shall be obtained from a dedicated signaling system meter located at the closest secondary
voltage electrical service point at a trolley station Should special conditions require or enable
power to be taken from a closer source than the trolley station, then the designer shall
discuss the situation with the SANDAG system engineer and make a recommendation on
how to proceed with the design. At locations where voltage drop may be an issue step up
and step down transformers should be considered to overcome the voltage drop issue.
Designer shall submit voltage drop and load calculations with the 65% submittal. The voltage
drop shall be calculated based on the maximum load of all equipment essential to the
operation of the system. Load calculations shall not include the load of devices such as
laptop computers, work lights, electric hand tools, and other devices that are not required to
operate the system.
Designer shall provide all necessary information required to install new meter services where
required. Designer shall coordinate design with the SDG&E utility coordinator.
5.6 Interface Requirements

5.6.1 General
The signal system shall be designed to properly interface with other major system elements
such as civil facilities, trackwork, vehicles, utility and traction power, OCS, SCADA, and traffic
signals.
5.6.2 Civil Facilities

The signal system shall be designed to properly interface with civil design elements including:
• Street crossings, including paving type conflicts with crossing controls;

• Platforms and accompanying structures;
• Wayside and street drainage;
• Overpass or underpass structures and bridges;
• Combined systems ductbank and pullboxes.
5-37 March 2014

5.6.3 Trackwork
The signal system shall be designed to properly interface with trackwork design elements
including:
• Horizontal and vertical alignment of tracks, including curves;

• Requirements for ballasted and embedded track;
• Ties and tie spacing at special trackwork and impedance bond locations;
• Locations of insulated joints;
• Special bonding for switches, frogs, and rail joints;
• Rail connections.
5.6.4 Vehicles
The signal system design shall be compatible with the vehicle characteristics described in
Chapter 7, Vehicles. Track circuits shall be frequency coordinated with the different
propulsion systems to assure proper operation of the track circuit.
5.6.5 Power
The signal system shall be designed to properly interface with the power utility including:
• Local utility sources and metering requirements;

• Power distribution requirements.

The signal system shall be designed to properly interface with design elements of the traction
power system including:
• Substation locations including negative connections to the track;

• Impedance bond locations;
• Crossbonding locations.
5.6.7 OCS
The signal system shall be designed to properly interface with OCS design elements
including:
• Obstruction of signal views by poles or other OCS structures;

• Location of OCS insulated sections in coordination with any insulated joints in the
trackwork below to avoid flash-overs.
5.6.8 Wide Area Network and Local Area Network

The signal system shall be designed to properly interface with the WAN/LAN
communications system for interfacing with the Operations Control Center (OCC). Remote
5-38 March 2014

signal and grade crossing locations shall be connected to the communication networks to
provide signal system status to central control. The designer shall refer to Chapter 6,
Communications for additional information.
The signal designer shall develop the fiber optic fiber allocations, splicing diagrams, Vital
PLC, Vital Network Switch, and Vital fiber optic interfaces to ensure proper connectivity of the
Vital WAN Fiber Optic Communication System.
The signal designer shall work with the Communications Systems engineers to show the
placement of the Vital WAN cables on the same design drawings as the Non-Vital WAN
communication system raceway and cabling allocation plans.
The signal designer shall coordinate non-vital LAN connections, IP addressing, and bit
addressing with the non-vital communications WAN/LAN designer and CTC software
integrator.
Prior to the 65% design submittal the signal designer shall provide a list of all signaling
system catenary riser pole locations requiring spouts, second reinforced hand-holes, and
conduit in the catenary pole foundation to the non-vital WAN/LAN designer and the Overhead
Contact System (OCS) catenary designer.
Signal designer shall develop an OCC interface description that describes the changes
required at the OCC to properly interface field signaling system elements for proper display at
the OCC and to enable the proper control requests to be submitted to the field signaling
system controller. OCC interface description shall include new signaling system layout,
existing signaling system layout identifying items to be removed, new and to be removed
track circuits bit information, new and to be removed signal indications bit addresses, new
and to be removed route request bit information, and all other interface bit addressing
required to provide a fully functional system that provides desired functionality that is
consistent with the existing system at OCC, unless otherwise directed.
5.6.9 Traffic Signals

• The signal system shall be designed to properly interface with traffic signal design
elements located at or near to grade crossings. The systems shall be designed to
conform to American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association
(AREMA) Communication and Signal Manual of Recommended Practices and the
California Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (CAMUTCD). The signal
designer shall:
• Coordinate with the appropriate city traffic agencies;
• Obtain advanced or simultaneous preemption requirements from the local traffic
agency;
• Pay special attention to flashing signals, striping and signage governing left turns
from parallel moves.
5-39 March 2014

Chapter 6.0 – Communications
6.0 COMMUNICATIONS
The system utilizes a variety of communications applications for a variety of purposes.
Unless otherwise directed, the systems designs shall remain compatible and consistent with
existing communications systems. As technology evolves, SANDAG and MTS want to take
advantage of the advancements in technology. Designers should meet with staff and share
potential advancements to discuss incorporation of these technologies into the project.
This chapter provides the designer with information about the existing communications
systems, guide the design process, in an effort to ensure that quality designs are created by
the design engineer’s. This chapter describes the functional, performance, and interface
requirements and criteria of Communications systems to be incorporated into San Diego
Metropolitan Transit System (MTS) Light Rail Transit (LRT) Projects.
The Communications System contract plans and Special Provisions shall consist of the
following systems: Wide Area and Local Area Networks (WAN/LAN), communications
enclosures and rooms; fare technology provisions; wireless radio; public address (PA),
visual message sign (VMS) provisions; telephone; intrusion detection; temperature
control; station and parking lot video surveillance; traction power and railway signaling
supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA); Bi-directional Vehicle and Wayside
Communications (BVWC); communications room access control system(if applicable);
uninterruptible power supply (UPS); and grounding and bonding. Should the contract
plans include Enclosed Structures (such as underground station), then the
communications system design contract plans and Special Provisions shall also include
Emergency Management Panel (EMP) with fire response SCADA features, fire alarm,
and intrusion detection systems.
The WAN/LAN are utilized by many other systems to transport data associated the other
systems and required to function. Designers shall ensure that all system designs are
compatible with the existing network and all modifications to the WAN/LAN and Control
Systems at the OCC will be consistent and fully compatible with all existing systems to
ensure new system and system modifications will be fully functional once implemented.
Any additional required interfaces shall be identified and a plan developed to integrate
the additional interfaces into the existing OCC and WAN/LAN systems to ensure
complete functionality following testing and commissioning. Interface requirements shall
be logged and tracked to help ensure that the requirements are completed. This
chapter's interface descriptions are not in complete detail. Rather, they are intended to
provide general interface information and guidance to ensure new interfaces are
compatible and consistent with existing network interface design practices.
Plans and Special Provisions for systems listed above shall be consistent to those
developed for recent SANDAG projects of a similar type and conform to the
requirements described herein, unless otherwise directed by the SANDAG System
Engineer. Any and all direction received that is not consistent with requirements
specified in this design criteria shall be followed and confirmed through written
correspondence with the SANDAG Systems Engineer and SANDAG Project Manager.
Should any direction received be perceived to be beyond the scope of services
authorized, then the designer shall, prior to starting work, seek written authorization to
6-1 March 2014

proceed with the design work from the SANDAG Project Manager.
As technology evolves and improves and new products are released, there may be
opportunities to improve the system beyond the technology level described in this document.
The Designer shall early in the design development phase identify areas for advancement
and notify the SANDAG project manager and the SANDAG Systems Engineer, present
information about these system, and request direction on whether or not MTS and SANDAG
are interested in pursuing the recommended technology.
Should SANDAG’s project manager or the SANDAG Systems Engineer determine that the
technology is worth presenting to MTS for consideration, then the designer shall be present
the technology and costs associated with it. SANDAG and/or MTS may request additional
meetings with qualified vendors to obtain additional information and potentially request a
demonstration of the technology under consideration.
6.1 General
Designers shall develop designs that conform to the requirements contained in this Design
Criteria, are consistent with the most current update to the Standards Plans, and Special
Provisions and plans utilized for recent projects.
Communications Systems Design Plans shall include at a minimum:
• Cover sheet and Index of Drawings;

• Abbreviations, Symbols and Legend sheet;
• General Notes and References;
• Demolition plans showing items to be removed (if needed);
• Raceway and cable location plans on topographic sheets identifying location and
type of enclosures, down guys anchor assemblies, down guy anchor foundations,
and raceways to be installed (including aerial, underground, riser, junction box, and
cable trays);
• Single line diagrams for each communications system to be installed;
• Man holes, hand holes, and pull boxes cable termination schedules;
• Typical details for assemblies;
• Aerial signaling and fiber optic cable schedules;
• Splicing diagrams;
• Communications enclosure, building, or room details;
• Initial and final rack layouts;
• Station communication raceway drawings;
• Equipment termination schedules and detail sheets.
6-2 March 2014

Except as specified otherwise, exterior metal communications system fabrications and

hardware shall conform to the requirements of Sections 75, “Miscellaneous Metal” and 75-
1.05 “Galvanizing” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.
Concrete reinforcing steel shall conform to the provisions in Section 52, “Reinforcement,” of
the Caltrans Standard Specifications.
Communications system computer aided drawing files shall be provided by the designer to
SANDAG Systems Configuration Manager. The Construction Contractor shall update design
drawings with as-built information and submit final drawings for the installed system.
6.1.1 Communications Systems Overview

The San Diego Trolley Light Rail Communications systems are primarily intended to facilitate
both verbal and digital communications exchange between the Operations Control Center
(OCC) and passenger stations, field equipment and between the OCC and on board vehicle
equipment. The communications system shall provide the necessary sub system to support
the total operation requirements of the LRT system.
6.1.1.1 Digital Communications

All digital communications between the OCC and field devices utilize a backbone fiber optic
cable transmission system with Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
to communicate over the Wide Area Network (WAN) and the Local Area Network (LAN).
The digital WAN and LAN communications systems are also utilized by the Fare Technology
and Video Surveillance Systems.
In addition, the fully integrated Advanced Inventory Management System (AIMS) is a

Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System (SCADA) located at the Operation Control
Center (OCC) that interfaces with field elements to display information at the OCC. The
AIMS SCADA system interfaces with the following systems over the WAN and LAN:
• Railway Signaling (track circuits occupancy, indications, route requests, cancel, track
blocks, etc.);
• Traction Power System (Voltage, Current, DC and AC breakers Open/Closed, Line
Energized De-energized, etc.);
• Passenger station facilities such as elevators or escalators, electric power meter,
UPS back up battery.etc;
• Unidirectional Train to Wayside (TWC) and Bi-directional Vehicle and Wayside
Communications (BVWC), commonly referred to as Bidirectional TWC, System
(Train number, route number, time stamps, etc.);
• Wheel Counter System (In-street running areas only, e.g. C Street, Park Blvd,
Commercial, and Cuyamaca);
• Variable Message Signs (VMS) (messaging at stations (next train, canned, etc.));
• Public Address Systems (PA) (audio messages at stations);
• Intrusion Detection and temperature Monitoring PLC
6-3 March 2014

Line extension and capital improvement projects shall upgrade the AIMS software and OCC
hardware as needed to fully integrate the new line extension into the existing AIMS OCC
facility. Prior to the new line being placed in service the OCC AIMS system shall be
upgraded to enable all existing functionality to be extended to the new line segment. The
systems deployed along the new line extension shall provide the same functionality and
utilize the same interface protocols and bit assignments as the existing system utilizes to
interface the existing AIMS system. All new field equipment shall conform to the MTS vital
and non-vital IP addressing standard. Designers shall meet with San Diego Trolley
Operations and SANDAG systems engineers to determine if any additional functionality is
desired. If so, then the designer shall incorporate these new requirements into the Contract
Documents.
The Line Extension (LEP) or Capital Improvement Project (CIP) design consultant shall
incorporate interface parameters that define the interface protocol, bit assignments, and IP
addressing standard in conformance with MTS and SANDAG standards and current
practices. The designer shall contact the SANDAG Project Manager to determine if the
Contractor will be required to update the AIMS Software at OCC or if it will be handled under
a separate SANDAG or MTS contract. Regardless, all interface requirements shall be
defined by the LEP or CIP design consultant.
All field elements shall be connected with the OCC over a physical Single Mode Optical Fiber
cable or outdoor rated Category 6 cable, unless otherwise approved in writing by the
SANDAG systems engineer for a site specific application where all hard wire alternatives are
not practical.
6.1.1.2 Vehicle to Wayside Wi-Fi Wireless Local Area Network Communications

Vehicle to Wayside IEEE 802.11 Wi-Fi Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)
communications consisting of equipment fully compatible with the equipment on the existing
system shall be included in the design at stations and along the corridor to provide real time
communications between the vehicle and wayside. This wireless network shall be designed
to use the fiber optic WAN and LAN facilities along the trolley lines as the path of
communications between the OCC and digital wireless radio transceiver units located along
the light rail corridors. See Section 6.19 “Vehicle to Wayside Wi-Fi Wireless local Area
Network Communications” for additional information.
6.1.1.3 Voice Radio Communication System

Currently San Diego Trolley Communicates with light rail vehicle operators over an analog
radio system that is described in Section 6-8, Radio Communications section below.
Prior to the 35 percent submittal the LEP designers shall meet with the SANDAG Project
Manager, the SANDAG systems Engineer, and MTS San Diego Trolley Operations staff to:
a) review existing radio system parameters; b) confirm all new equipment shall be capable of
both Analog and Digital Communications; and c) determine if existing units require upgrading
in order to properly interface with new equipment needed for the expanded radio system
required to provide adequate coverage over the limits of the LEP. The portable radio shall
have sufficient operation channel with effective radio coverage for maintenance personnel
while travel on major freeways or expressways to service equipment at passenger station
and TPSS.
6-4 March 2014

6.1.2 Definitions and Terms
The definitions and terms provided in Section 1, “Definitions and Terms,” of these Special
Provisions, and as specified below, shall apply to all work covered by this section of the
Design Criteria unless otherwise specified in these special provisions.
Aerial Storage Assembly: An arrangement designed for holding excess FOC slack in an
aerial span of FOC. The aerial storage assembly allows the user flexibility in equipment
location and the ability to access the cable slack to break out optical fibers or re-splice cables.
Breakout: The cable “breakout” is produced by 1) removing the jacket just beyond the last
tie-wrap point; 2) exposing 1 to 2 meters of the cable buffers, aramid strength yarn and
central fiberglass strength member; and 3) cutting the aramid yarn, central strength member
and the buffer tubes to expose the individual glass fibers for splicing or connection to the
appropriate device.
Bi-directional Vehicle and Wayside Communications (BVWC): A two-way radio

communication system between vehicle and wayside equipment, commonly known in the
industry as Bi-directional Train to Wayside Communications “Bi-direction TWC”.
Coastal: Areas located within 5 miles of a body of water containing Pacific Ocean salt water.
Connector: A mechanical device used to align and join two fibers together to provide a
means for attaching to and decoupling from a transmitter, receiver, or another fiber (patch
panel).
Connectorized: The termination point of a fiber after connectors have been affixed.
Couplers: Couplers are devises which mate fiber optic connectors to facilitate the transition
of optic light signals from on connector into another. They are normally located within FDFs
mounted in panels. They may also be used unmounted, to join two simplex fiber runs.
Deutsches Institut für Normung (DIN) (in English the German Institute for
Standardization): A Registered German Association headquartered in Berlin that develops
technology standards for Germany.
Device (Network): A machine, mechanism, or electronic equipment used to serve a purpose

and connected to the Local Area Network. Some examples of network devices include:
Ticket Vending Machines, Passenger Card Interface Devices, Variable Message Signs,
Video Surveillance Cameras, Axel Counters, and Programmable Logic Controllers.
European Standards (EN): are documents that have been ratified by one of three European
Standard Organizations: a) the European Committee for Standardization (CEN); b) the
European Committee for Electro technical Standardization (CENELEC); or c) the European
Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI).
6-5 March 2014

Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA): is a trade organization composed as an alliance of

trade associations for electronics manufacturers in the United States. Those associations in
turn govern sectors of EIA standards activity. EIA is accredited by ANSI to help develop
standard on electronic components, consumer electronics, electronic information,
telecommunications, and Internet security.
Fail-safe Principle and Practices: In accordance with the description provided in Part 16 of
the American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA),
Communications & Signals Manual of Recommended Practices.
Fiber Distribution Frame (FDF): A rack mounted system that consists of a standard
equipment rack, fiber routing guides, horizontal jumper troughs and Fiber Distribution Unit
(FDU).
Fiber Distribution Unit (FDU): Is an enclosure or rack –mountable unit containing both a
patch panel with couplers and a splice tray(s).
F/O: Fiber optic.
FOC: Fiber optic cable.
FOIP: Fiber optic inside plant cable.
FOTP: Fiber optic test procedure(s) as defined by EIA/TIA standards.
Headroom (audio): The difference between the nominal signal value and the maximum
undistorted value.
Indications: Defined in Title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations Part 236.749.
Interior: Pertaining to the space within an enclosure or room in a temperature controlled

environment.
Interlocking, Automatic: Defined in Title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations Part

236.750.
Jumper (Patch Cord): A short fiber optic cable that has connectors installed on both ends,
and is typically used for connection within a FDF.
Local Area Network (LAN): The portion of the communications network that includes the
Network Switch at a trolley station, Ethernet cablin, and all field devices communicating thru
it.
Light Source: Portable fiber optic test equipment that, in conjunction with a power meter, is
used to perform end-to-end attenuation testing. It contains a stabilized light source operating
at the designed wavelength of the system under test.
Link: A passive section of the system, the ends of which are to be connected to active
components. A link may include splices and couplers. For example, a video link may be
from a F/O transmitter to a video multiplexer (MUX).
6-6 March 2014

Link Loss Budget: A calculation of the overall permissible attenuation from the fiber optic
transmitter (source) to the fiber optic receiver (detector).
Loose Tube Cable: Type of cable construction in which fibers are placed in filled buffer tubes
to isolate them from outside forces (stress). A flooding compound is applied to the interstitial
cable core to prevent water migration and penetration. This type of cable is primarily for
outdoor applications.
Non-vital: The name given to systems which are not Safety-critical systems and are not
required to be in conformance with the railway signaling systems Fail-safe Principle and
Practices.
Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR): Fiber optic test equipment (similar in
appearance to an oscilloscope) that is used to measure the total amount of power loss
between two points and the corresponding distance. It provides a visual and printed display
of the relative location of system components such as fiber sections, splices and connectors
and the losses that are attributed to each component or defect in the fiber.
Patch Cord (Jumper): A short jumper used to create a communications path typically
connecting a patch panel to a device. Cords are typically either: a) a single mode fiber optic
patch cord with SC or other connector, or b) a Category 6 Ethernet cable with RJ-45
connectors.
Pigtail: Short fiber optic cable that has a connector installed on only one end.
Power Meter: Portable fiber optic test equipment that, in conjunction with a light source, is
used to perform end-to-end attenuation testing. It contains a detector that is sensitive to light
at the designed wavelength of the system under test. Its display indicates the amount of
power injected by the light source that arrives at the receiving end of the link.
Railroad: Defined in Title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations Part 236.787a.
Riser: A vertical run of fiber optic cable in rigid galvanized steel conduit typically firmly
attached to pole or wall faces.
Redundant Network: A network configuration that will reroute information by way of a

predetermined alternative route if the primary information path is determined to be
interrupted.
Safety-critical: Defined in Title 49 of the Code of Federal Regulations Part 236.903.
Segment: A section of FOC that is not connected to any active device and may or may not
have splices per the design.
Splice: The permanent joining of fiber ends to matching fibers.
Splice Closure: Normally installed in a splice vault or in an aerial FOC span is an

environmentally sealed container used to organize and protect splice trays. The container
allows splitting or routing of fiber cables from multiple locations.
6-7 March 2014

Splice Module Housing (SMH): The SMH stores splice trays as well as pigtails and short
cable lengths.
Splice Tray: A container used to organize and protect spliced fibers.
Splice Vault: A splice vault is used to house splice closures.
Splice Module Housing (SMH): The SMH stores splice trays as well as pigtails and short
cable lengths.
Storage Cabinet: Designed for holding excess cable slack for protection. The storage
cabinet allows the user flexibility in equipment location and the ability to pull cable back for re-
splicing.
Vital: The name given to Safety Critical, railroad signaling systems that are designed in
accordance with Fail-safe Principles and Practices so that whenever an equipment failure or
adverse environmental condition affects the specified operation of a system involved with
safety, the system shall revert to a state known to be safe.
Wide Area Network (WAN) (Non-vital): The communication IT network portion of the
communications that connects Central Control network switches and the network switch at
each trolley station.
Wide Area Network (WAN) (Vital): The rail operation network information that connecting
Vital Railroad Signaling System programmable logic controllers (PLCs) together and to the
maintenance-of-way facility.
6.1.3 Environment
Unless otherwise indicated, all communications system material and equipment shall be
capable of being operated and maintained without impairment resulting from the impact
of the environment through the range of worst case values indicated in the table below.
“Exterior” shall be defined as applying to all locations except those that are “interior” or
“tunnel”. “Interior” shall be defined as all locations in a communications room inside a
structure, communications enclosure, or prefabricated communications building.
“Tunnel” shall be defined as locations in underground facilities supporting an
underground light rail vehicle guideway.
6-8 March 2014

Table 6-1. – Environmental Operating Range
Exterior Tunnel Interior

Operating 15°F (-9°C) to 130°F 15°F (-9°C) to 130°F 32°F (0°C) to 95°F
Temperature (54°C). (54°C).* (35°C).*
Relative Humidity 10 to 100 percent 10 to 100 percent 10 to 95 percent
including conditions including conditions
of condensation. of condensation.
Maximum Rainfall 4 inches (10 cm) in 0 inches 0 inches
24 hours, and 1-1/2
inches (4 cm) in one
hour.
Maximum Wind Per latest edition of Per latest edition of Not applicable.
Velocity the California Building the California
Code (CBC) Building Code (CBC)
Vibration (Near All frequencies less All frequencies less All frequencies less
Trackway) than 12 Hz, 0.02 than 12 Hz, 0.02 than 12 Hz, 0.02
inches peak to peak inches peak to peak inches peak to peak
amplitude; all amplitude; all amplitude; all
frequencies from 12 frequencies from 12 frequencies from 12
Hz to 1,000 Hz, 0.14 Hz to 1,000 Hz, 0.14 Hz to 1,000 Hz, 0.14
g peak or 0.19 rms. g peak or 0.19 rms. g peak or 0.19 rms.
Seismic Per latest edition of Per latest edition of Per latest edition of
the California Building the California the California
Code (CBC) Building Code (CBC) Building Code (CBC)
Lightning Isokeraunic level will None None
be five per year.
* The temperature range for Digital Video Recorders and Uninterruptable Power Supplies
(UPS) located within Air Conditioned enclosures or enclosures within a tunnel located below
the earth’s surface shall conform to an operating temperature range of 32 degrees F (0
degrees C) to 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).
Designer shall develop designs that locate communications systems controls in insulated air-
conditioned enclosures with transient voltage surge suppression, temperature and intrusions
sensing and alarms, and at least a 100 amp subpanel, sized to accommodate all current and
future systems plans for the site and will be considered to be an environmentally controlled
environment.
6-9 March 2014

Sizing of environmentally controlled environments shall provide:
• Adequate space in the 19 inch racks for all equipment associated with the ultimate
configuration plus 20 percent spare rack space;
• Electrical provisions for ultimate load plus 20 percent spare capacity;
• Temperature control adequately sized to handle heat generation from all current and
future equipment plus heat from the sun on the hottest day of the year.
Communications systems equipment residing outside of an environmentally controlled

enclosure whenever feasible and practical shall be industrial grade equipment.
Equipment residing in railway signaling enclosures shall conform to the AREMA

Communications and Signaling system standards.
6.1.4 Regulations, Codes, and Standards

All electrical equipment shall conform to the standards of the National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA), the Underwriter’s Laboratories Inc. (UL), the Electrical
Testing Laboratories (ETL), wherever applicable. In addition to the provisions of this Design
Criteria, all materials and workmanship shall conform to the requirements of the California
Electric Code (CEC), herein referred to as the Code; California Code of Regulations (CCR),
Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapter 5, Electrical Safety Orders; Rules for Overhead Electrical Line
Construction, General Order (GO) No. 95 of the California Public Utilities Commission
(CPUC); Standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM); American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) and any local ordinances which may apply.
Wherever reference is made to any of the standards mentioned above, the reference shall be
construed to mean the code, order, or standard that is in effect on the day the Notice to
Contractors for the work is dated.
The following Codes and Standards are referred to by reference in this Design Criteria and
should be utilized and referenced as appropriate to ensure a quality installation when
developing contract plans and Special Provisions for projects:
• American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI);

• American National Standards Institute (ANSI);
• American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA);
• Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA);
• Americans with Disabilities Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG);
• California Building Code (CBC);
• California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC) General Orders (GO);
• Electronic Components Industry Association (ECIA) (maintainers of the EIA
standards);
• Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) standards;
6-10 March 2014

• Federal Communications Commissioning (FCC);

• Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA);
• Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE);
• Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA);
• International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC);
• International Municipal Signal Association (IMSA);
• International Organization for Standardization (ISO);
• International Telecommunication Union (ITU);
• National Electric Code (NEC);
• National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA);
• National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA);
• Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA);
• Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
All Communications Systems shall be constructed in accordance with applicable CPUC and
ADA laws. See CPUC GO and ADAAG section 10 for details.
6.1.5 Industry Standard Practices

Unless otherwise directed by SANDAG, designers shall incorporate industry best practices to
ensure quality and performance industry standards are achieved.
6.1.6 Testing, Commissioning, and Acceptance Requirements

All contract Special Provisions shall include acceptance testing criteria that define tests to be
performed and acceptance criteria that will ensure a quality product. In addition, contract
specifications shall include additional test requirements at factory, on-site following shipment
prior to installation, and post installation to ensure deficiencies are identified at the earliest
time to mitigate potential impacts to the delivery schedule. Contract Special Provisions shall
also described the commissioning process and work to be performed by the Contractor
during the commissioning process.
6.2 Operations Control Center

The Operations Control Center (OCC) facility is comprised of: a) Operations Control Center –
Controllers and Security Control Room, b) OCC Communications Room, c) OCC Mechanical
Room, d) the OCC Electrical Room containing (UPS and Fire Life Safety Systems), and e)
exterior HVAC condenser and power generation units.
6.2.1 Operations Control Center - Centralized Train Control

Within the OCC Controllers manage the dispatching and operations of the trolley system. On
wall mounted displays the entire territory of the light rail system is displayed. The AIMs
Centralized Train Control (CTC) system, developed by MTS OCC systems integrator (Arinc),
6-11 March 2014

is a fully integrated Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system that enables
Controllers to obtain real time status information and interface with or control all of the
following field systems:
• Signaling System: Indication Status, Track Circuit Status, Established Route Status,
Canceling of Established Routes, Submission of Route Requests, and other related
functions;
• Traction Power System: Line Voltage Status, Direct Current (DC) Breaker Control
and Status (open/closed), 12 kV AC Breaker Control and Status (open/closed);
Transfer Trip Status and DC Breaker Control; and other related functions;
• Public Address (PA): Control of Announcements at Stations (live, canned, etc.) from
the OCC via the communication back bone;
• Visual Message Signs (VMS): Control of digital Visual Message Signs displays to
display: special announcements; full automated destination and next train messaging
information; and other related functions;
• Fire detection alarm, indication and control signals;
• Tunnel ventilation alarm, indication and control signals;
• Intrusion and temperature alarms; and
• Fare Collections.
Within the OCC security personnel are able to access real time live streaming video from
video surveillance cameras located at stations throughout the trolley system. This fully
integrated video surveillance system enables any system operator to view any camera at any
and every trolley station.
The SCADA LAN at OCC shall communicate with the PLC at stations and TPSSs to monitor
field’s devices from the OCC consoles.
Within the OCC Line Supervisors and security personnel shall be able to communicate with
supervisors, vehicle operators, security guards, and maintenance of way personnel via the
Radio Communications System (RCS).
6.2.2 Evaluation of OCC Facility Modifications Required to Support Territorial Expansion

Line segment system designers of the light rail territorial expansion project shall evaluate all
existing OCC facilities and develop recommendations on upgrades or substantive overhaul to
the existing facility required to accommodate the new territory of the expanded light rail
system. These recommendations shall be submitted in draft form to the SANDAG Project
Manager, SANDAG System Engineer, SANDAG Director of Rail, MTS Systems Engineer,
SDTI Director of Operations, and the MTS Chief Technology Officer for review and comment
before being finalized. All review comments shall be reviewed and discussed at a review
meeting with the designer and all of the parties listed above invited to attend.
Designers of new territory, new line segments or line extension projects, shall analyze every
part the existing OCC facility described above and make recommendations of additional
enhancements or substantive overhaul to the OCC in order to provide a fully integrated CTC,
6-12 March 2014

video surveillance, and RCS system with full functionality and complete coverage of the new
territory. These enhancements or substantive overhaul recommendations shall review all
operational, functional, interface, and spatial needs required to fully integrate the new territory
into the existing OCC facility.
The evaluation of the existing OCC facility shall be a comprehensive review of the complete
facility, including Line Supervisor and security workstation adequacy to support the new
territory.
The evaluation shall review life expectancy, capacity adequacy, efficiency, expandability, and
potential regulatory compliance issues with the existing systems and facilities.
If the existing OCC communication systems (WAN, LAN, CTC and RCS network servers,
displays, microphones, control workstations, RCS radio equipment, rack space, etc.),
electrical UPS, fire alarm and suppression, and mechanical equipment is: a) no longer being
manufactured; b) does not comply with to the latest regulatory requirements and more
restrictive standards; or c) will be over 10 years old by the time the line extension or new line
is planned to being revenue service, then the designer shall recommend a substantive
overhaul to the existing system. The designer shall identify all components requiring
overhaul and prepare a scope of work with cost estimate for the work required to
substantively overhaul the existing communication system.
If it is determined that existing system only needs to be enhanced such as increase capacity
to accommodate the new extension line with additional links, then the designer shall develop
and submit recommendations with cost estimates to the project manager detailing ways to
link the project area to the SANDAG project manager and SANDAG systems engineer for
approval. The designer shall include in the design of the system the new communication
links required.
The designer shall also make recommendations regarding technological changes that should
be considered that would improve the system and ensure the system remains compliant with
current industry standards and requirements.
Build-Out expanded coverage shall be part of the light rail system expansion planning. To do
this expansion planning of each system shall be performed for each of the control systems:
WAN, LAN, RCS, Video Surveillance, fully integrated CTC (including Railway Signaling
System, PA and VMS system interfaces). The expansion planning shall identify additional
equipment needs and associated rack space required.
OCC spatial equipment needs shall review existing conditions and provide revised equipment
rack layouts. Analysis of the OCC needs shall be performed in conjunction with other OCC
system upgrades required to accommodate the new light rail territory and other planned
enhancements to the OCC, including but not limited to Centralized Train Control (CTC),
VMS, PA, and Video Surveillance systems enhancements.
If the existing racks in the OCC communications room do not have sufficient space to
accommodate the new equipment and/or there is not sufficient space for additional
workstations required to operate the new territory, then the designer shall review the existing
OCC facility and develop recommendations on how to expand the existing facility to
6-13 March 2014

accommodate the new equipment and work-stations. The OCC facility expansion planning
shall review the adequacy of all electrical, mechanical, fire life safety, communications, and
control rooms and make recommendations and prepare cost estimates of the changes to the
OCC required to support the expanded light rail system territory.
The planning effort shall provide a site plan of the expanded OCC facility with dimensional
information of all equipment rooms in the expanded OCC facility and rack layouts of all new
systems equipment required to upgrade the OCC to fully integrate the new territory.
6.2.3 Design Development of OCC Facility Modifications Required to Support Territorial Expansion
Line Segment Designers shall prepare OCC Facility Modification Contract plans,
specifications, and estimates to incorporate all facility modifications required to support the
light rail territorial expansion in accordance with the direction provided by SANDAG and MTS
staff.
6.3 Station Communications Enclosures, Buildings, and Rooms

6.3.1 General
Every Station shall include a Communications Cabinet, Prefabricated Communication
Building, or Communications Room in accordance with the requirements of this section.
Additional communications enclosures shall be added at additional locations when directed
by SANDAG.
Station communications equipment shall be located inside a communications cabinet,

building, or room and will consist of WAN and LAN switches, routers, power strips, power
supplies, fiber optic distribution panels, and copper/fiber cabling; public address equipment,
video surveillance equipment, and other SCADA systems equipment.
When designs specify new equipment to be installed in new equipment racks in

communications equipment rooms, the equipment and all cross-connect panels shall be of
modular design and required to be preassembled and wired to the greatest extent possible to
limit the amount of on-site wiring and testing, whenever it is practical for the work to be
implemented using this approach.
6.3.1.1 Grounding and Surge Suppression

Communications cabinets, buildings and rooms shall be provided with surge suppression on
the AC power distribution system as specified in Section 6-14 “Surge Suppression”.
6.3.1.2 Programmable Logic Controller

Communications cabinets, buildings or rooms shall be provided with a rack mounted
programmable logic controller (PLC) unless directed otherwise by SANDAG. The PLC shall
be a GE RX3i controller or approved equivalent and shall be programmed with software that
is consistent with that utilized at other locations on the system. The PLC is to provide input
and outputs for control and monitoring of Station equipment. Refer to the SANDAG Standard
Plans for Typical PLC Wiring Diagram.
6-14 March 2014

The PLC shall include a PLC Accessory Enclosure that houses a 24 VDC power supply,
terminal blocks, and the UPS Dry Contact I/O Accessory. The PLC Accessory Enclosure is
to be mounted on the plywood backboard.
Provide devices, raceways and wiring for a complete operating system. Sensors shall be
wired to the PLC Accessory Enclosure and provides inputs and outputs to the PLC
input/output (I/O) ports.
The CTC vender will furnish software upgrades to the OCC and provide software for load into
the RX3i PLC. The RX3i installation contractor shall be responsible for loading the SANDAG
furnished software into the PLC.
The designer shall provide a PLC coordination document identifying the system interfaces
and functional requirements at each communications enclosure location (e.g.
communications cabinet, communications building, or room). Report shall include all
pertinent information required for the SANDAG AIMs system integrator to develop functional
software both at the Operations Control Center and for download into the PLC at the station
including, but not limited to: IP addressing, sensor input and output descriptions (type, circuit
configuration exhibit, port designations), and a functional description of the response to each
change of sensory input (i.e. alarm, alarm prevention, shut down response, etc.). As part of
the coordination report the designer shall provide a cost estimate for the software
development effort. The coordination report will be used to assist SANDAG with
development the scope of work for the AIM system software integrator.
6.3.1.3 Locating Communications Cabinets or Buildings

Communications enclosures shall be located either at the far end of the station as determined
by the normal movement of trolleys on the nearest track, unless the SANDAG Systems
Engineer determines there a site specific constraint that requires it to be place otherwise. For
the purposes of this section the normal movement shall be defined as right hand running.
When facing the track, the Communications enclosure shall be at the right hand end of the
station platform. The preferred position of the Communications enclosure is with the long
side oriented parallel with the tracks and the back face of the enclosure even with the back
edge of platform. If located at the platform, the minimum communications enclosure off set
from the centerline of the nearest track shall not be less than 15 feet to nearest face of the
communications enclosure, unless site specific constraints exist and a deviation is granted by
the Director of Rail. The goal is to minimize obstructions to the line of sight of light rail vehicle
operators traveling along the trackway and pedestrians preparing to cross the tracks at the
crosswalks at the stations. Communications enclosures shall be set a minimum of 5 feet
from face of curb of a parking lot or other vehicular area. If the 5 feet minimum offset is
unable to be accommodated, then “Barriers” shall be added and conform to the requirements
described in Section 604.1A of the SDG&E Service Standards & Guide.
6.3.1.4 Communications Cabinet, Building and Room Foundations

Foundation designers shall utilize available geotechnical testing data and structural
engineering analysis to develop foundation designs that are suitable to support the
communications enclosure in accordance with California Building Code requirements.
6-15 March 2014

If any of the enclosures are required on elevated structures, provisions shall be incorporated
into the design of the elevated structures to ensure the cabinets are accessible and include
necessary details for mounting them on the structure.
6.3.2 Communications Cabinet, Building and Room at Standard Stations

Unless unique site specific needs require additional non-standard equipment at a standard
non-enclosed station with up to two platforms, then station shall have either: a) Three Bay
Communications Enclosure, b) Prefabricated Communications Building, or c)
Communications Room meeting the requirements described below.
6.3.2.1 Communications Cabinet - Three Bay Communications Enclosure

The Three Bay Communications Enclosure shall conform to the following:
• Enclosure Construction
Each enclosure shall be equivalent to the existing cabinets on the light rail system.
Each shall have the equipment layout in the 19 inch racks and plywood back panel in
the same configuration that is used at existing station locations, unless otherwise
approved for each specific site.
Each enclosure shall be a rainproof cabinet with dimensions as shown on the plans. The
cabinet top shall be slanted to the rear to prevent standing water.
Each three bay communications enclosure shall be 108 inches in length, 72 inches tall,
and 36 inches deep manufactured of AISI 316 Stainless Steel Sheet in accordance with
Section 86-3.04 A “Cabinet Construction” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications, except
as otherwise specified herein.
Enclosures shall be constructed of 14-gauge stainless steel in conformance with Section

86-3.04A, “Cabinet Construction” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications, except as
otherwise specified here in. If the Contractor would prefer to use an alternative equivalent
AWS welding method to weld the communication cabinets, then the Contractor shall
submit the equivalent welding method to the Engineer in writing for approval. In order to
be considered to be an equivalent process the alternative AWS welding methods shall: a)
conform to an American Welding Society (AWS) standard process, b) result in a quality
weld, and c) shall result in a weld that will not rust. The Engineer shall be the sole judge
as to the quality and suitability of the alternative welding method, and the Engineer’s
decision shall be final.
All hardware, including locks and fasteners, shall be of AISI 316 stainless steel, designed
for a coastal salt-fog environment. Environmental protection shall meet the requirements
for Type 4X enclosures in the NEMA Enclosure Standards. Door locks shall be able to
be locked with a pad lock.
Exterior welds shall be ground smooth. Edges shall be filed to a radius of 0.03 inches
minimum.
All enclosures shall be designed and installed with brackets and bolt downs to the
reinforced concrete slab to support the equipment racks, air conditioning, electrical load
6-16 March 2014

center, surge suppression assembly and comply with the site’s seismic design
requirements in the California Building Code and as shown on the plans.
All new enclosures shall be insulated with an R value of 4.
Each three bay communications enclosure shall have three equipment bays (center and
a bay on either side). The center bay shall have a swing out 19-inch rack with at least 33
useable rack units of space. Each of the other bays shall have 19-inch four post free
standing racks conforming to the site’s seismic design requirements in the California
Building Code and the requirements described in Telcordia Technologies Generic
Requirements (GR) GR-63. All of the racks shall be tapped with standard 12-24 holes
spaced in accordance with CEA-310-E (EIA-310-D) standard. Threading shall conform
to the ANSI B1.1, Unified Course Thread (UNC) standard.
Cabinet shall provide space on the back board for up to 200 feet of coiled FOC for each
run terminating in the cabinet.
Cabinet shall have fiber-optic cable entry and shall be supplied with standard cable
storage brackets or a reel with a minimum radius of 15 times the FOC diameter for
storage.
• Enclosure Air Conditioning System

Each communications cabinet shall have an Air Conditioning (AC) Unit (McLean T-50
series or approved equivalent), mounted on the side of it that conforms to the following
and consistent to those used on the existing system:
– Designer shall determine and develop technical specifications based on calculation of

the AC unit based on anticipated environmental and equipment heat generation
values;
– Thermostat setting shall not be higher than 85 degrees;
– Mount to cabinet shall have a rubber gasket to create leak-proof seal between heat
exchanger and communications cabinet;
– Have a 316 Stainless Steel enclosure Underwriters Laboratories, UL 50, NEMA4 or
greater rating for outdoor environments;
– Utilize CFC- Free Refrigerant;
– Suppress electromagnetic interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI);
– Designer shall specify an electrical voltage and electromagnetic wave length (in hertz)
ratings that are compatible with and enable the unit to utilize power from the existing
electrical service at each station without transformation thru other devises. The
Designer shall contact the Utility Company via the SANDAG utility coordinator and
conduct a field survey to determine proper sizing prior to developing the specification
for the enclosure electrical subpanel and Air Conditioning System. Whenever
possible, the Designer shall specify the AC unit with the highest voltage rating
available from the cabinet’s electrical load center. In most cases, the new air
conditioner unit should have a voltage rating of 200 volts or higher. Current flow shall
not exceed 25 amps when operated at ambient temperature of 130º F;
6-17 March 2014

– Be constructed of materials that protect against internal and external corrosion in

salty, wet environments;
– Temperature Control Thermostat enabling the maximum and minimum internal
cabinet temperature to be set within the range of 50 to 99 degrees F minimum. (The
range may be greater than the range specified. Thermostat must prevent over
cooling and provide for energy efficient operation. The thermostat is typically present
at about 85 degrees F and cools about 10 degrees F before turning off);
– Utilize tamper resistant hardware. All exterior hardware shall be made of stainless
steel.
• Enclosure Electrical System

Each enclosure shall include an electrical distribution system conforming to the
requirements specified herein. Cabinet wiring shall conform to the requirements of
Section 86-3.04C, “Cabinet Wiring” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications, unless
otherwise specified herein. Equipment shall be labeled in conformance with 86-3.04D(1)
“Labels” of the Standard Specifications.
Enclosures shall provide California Electrical Code (CEC) – compliant AC power

distribution system.
• Receptacles
Each enclosure shall contain a minimum of 6 receptacles, two per bay. Each receptacle
shall be a duplex, 3-prong, NEMA Type 5-15R grounding type outlet and shall conform to
the requirements in UL Standard 943. Each receptacle circuit shall be protected by the
surge suppression system.
• Light Fixture
Each bay shall include door-activated fluorescent overhead lighting.
• Surge Suppression
Every communications 3 Bay Communications Cabinet shall be equipped with Surge
Suppression conforming to the requirements specified in Section 6.3.1.1 “Grounding and
Surge Suppression” of this Design Criteria.
• Circuit Breakers and Panelboard

Enclosure compartment shall include utility AC power load center that includes 125 amps
panelboard, with 125 amps main breaker and circuit breakers as shown on the plans. All
circuit breakers shall conform to the provisions for circuit breakers in Caltrans Standard
Specification Section 86-2.11, “Service”, except that circuit breakers shall have a
minimum interrupting capacity equal to or greater than the available fault current, and as
otherwise modified herein. The Plans shall identify the required AIC rating for circuit
breakers. Typically, a 42 kAIC is available at the service from SDG&E and shall be
verified by the designer. A short circuit current analysis shall be done to determine the
appropriate rating.
6-18 March 2014

Circuit breakers shall be of an appropriate ampacity and contain the number of poles
required for the connected loads. Circuit breaker to be used in new service panels and
subpanels shall be molded case, quick-make quick-break bolt-on type, with thermal-
magnetic type overload trip.
Circuit breakers to be used to modify existing panels shall be of a type similar to the
existing breakers and match existing ratings.
• Bonding and Grounding

The enclosures shall include a grounding bar solidly connected to earth by connection to
the communication grounding grid and the Station’s grounding electrode system as
shown on the Plans to tie all metal structures to a common earth ground with suitable
conductors. All metal doors, panels and racks shall be bonded with grounding straps.
No hinged or unlisted bolted connections will be considered a suitable path to ground.
Bonding and Grounding shall conform to the provisions in Section 86-2.10, “Bonding and
Grounding,” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications, the California Electric Code, and
Section 6.3.1.1 1 “Grounding and Surge Suppression” of this Design Criteria. All
enclosures and meter pedestals installed by the Contractor shall be grounded in
conformance with the CEC requirements.
• Uninterruptable Power Supply

Every Communications Cabinet shall be equipped with an Uninterruptable Power Supply
conforming to the requirements specified in Section 6.15 “Uninterruptable Power Supply”
of this Design Criteria.
• Enclosure Intruder and Over-temperature Sensor System

The enclosure shall include a programmable logic controller conforming to the
requirements specified in Section 6.3.1.2 “Programmable Logic Controller” of this Design
Criteria with sensors to monitor intrusion, and high and shut down temperature
thresholds.
Intrusion alarm device shall issue a notification once the door is opened by non-
authorized personnel. Determination of an intruder versus authorized personnel may be
determined by door limit switch, one on each door, and an operated by-pass switch
mounted inside each section or entrance.
A high temperature alarm shall be sent to control when the internal temperature inside
the enclosure reaches 90 degrees F. The system shall begin to shut down UPS and Digit
recorders when the temperature reaches about 95 degrees F.
• Rack Mounted Equipment

Generally, all equipment and fiber optic and Category 6 termination panels, except surge
suppression equipment, shall be installed in the equipment racks and the layout of the
equipment should be consistent with equipment layouts used on the SANDAG Standard
Plans.
6-19 March 2014

• Backboard Mounted Equipment

All telephone service, public address, and TWC cable termination equipment and
hardware, cable storage supports, PLC Accessory Enclosure, receptacles, and surge
suppression equipment shall be mounted to the plywood backboard.
As new systems are added that provide enhanced or new capabilities these systems may
require additional devices and equipment to be mounted to the backboard. To the
greatest extent possible equipment should be mounted in the 19 inch racks, not on the
backboard.
6.3.2.2 Communications Enclosure - Prefabricated Communications Building

The Prefabricated Communications Building shall conform to the following requirements.
• Description
The Prefabricated Communications Building shall be a transportable, bullet resistant,
vandal resistant concrete equipment shelter capable of being shipped on a lowboy truck
and placed utilizing a crane at each station site.
Each communications building shall set on a cast-in-place foundation will all necessary
raceways entering through the foundation, through openings in the floor of the precast
building, and stubbing up against the concrete wall.
Each communications building shall come complete with an electrical, surge suppression,
and air condition systems described below.
The designer shall design the communications building for the explicit use of housing
electronic equipment, fiber-optics equipment, measuring devices and other related
components, within a controlled atmosphere required for the proper operating conditions
for the equipment.
Except for sites with unique conditions, the designer shall incorporate SANDAG’s
standard prefabricated communications building plans and special provisions into the
contract documents. The contract special provisions shall include complete material,
equipment, installation specifications in the special provisions for all work required. The
special provisions should be consistent with those used on past projects. The contract
plans shall include the standard building floor plan, rack layouts, ceiling plan showing
cable ladder, and elevations. The designer shall develop of modify electrical subpanel
schedules, as needed, and shall include them in the contract plan set for each station.
At sites where unique conditions exist or additional equipment may need to be

accommodated the standard prefabricated communications building shall be altered and
the designer shall at a minimum submit the following design plans to the SANDAG and
MTS systems engineers for review and approval:
– Floor plan showing: a) a minimum of 3 feet wide aisles in front of racks and plywood
backboard; b) 3 feet wide aisle behind rack where feasible; c) sub panel(s) with
minimum required NEC access clearances shown; d) 0.75-inch plywood with 1 foot of
6-20 March 2014

space in front for equipment (not in aisle); e)) transformer dimensions if required and
located in communications room; and f) air conditioning unit(s) dimensions if located
in communications room;
– Rack layouts showing equipment arrangements in each rack that are similar to the
standard arrangements but in sufficient quantity to support the functionality of the
station facility and includes a minimum of 20 percent empty spare rack space
dedicated for future equipment expansion (all equipment shall be spaced with a
minimum of 1 U in between to provide for adequate equipment ventilation and cable
management);
– Cable ladder system hung from the ceiling over racks and plywood back board and
connect to conduit penetrations;
– Electrical Subpanel Schedule(s) showing all connected loads with descriptions listing
load assumptions;
– Air Conditioning Sizing Calculations in BTUs that accounts for: solar heat generation,
equipment heat generation, and volume of air space.
• Enclosure Finish and Capabilities

The pre-assembled precast shelter shall be manufactured inside an enclosed plant
building in a controlled environment. Unless otherwise determined by the project team,
shelter shall have a desert tan exposed aggregate finish.
• Enclosure Size
The outside finish walls of the precast enclosure shall be a minimum of 11 feet 8 inches
wide by 21 feet 8 inches long and 10 feet 1 inch tall.
• Operating Environment
The enclosure shall comply with the specified environmental operating ranges identified
in Section 6.1.3 “Environmental”. Additionally, the enclosure shall be sealed to resist dust
infiltration and be watertight.
Unless otherwise directed, the cooling and insulation systems shall be properly sized to
maintain a temperature in the range of 75 to 85 degrees Fahrenheit. The design shall
account for heat entering from outside the room, equipment operating heat output
specified by the equipment manufacturer or estimated by the designer and shall not be
less than the minimum Air Conditioning System and insulation values identified.
Enclosure shall be designed for the following:
– Floor – Shelter shall be designed to ASCE 7-88 Uniform Distributed Load of 250 psf.
– Roof – Shelter shall be designed ASCE 7-88 Uniform Distributed Load of 65 psf.
– Wind – Shelter shall be designed to ASCE 7-88 Basic Wind Speed Specifications of
115 MPH exposure C.
– Earthquake - Shelter shall be designed for ASCE 7-05 Seismic Design Category E.
6-21 March 2014

– Durability - Shelter shall withstand 30-06 rifle fire at 15 feet distance per UL 752,
Level 4 standard.
– Manufacturer shall submit a Quality Control Program for review. The Quality Control
supervision shall be independent of manufacturing.
• Submittals
The designer shall require the contractor to submit the following:
– Detailed engineering and drawings provided for all features described in this section;
– Structural drawings stamped by a professional engineer registered in the State of
California;
– Shop Drawings, detailed and dimensioned to indicate compliance with the Contract
Drawings, these Specifications and field conditions, including the following items:
– Shelter manufacturer shall submit detailed drawing showing the concrete pad to
support the shelter, with concrete pours, rebar layout and anchoring of the shelter to
the pad;
– Shelter manufacturer shall submit a Quality Control Program for review. The Quality
Control supervision shall be independent of manufacturing;
– Shelter manufacturer shall submit detailed conduit layout plan showing stub-up
locations into the shelter;
– Manufacturer's literature and product data including: specifications, installation, and
maintenance instructions and recommended practices; and
– Schedule delivery of Precast Concrete Equipment Shelter when slab, on which
Precast Concrete Equipment Shelter will be permanently placed, is ready.
• Concrete Specifications
Compressive strength shall be 4000 PSI at 28 days.
Mix design shall be 114-118 pound per cubic feet structural lightweight concrete using
expanded shale or expanded clay aggregate. Mix shall be homogeneous. Seeding of
aggregates for exposed aggregate finish is not allowed.
Cement used in concrete shall be standard Portland cement conforming to the

requirements of the "Standard Specifications for Portland Cement,” ASTM C150.
Concrete aggregates shall conform to one of the following specifications:
– ASTM C33;
– ASTM C330.
Water shall be free from injurious quantities of oil, alkali, vegetable matter and salt. Non-
potable water shall not be used in mixing concrete.
6-22 March 2014

Reinforcement bars shall be deformed steel bars conforming to the requirements of

ASTM A615.
Welded smooth wire fabric shall be steel wire fabric conforming to the requirements of
ASTM A185.
Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to prior approval by the quality control
supervisor and shall be shown capable of maintaining essentially the same composition
and performance throughout the work as the product used in establishing the concrete
proportions in the mix design.
Air-entraining admixtures - conform to ASTM C260
Water reducing admixtures, retarding admixtures, accelerating admixtures, and water

reducing and accelerating admixtures shall conform to ASTM C494.
Fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures shall conform to ASTM C618.
Compressive strength – 4,000 psi at 28 days.
Mix Design – 114 to 118 lb/ft3 structural lightweight concrete using expanded shale or
expanded clay aggregate. Mix shall be homogeneous. Do not seed exposed
aggregates for exposed finishes.
• Sealing
– Joints - Sealed with a compressible, resilient sealant. There shall be no exposed roof
to wall or wall to floor joints.
– Exterior walls - Seal with two coats of a water-based ultraviolet (UV) light resistant
semi-gloss acrylic concrete sealer (Thoroglaze H Sealer or approved equivalent) in
strict conformance with manufacturer's instructions.
– Roof – Seal with two coats of white elastomeric coating.
• Door
– Frame – 16-gauge galvanized steel, primed, painted, and cast into the wall panel.
– Door – 3 feet by 7 feet by 1-3/4 inches 18-gauge galvanized steel, insulated, primed,
painted brown and installed flush with door check, door stop, weather stripping,
mortise lockset with changeable core, stainless steel ball bearing hinges and bullet
resistant.
• Telephone Service Provisions

The designer shall show the installation of a conduit sized to phone company standards
to be installed from designated phone company facility connection point to a point inside
the enclosure in front of the plywood back board and be located within 3 feet (measured
horizontally) of a wall mounted duplex outlet.
6-23 March 2014

• Electrical
Electrical installation and wiring shall conform to the latest edition of the California
Electrical Code and shall consist of the following as a minimum:
– Have electrical voltage and electromagnetic wave length (in Hertz) ratings that are
compatible with and enable the unit to utilize power from the existing electrical service
at each station without transformation thru other devises. The Designer shall conduct
a field survey to determine proper sizing prior to designing the enclosure and station
electrical service;
Designer shall contact the Utility Company and conduct a field survey to determine
proper sizing prior to developing the specification for the enclosure electrical subpanel
and Air Conditioning System. Whenever possible, the Designer shall specify the AC
unit with the highest voltage rating that matches the utility voltage available at the
station site. In most cases, the new heat exchanger unit should have a voltage rating
of 200 volts or higher;
– Entrance Conduit – Underground entrance conduit shall be Schedule 40 polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) conduit;
– Interior Conduit - Interior Conduit shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) approved,
surface mounted galvanized rigid steel (GRS) or electrical metallic tubing (EMT)
conduit firmly mounted to the exterior surface using galvanized steel Unistrut
connectors or an approved equivalent;
– Exterior Conduit – Exterior Conduit shall be UL approved, surface mounted
galvanized rigid steel (GRS) conduit firmly mounted to the exterior surface using
galvanized steel Unistrut connectors or an approved equivalent;
– Panelboard – The communications enclosure shall have an electrical subpanel with a
current rating of at least 125 amps and a voltage that is based on available utility
power in the area of the station. The subpanel shall be prewired for fluorescent
lighting fixtures, wall switch, duplex outlets, and air conditioning units. The subpanel
shall be fed from the Station’s electrical service panel and shall include at a minimum
12 single pole 20 amps breakers, one 30 amps double pole for the UPS, and
additional breakers for the prefabricated buildings’ loads;
– Power wiring - Not smaller than No. 12, and enclosed in conduit. Fittings, wiring
devices, and fixtures - UL-approved, and ready for site connection;
– Lighting – Shelter shall include a minimum of four fluorescent (two bulb) lighting
fixtures (120 VAC) controlled by a light switch. Enclosure shall include an additional
indoor light switch to control one outside lighting fixture (with built in photo cell unit)
over the door’s entrance. The fluorescent fixtures, outdoor fixture and light switch and
raceway shall be firmly mounted to the structure and include all wiring between the
fixtures, light switches, and panel;
6-24 March 2014

– A minimum of two of the light fixtures, one closest to the door and the other at the
opposite end shall be dedicated emergency light fixtures. The fixtures shall be
provided with battery backup;
– Enclosure shall include illuminated exit light fixture over the door entrance, mounted
to a surface mounted junction box. Provide raceway and wiring to the enclosure
panel;
– Enclosure shall include at least fourteen grounded duplex-grounded outlets (two per
wall (one every 4 feet on the walls) and two over each 19 inch rack). Enclosure shall
include raceway and wiring from the receptacles in a junction box to the Enclosure
panel. There shall be two receptacle wall circuits, consisting of four receptacles to
each circuit. Each outlet over each rack shall be on a separate circuit;
– Enclosure shall include conduit and wiring from: a) the Air Conditioning (AC) Unit to
the enclosure sub-panel; b) AC Unit to the thermostat control; and c) from the
temperature probe to the programmable logic controller (PLC);
– Design shall include monitoring of three phase utility services, raceways and wiring
from the 3 phase power source to the phase loss relay, and monitoring wiring from
the phase loss relay to the programmable logic controller (PLC);
Every communications building shall be equipped with Surge Suppression conforming to
the requirements specified in Section 6.3.1.1 “Grounding and Surge Suppression” of this
Design Criteria.

The building shall include a ground grid, an internal halo grounding system and grounding
bar solidly grounded to earth by connection to the communication grounding grid and the
Station’s grounding Electrode System, mounted on standoff insulators as shown on the
plans, to tie all metal structures to a common earth ground with suitable conductors. All
metal doors, panels, and racks shall be bonded with grounding straps. No hinged or
unlisted bolted connections will be considered a suitable path to ground.
Bonding and Grounding shall conform to the provisions in Section 86-2.10, “Bonding and
Grounding,” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications, the California Electric Code, and
Section 6.3.1.1 “Grounding and Surge Suppression” of this Design Criteria. All
conformance with the CBC requirements.

Every communications building shall be equipped with an Uninterruptable Power Supply
conforming to the requirements specified in Section 6-15 “Uninterruptable Power Supply”
6-25 March 2014

• Precast Enclosure Fabrication Requirements

Structural design and manufacturing of precast enclosure shall conform to requirements
of ACI 318-89.
• Floor Section
Surfaces of floors shall be smooth. Cover the interior surface with vinyl composition tile
with rubber base molding, bonded with a waterproof contact adhesive.
• Roof
Roof shall be constructed of concrete with one percent drainage slope and completely
covered with two coast of white elastomeric coating on the exterior face.
R11 ceiling insulation and finish to be foam-board insulation with 3/8 inches vinyl coated
board. Install a plastic joint or corner trim at panel joints.
Roof section shall provide a 2-inch overhang on all sides. The roof will be a hip type
sloping 4 directions. It shall be a cap and fit over the walls, leaving no exposed roof to
wall joint.
• Wall
Each wall shall be 4 inches (102 mm) thick solid concrete, cast in one piece to minimize
joints, with an exterior exposed aggregate finish.
R-11 wall insulation covered with 0.5 inches thick panel, surfaced with 0.03-inches
fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP). Plastic joint or corner trim shall be installed at all panel
joints.
Floor/wall intersection shall be finished with 4-inches vinyl baseboard.
The walls shall overhang the floor a minimum of 7-inches from the top floor surface.
There shall be no exposed wall to floor joint.
Thermal Insulation - Standard wall and ceiling thickness shall be covered with R-11 1-
inch (25 mm) thick foam board insulation.
8 feet by 4 feet by 0.75 inches thick marine grade plywood securely fastened to wall with
bolts over communications conduit entrances.
• Lifting Attachments
Building shall have cast in permanent lifting attachment points so that additional parts or
bolt-on devices are not required for lifting the building.
• Walkway
Provide a concrete walkway completely around building. Slope walkway away from the
structure.
6-26 March 2014

• Stairs
Provide a concrete stairway leading to the building’s doorway.

Each communications enclosure shall have an Air Conditioning (AC) Unit, mounted on
the side of it that shall be sized by the designer. Designer shall determine and develop
technical specifications of the AC unit based on calculation of anticipated environmental
and equipment heat generation values. The A/C units shall be generally consistent to
those used on the existing system and conform to the following:
– Thermostat setting shall be no higher than 85 degrees;

– Shall have two AC units with penetrations to vent and cool the enclosure;
– Mount to enclosure shall have a rubber gasket or equivalent seal to create leak-proof
seal between heat exchanger and communications enclosure;
– Have a 316 Stainless Steel enclosure Underwriters Laboratories, UL 50, NEMA 3R or
greater rating for outdoor environments;
– Utilize CFC- Free Refrigerant;
– Suppress electromagnetic interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI);
– Whenever possible, the designer shall size the AC units with the highest voltage
rating possible. In most cases, the new heat exchanger unit should have a voltage
rating of 200 volts or higher;
– Be constructed of materials that protect against internal and external corrosion in
salty, wet environments;
– Temperature Control Thermostat enabling the maximum and minimum internal
cabinet temperature to be set within the range of 50 to 99º F minimum. The range
may be greater than the range specified. Thermostat must prevent over cooling and
provide for energy efficient operation;
– Utilize tamper resistant hardware. All exterior hardware shall be made of stainless
steel.
• Communications Racks
Each enclosure shall be furnished with three (3) 19 inch four post free standing racks with
12-24 threaded standard holes spaced in conformance with CEA-310-E (EIA-310-D) and
conforming to the site’s seismic design requirements in the California Building Code and
the requirements described in Telcordia Technologies Generic Requirements (GR) GR-
63. Threading shall conform to the ANSI B1.1, Unified Course Thread (UNC) standard.
• Communications Raceway
Each enclosure shall be furnished with a complete continuous cable ladder system from
the communications conduits entrance at the base of the sidewall, up the wall, and
across the ceiling both along the front and along the back of the three 4 post 19 inch
racks in accordance with the latest NEMA Standards Publication VE2. Wall mounted
6-27 March 2014

ladder system shall be comprised of approximately 8 lineal feet of 18 inch wide aluminum
cable tray. Ceiling mounted ladder system shall be comprised of approximately 86 lineal
feet of 12 inches wide aluminum cable tray (open ladder type) with 6 inches rungs.
• Enclosure Sensoring System

Building shall include a programmable logic controller conforming to the requirements
specified in Section 6.3.1.2 “Programmable Logic Controller” of this Design Criteria, and
an alarm controller with sensors to monitor intrusion, smoke, power failure, and high and
shut down temperature thresholds. Intrusion alarm device shall issue a notification once
the door is opened by non-authorized personnel. Determination of an intruder versus
authorized personnel may be determine by either an electronic card reader access lock
or a door limit switch and key operated by-pass switch mounted outside the building on
the wall. Provide devices, raceways and wiring for a complete operating system back to
a junction box. The two smoke detector alarms shall be mounted on opposite ends of the
building. The detectors shall be mounted on their own individual surface mounted
junction boxes. Sensors shall provide inputs and outputs to the PLC input/output (I/O)
ports.
For enclosures powered by 3 phase services a phase loss relay shall be installed to
monitor voltage powering the building. The relay shall be provided with two form “C”
contacts and mounted into a NEMA 1 enclosure. Alarm indications of the phase loss
relay shall be inputted into the PLC.

equipment should be consistent with equipment layouts used on the existing system.

hardware, cable storage supports, and surge suppression equipment shall be mounted to
the plywood backboard.
• Field Quality Control and Testing

Designer shall specify system performance and functional testing requirements to ensure
that each completed Precast Concrete Equipment Building is tested to ensure operability
of all electrical and communications systems, lamps, and air conditioning units in
accordance with manufacturers’ printed instructions.
6.3.2.3 Communications Room

Communications Rooms may be used in Underground or Aerial Stations, Parking Structures,
Buildings, and Transit Centers where space is limited or locating a standard enclosure is
challenging do to site specific constraints or visibility concerns.
Communications Room shall be designed in accordance with applicable Uniform Building

Code (UBC), National Electric Code (NEC), Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
6-28 March 2014

(IEEE), American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), and National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA) and all federal and state recommended standards and requirements.
• Floor Plans
Communications Rooms supporting above surface stations shall be a minimum of 12 feet
wide by 12 feet long by10 feet tall.
Where site specific constraints limit the space available for the communications room, the
designer may request approval from the SANDAG Project Manager and System
Engineer to reduce the width to 8 feet. At locations where approval is granted, the 3 feet
wide aisle behind the rack will be eliminated, however, a clear access space at least 3
feet wide on both sides of each rack with cable management shall be provided to enable
workers to access the back of the equipment mounted in the standard 19 inch equipment
racks this will require the length of the room to be lengthened to a minimum of 18 feet
long. Every Standard 19 inch racks shall include vertical cable management on the sides
of the rack.
Early in the design development process, the designer shall put together a complete floor
plan that shows all rack locations, plywood backboard, and ensures all aisles are a
minimum of 3 feet wide. The aisle shall be widened in front of electrical panels as
needed to conform to California Electric Code (CEC) access requirements. All 19 inch
racks shall be four post racks that are a minimum of 30 inches deep. Access isles shall
be located in front and behind each 19 inch rack.
One wall shall be covered with a minimum of 32 squared feet of 0.75-inch plywood. A
minimum of 18 inches in front of the backboard shall be provided so cable termination
and related equipment can be mounted to the plywood backboard without intruding into
the isles.
The design of the communications room shall be for the explicit use of housing electronic
equipment, fiber-optics equipment, measuring devices and other related components,
within a controlled atmosphere required for the proper operating conditions for the
equipment.
The minimum width of a communications room shall not be less than 8 feet wide.
The designer shall at a minimum submit the following design plans to the SANDAG and
– Floor plan or enclosure(s) plan view showing: a) a minimum of 3 feet wide aisles in
front of racks and plywood backboard; b) 3 feet wide aisle behind rack where
feasible; c) sub panel(s) with minimum required CEC access clearances shown; d)
0.75 inch plywood with 1 foot of space in front for equipment (not in aisle); e)
transformer dimensions if required and located in communications room; and e) air
conditioning unit(s) dimensions if located in communications room;
6-29 March 2014

management);
– Cable ladder system in prefabricated buildings and rooms that are hung from the
ceiling over racks and plywood back board and connect to conduit penetrations;
load assumptions.
equipment heat generation, and volume of air space.
• Operating Environment
The room shall comply with the specified environmental operating ranges identified in
Section 6.1.3 “Environmental”. Additionally, the room shall utilize positive air pressure
and shall be sealed to resist dust infiltration and be watertight.
The cooling and insulation systems shall be properly sized to maintain a temperature in
the range of 75 to 85 degrees Fahrenheit. The design shall account for heat entering from
outside the room; equipment operating heat output specified by the equipment
manufacturer or estimated by the designer and shall not be less than the minimum Air
Conditioning System and insulation values identified.
• Submittals
The designer shall at a minimum submit the following design plans to the SANDAG and
– Floor plan showing:

 A minimum of 3 feet wide aisles in front of racks and plywood backboard;
 3 feet wide aisle behind rack where feasible;
 Sub panel(s) with minimum required CEC access clearances shown;
 0.75 inch plywood with 1 foot of space in front for equipment (not in aisle);
 Transformer dimensions if required and located in communications room; and
 Air conditioning unit(s) dimensions if located in communications room;
management);
– Cable ladder system in prefabricated buildings and rooms that are hung from the
ceiling over racks and plywood back board and connect to conduit penetrations;
load assumptions;
6-30 March 2014

equipment heat generation, and volume of air space;
– Designer shall submit detailed drawings showing all communications and electrical
raceways connecting the Wide Area Network and Local Area Network Devices to the
Communications Room. Drawings shall show stub-up locations into the room;
– Designer shall require the contractor to submit manufacturer's literature and product
data with specifications and installation instructions.
• Door Guidelines
– Frame
The frame shall be 16-gauge galvanized steel, primed, painted, and cast into the wall
panel.
– Door
Doors shall be 3 feet by 7 feet by 1.75 inch 18-gauge galvanized steel, insulated,
primed, painted and installed flush with door check, door stop, weather stripping,
mortise lockset with changeable core, stainless steel ball bearing hinges and bullet
resistant.
• Telephone Service Provisions

The designer shall show the installation of a conduit sized to phone company standards
to be installed from designated phone company facility connection point to a point inside
the enclosure in front of the plywood back board and be located within 3 feet (measured
horizontally) of a wall mounted duplex outlet.
• Electrical
Electrical installation and wiring shall conform to the latest edition of the National
Electrical Code and shall consist of the following as a minimum:
– Have electrical voltage and electromagnetic wave length (in Hertz) ratings that are
compatible with and enable the unit to utilize power from the existing electrical service
at each station without transformation thru other devises. The Designer shall conduct
a field survey to determine proper sizing prior to designing the enclosure and station
electrical service.
Designer shall contact the Utility Company and conduct a field survey to determine
proper sizing prior to developing the specification for the enclosure electrical subpanel
and Air Conditioning System. Whenever possible, the Designer shall specify the AC
unit with the highest voltage rating that matches the utility voltage available at the
station site. In most cases, the new heat exchanger unit should have a voltage rating
of 200 volts or higher.
– Entrance Conduit – Underground entrance conduit shall be Schedule 40 polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) conduit.
6-31 March 2014

– Interior Conduit - Interior Conduit shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) approved,

surface mounted galvanized rigid steel (GRS) or electrical metallic tubing (EMT)
conduit firmly mounted to the exterior surface using galvanized steel Unistrut
connectors or an approved equivalent.
– Exterior Conduit – Exterior Conduit shall be UL approved, surface mounted
galvanized rigid steel (GRS) conduit firmly mounted to the exterior surface using
galvanized steel Unistrut connectors or an approved equivalent.
– Communications Room shall have an electrical subpanel rated for at least 125A with
a voltage that is based on available utility power in the area of the station. Subpanel
breaker box shall include at a minimum 12 single pole 20 amp breakers, two 30 amp
double pole for the UPS, and additional breakers for the AC system.
– Wiring - Internally wired for fluorescent lighting fixture, wall switch, duplex outlet,
electric unit heater, air conditioning unit, and 125-amp, 12-circuit breaker 120/208 or
120/240 VAC, three-wire single phase panel board.
– Power wiring - Not smaller than American Wire Gauge (AWG) No. 12, and enclosed
in conduit. Fittings, wiring devices, and fixtures - UL-approved, and ready for site
connection.
– Lighting – Room shall include fluorescent (two bulb) lighting fixtures (120 VAC)
controlled by a light switch over each aisle that provides evenly distributed light with a
minimum of 3 foot-candles of lighting at the floor. The fluorescent fixtures, outdoor
fixture and light switch and raceway shall be firmly mounted to the structure and
include all wiring between the fixtures, light switches, and panel.
– At least two of the light fixtures, one closest to the door, another at the opposite end,
and others evenly spaced between shall be dedicated emergency light fixtures.
These fixtures shall have a dedicated emergency raceway and wiring.
– Room shall include illuminated exit light fixture over the door entrance, mounted to a
surface mounted junction box. Provide raceway and wiring to the enclosure panel.
– Room shall include grounded duplex-grounded outlets spaced at 4 feet on center and
two over each 19 inch rack. Room shall include raceway and wiring from the
receptacles in a junction box to the communications room sub-panel(s) located in the
communications room. Each outlet over each rack shall be on a separate circuit.
– Room shall have redundant air condition systems, uninterruptable power supplies
and/or generators that will automatically start the backup unit. The room shall have its
own Thermostat control. The programmable logic controller (PLC) shall send high
temperature and over temperature alarms. The over temperature alarm shall initiate
an organized shut down of the equipment.
– Design shall include monitoring of 3 phase utility services, raceways and wiring from
the 3 phase power source to the phase loss relay, and monitoring wiring from the
phase loss relay to the programmable logic controller (PLC).
6-32 March 2014

Every communications room shall be equipped with Surge Suppression conforming to
the requirements specified in Section 6.3.1.1 “Grounding and Surge Suppression” of this
Design Criteria.

The room shall include a lightning arrester, a ground grid, an internal halo grounding
system and grounding bar solidly grounded to earth mounted on standoff insulators as
shown on the plans to tie all metal structures to a common earth ground with suitable
conductors. All metal doors, panels, and racks shall be bonded with grounding straps.
No hinged or bolted connections will be considered a suitable path to ground.
Bonding and grounding shall conform to the provisions in Section 86-2.10, “Bonding and
Ground,” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications, the California Electric Code, and in
Section 6.3.1.1 “Grounding and Surge Suppression” of this Design Criteria. All
conformance with these Special Provisions.

Every communications room shall be equipped with an Uninterruptable Power Supply
conforming to the requirements specified in Section 6.15 “Uninterruptable Power Supply”
• Minimum Finishing Requirements

Structural design and manufacturing shall conform to applicable building and fire code
requirements. The Communications room shall be completely sealed to prohibit the
intrusion of water into the room.
• Floor Section
Surfaces shall be smooth. Cover the interior surface with vinyl composition tile with
rubber base molding, bonded with a waterproof contact adhesive.
• Roof
R11 ceiling insulation and finish to be foam-board insulation with 3/8-inches vinyl coated
board. Install a plastic joint or corner trim at panel joints.
Roof section shall provide a 2-inch overhang on all sides. The roof will be a hip type
sloping 4 directions. It shall be a cap and fit over the walls, leaving no exposed roof to
wall joint.
• Wall
R-11 wall insulation covered with ½-inch thick panel, surfaced with 0.03-inches fiberglass
reinforced plastic (FRP). Plastic joint or corner trim shall be installed at all panel joints.
Floor/wall intersection shall be finished with 4-inches vinyl baseboard.
6-33 March 2014

The walls shall overhang the floor a minimum of 7 inches from the top floor surface.
There shall be no exposed wall to floor joint.
Thermal Insulation - Standard wall and ceiling thickness shall be covered with R-11 1-
inch (25 mm) thick foam board insulation, unless another equivalent means of insulation
is provided.
8 feet by 4 feet by 0.75 inches thick marine grade plywood securely fastened to wall with
bolts over communications conduit entrances.

Each communications room shall have primary and back up Air Conditioning (AC)
system that provides sufficient cooling to control the temperature of the room to within
specified limits that shall be sized by the designer. Designer shall determine and develop
technical specifications of the AC unit based on calculation of anticipated environmental
and equipment heat generation values. The A/C units shall be generally consistent to
those used on the existing system and conform to the following as described below.
Each communications room shall have a primary and back up Air Conditioning (AC)
system that provides sufficient cooling to control the temperature of the room to within
specified limits. At a minimum the each redundant cooling system shall have a minimum
capacity of 36,000 BTU per hour with proper ducting to properly vent and cool the room.
Air conditioning system shall utilize CFC- Free Refrigerant and suppress electromagnetic
interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI). Whenever possible, the
designer shall size the AC units with the highest voltage rating possible. In most cases,
the new air conditioner unit should have a voltage rating of 200 volts or higher.
Temperature Control Thermostat enabling the maximum and minimum internal
communications room temperature to be set within the range of 50 to 99 degrees F
minimum. Thermostat must prevent over-heating, over-cooling, and provide for energy
efficient operation.
• Communications Racks
Each enclosure shall be furnished with a minimum of three (3) 19 inch four post free
standing racks with 12-24 threaded standard holes spaced in conformance with CEA-
310-E (EIA-310-D) and conforming to the site’s seismic design requirements in the
California Building Code and the requirements described in Telcordia Technologies
Generic Requirements (GR) GR-63. Threading shall conform to the ANSI B1.1, Unified
Course Thread (UNC) standard.
• Communications Raceway
Each enclosure shall be furnished with a complete continuous cable ladder system from
the communications conduits entrance at the sidewall, up the wall, and across the ceiling
both along the front and along the back of the three 4 post 19 inch racks in accordance
with the latest NEMA Standards Publication VE2. Wall mounted ladder system shall be
comprised of approximately 8 lineal feet of 18 inches wide aluminum cable tray. Ceiling
mounted ladder system shall be comprised of approximately 86 lineal feet of 12 inches
wide aluminum cable tray (open ladder type) with 6 inches rungs.
6-34 March 2014

• Enclosure Sensoring System

Room shall include a programmable logic controller conforming to the requirements
specified in Section 6.3.1.2 “Programmable Logic Controller” of this Design Criteria, and
an alarm controller with sensors to monitor intrusion, smoke, power failure, and high and
shut down temperature thresholds. Intrusion alarm device shall issue a notification once
the door is opened by non-authorized personnel. Determination of an intruder versus
authorized personnel may be determined by either an electronic card reader access lock
or a door limit switch and key operated by-pass switch mounted outside the room on the
wall. Provide devices, raceways and wiring for a complete operating system back to a
junction box. The two smoke detector alarms shall be mounted on opposite ends of the
room. The detectors shall be mounted on their own individual surface mounted junction
boxes. Sensors shall provide inputs and outputs to the PLC input/output (I/O) ports.
For enclosures powered by 3 phase services a phase loss relay shall be installed to
monitor voltage powering the room. The relay shall be provided with two form “C”
contacts and mounted into a NEMA 1 enclosure. Alarm indications of the phase loss
relay shall be inputted into the PLC.

equipment should be consistent with equipment layouts used on the existing system.

hardware, cable storage supports, and surge suppression equipment shall be mounted to
the plywood backboard.
• Field Quality Control and Testing

Designer shall specify system performance and functional testing requirements to ensure
that each completed Communications Room is tested to ensure operability of all electrical
and communications systems, lamps, and air conditioning units in accordance with
manufacturers’ printed instructions.
6.3.3 Communications Enclosures at Enclosed or Non-Standard Stations

A station containing more than two platforms or is enclosed in a structure (i.e. a station in a
tunnel) shall have communications enclosure (cabinet, precast concrete building, or
communications room) that adequately sized to accommodate the equipment required to
support the station facility and are generally consistent with the communications facility
layouts used at a standard two platform unenclosed station.
6.4 Wide Area Network Communications

6.4.1 Network Architecture
The MTS Network is composed of two paralleling single mode fiber optic networks; one vital
and one non-vital.
6-35 March 2014

Designers shall develop contract plans and special provisions that are consistent with current
design practices utilized on the existing system.
6.4.1.1 Vital Wide Area Network

The Vital Wide Area Network (WAN) is essential to the safe and efficient operation of the light
rail system and is physically separated from the Non-Vital WAN. The Vital WAN is a
redundant network solely used by the Railway Signaling System and is generally referred to
as the “Vital Railway Signaling Network”. The Vital WAN is comprised of a series of nodes
located within Railway Signaling cabinets connected together via a dedicated 24 strand
single mode fiber optic cable forming a series of redundant rings. The Vital Railway Signaling
Network is used to carry vital data between locations. The Vital signaling system is a Safety
Critical system designed in conformance with the “fail-safe principles and practices”
described in Part 16 of the American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way
Association (AREMA) Communications & Signals Manual of Recommended Practices.
At locations where the 24 strand fiber optic cable runs over head or past a signal cabinet a
12, 24, or 48 strand single mode fiber optic riser cable with an aerial splice closure shall be
used to connect into the 24 strand cable. The Vital WAN connects all signal programmable
logic controllers (PLC) in each signal cabinet to each other and with the Maintenance of Way
offices.
The Vital WAN shall not be accessible from the internet or another outside network. It shall
remain physically isolated from all other networks.
At each Automatic Interlocking the railway signaling system PLC’s non-vital communications
module also connects via the Non-Vital LAN and WAN switches at the nearest station to form
a link between the Operations Control Center and railway signaling system to carry signaling
system SCADA information back and forth. The Signaling System SCADA data shall
include, but not be limited to: the wayside signaling system sharing track circuit occupancy,
signaling system indication, and unlock light information and the OCC to be submit remote
route and cancelation requests to the wayside signaling system at the railway signaling
system interlockings.
All Vital WAN connections shall utilize TCP/IP and Genesis protocols, conform to MTS Vital
WAN IP address standards; and remain consistent with existing MTS bid addressing
methods currently utilized on the system. See the Railway Signaling and Indications
Systems section for additional information regarding the Non-Vital WAN interfaces to the Vital
railway signaling system PLCs.
All Vital WAN splicing diagrams shall be developed in close cooperation with the Railway
Signaling System Designers and the SANDAG systems engineers. Often the SANDAG
system engineers will develop the Vital WAN splicing diagrams and provide them for
inclusion in the designers plan set.
6.4.1.2 Non-Vital WAN

The non-vital WAN, like the Vital WAN, is essential to the efficient operation of the MTS
system and is typically referred to as the MTS “Wide Area Network (WAN)”. It shall be
designed to provide a second uniquely routed independent redundant path that ensures if the
primary path is severed the system will automatically switch over to the secondary path.
6-36 March 2014

The Wide Area Network (WAN) serves as the core network that enables communication
between the Operations Control Center and each trolley station. The WAN is a Resilient
Packet Ring (RPR) all dielectric single-mode fiber (SMF) optical network and utilize
Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) for each Segmented Packet Ring
(SPR). The RPR network protocol shall conform to IEEE 802.17 standards, unless otherwise
specified herein. The WAN RPR switch over protection rate may be reduced to 250 ms.
All LAN network communications shall be 10/100 Base T TCP/IP Ethernet communications
utilizing 12 bit IP Addresses. The Wide Area Network shall be so designed to also enable
1000 Base-T gigabits of data transmission with 16 bit IP Address to provide for future high
bandwidth capacity.
The designer early in the WAN design development process shall submit a conceptual fiber
optic network topology design showing network hubs, nodes, and connections to the
SANDAG systems engineering team for review and acceptance. In addition the designer
shall also submit the proposed RPR configuration that identifies RPR limits to the SANDAG
systems engineering team for review and acceptance.
The WAN nodes shall be located in the communications enclosure at the trolley station,
unless otherwise approved by the SANDAG systems engineer on a site by site basis. Some
trolley stations may also serve as WAN hubs.
6.4.2 WAN SMF Cabling

The WAN SMF cable shall be an all dielectric 144 strand single-mode fiber (SMF) optical
cable conforming to the requirements of ICEA S-87-640 “Standards for Optical Fiber Outside
Plant Communications Cable”. The cable shall be designed shall contain 12 buffer tubes
each with 12 single mode fiber optical strands. Cables shall be designed to endure the rigors
of installation while maintaining excellent attenuation performance and must provide
protection against ultraviolet (UV) radiation, water penetration and gnawing rodents. Color
coding of buffer tubes and fiber strands shall conform to TIA/EIA-598-C Optical Fiber Cabling
Color Coding standards for easy identification per EIA 359-A. .
Stations may be connected to the 144 strand SMF local distribution cables and shall be use a
12, 24, or 48strands SMF cable conforming to the same standards and requirements
described for the 144 strand SMF cable.
Each strand in each SMF cable shall be designed and factory tested to ensure the following
frequencies are transmitted with excellent attenuation and bandwidth performance: 1,310 nm,
1,383 nm, and 1,550 nm in conformance with ISO/IEC 24702 and ITU-T G.652.D standards.
All fiber optic cable splices shall be made using fusion splices. All cable terminations shall be
made using subscriber connectors (SC). SC fiber termination connectors shall be fused to
the WAN SMF cable to terminate it to the fiber distribution unit in each communications
enclosure or communications room.
SC SMF patch cords shall be used to connect the WAN switch to the fiber distribution unit.
Fiber cabling plans should avoid placing fiber optic splice closures in subsurface vaults
whenever practicable.
6-37 March 2014

All cables shall be tagged in accordance with the requirements described below in Section
6.5.4 “Cable Tags”.
Dedicated fiber optic strands within the 144 strand SMF cable shall be allocated to form a
Fire Alarm Control and Emergency Management System (FACEMS) solely dedicated to link
Intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACP) at elevated stations and Emergency
Management Panels (EMP) at underground stations to the existing Simplex Grinnell Incident
Commander (IC) located in the Operation Control Center. The dedicated Fire Alarm
Management System fiber optic strands shall form a redundant ring connecting all of the
panels to each other and linking them with the OCC. The designer shall meet with SANDAG
and MTS to obtain information about the existing dedicated fiber connections and determine
how to connect in the additional FACP located along a new line segment or to link up an
existing station that is being upgraded with new Simplex Grinnell compatible Intelligent Fire
Alarm Control Panels.
The Communications Systems designer shall work with the stations fire life safety designer,
SANDAG, and MTS staff to develop system interface details. Fiber strand allocation, splicing
and termination drawings shall identify the fiber strands dedicated to the FACEMS. The
communications system designer shall refer to sections 2.9 “Fire Protection System” and
2.10 “Fire/Life Safety (Elevated or Underground Station) for additional information regarding
the Fire Life Safety System.
6.4.3 WAN Modifications and Equipment Procurement and Installation

When there are plans to expand or modify the Wide Area Network management system, the
designer shall work cooperatively with MTS and SANDAG staff to determine the existing
system configuration. The designer shall perform evaluation of the existing system to
determine if it is sufficient to handle additions and/or newer technologies proposed. Any
necessitated modifications to the system shall be submitted to the SANDAG systems
engineer for review. Modifications to the existing system shall be compatible with associated
systems and upgradable as the LRT system expands.
The designer shall ensure that the network management system maintains its objective
including:
• Operations: Keeping the network (and the services that the network provides) up
and running smoothly. Including monitoring the network to spot problems as soon as
possible, ideally before users will be affected;
• Administration: Keeping track of resources in the network and how they are
assigned. Including all the "housekeeping" that is necessary to keep the network
under control;
• Maintenance: Allowance for continued performance of repairs and upgrades;
• Provisioning: Allowing continued configuring of resources in the network to support
a given service.
Often WAN switches and power supplies are procured under separate contract and installed
as owner furnished material; the designer shall meet with the SANDAG project manager and
systems engineer to determine if the WAN modifications shall be included in the contract
6-38 March 2014

documents. If there is determination that the new equipment and network management
system changes be included, then the designer shall develop complete contract plans and
Special Provisions detailing all necessary changes and installation requirements that will
ensure minimal impacts to the operation of the existing network. Substantive changes to the
network requiring shut downs of the network shall be required to be performed during the
least impacted periods, or during non-revenue window period.
6.4.4 WAN Design

6.5 Local Area Network Communications

6.5.1 Network Architecture
The Local Area Network (LAN) shall utilize a hub and spoke architecture. The LAN Cisco 48
port 3560 series layer 3 network switch shall be connected to the WAN Cisco 15454 series
network switch via a multi-mode fiber connection patch cord. The LAN shall be comprised of
a 48 port network switch. All network devices shall connect to the 48 port switch, except that
the video surveillance system shall have only a single point of connection to the WAN Switch.
All of the following devices shall connect directly to the 48 port network switch utilizing a
standard RJ-45 connector, unless otherwise directed: Passenger Card Interface Device
(PCID) (also known as, “smart card reader”), Ticket Vending Machine (TVM), Public Address
Digital to Analog Converter, Variable Message Signs (VMS), Signaling System SCADA,
UPS’s, PLC, Traction Power System SCADA, and other network devices needed for future
functionality. Devices located over 300 feet in cable length from the Communications
Cabinet shall be connected to the LAN switch via a LAN Single Mode Fiber Optic cable.
6.5.2 LAN Ethernet Cables

Devices located less than 300 feet in cable length from the Communications Cabinet shall be
connected to the LAN switch via a LAN Ethernet Cable using CAT6 cable. The LAN Ethernet
cables shall be outdoor rated ANSI/TIA Category 6 unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable
containing 4 twisted pairs and conforming to the requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 and
ISO/IEC 11801 Class E. All LAN Ethernet cables from field devices shall be terminated to a
rack mounted Category 6 patch panel to configure the circuits for the “straight through”
configuration in accordance with T568 A or T568 B standards, patch cords shall be used to
make the connection between the Category 6 patch panel and the 48 port LAN switch. All
cables within the communications cable shall be properly labeled and neatly trained. All
cables shall be tagged in accordance with the requirements described below in “Cable Tags”.
Following installation all LAN Ethernet cables, cables shall be tested and certified that the
cables conform to the TIA-568-B industry standards using a TIA certified Category 6 cable
tester.
6.5.3 LAN SMF Cabling

The LAN optical fiber cables shall be all dielectric 12, 24, and 48 strand single-mode fiber
optical cable conforming to the requirements of ICEA S-87-640 “Standards for Optical Fiber
Outside Plant Communications Cable” shall be designed contain 12 buffer tubes each with
6-39 March 2014

12 single mode fiber optical strands. Cables shall be designed to endure the rigors of
installation while maintaining excellent attenuation performance and must provide protection
against ultraviolet (UV) radiation and gnawing rodents. Color coding of buffer tubes and fiber
strands shall conform to TIA/EIA-598 Optical Fiber Cabling Color Coding standards.
LAN devices located between stations (e.g. traction power and railway signaling SCADA
systems) shall be connected to the station via available strands in the WAN 144 strand SMF
cable using a 12-, 24-, or 48-strand SMF riser cables conforming to the same standards and
requirements described for the 144 strand SMF cable. The riser cables shall be spliced into
the 144 strand SMF cable at locations near the field devices locations via an aerial splice
closure mounted to the 3/8-inch EHS cable support messenger wire. Designers should avoid
installing splice closures in handholes or cable trays. Typically, cables can be run into and
out of the enclosure without the need for a splice closure. At locations where special
conditions exist and a splice closure must be located in a pull box, vault, manhole, the pull
box or vault shall be an SDG&E standard 3313 handhole or Caltrans standard fiber optic
manhole.
Each strand in each SMF cable shall be designed and factory tested to ensure the following
frequencies are transmitted with excellent attenuation performance: 1,310 nm, 1,383 nm,
1,550 nm in conformance with ISO/IEC 24702 and ITU-T G.652.D standards.
All fiber optic cable splices shall be made using fusion splices. All cable terminations shall be
made using subscriber connectors (SC). SC fiber termination connectors shall be fused to
the WAN SMF cable to terminate it to the fiber distribution unit in each communications
enclosure or communications room.
6.5.4 Cable Tags

All communications cables shall be labeled with cable tags conforming to the following
requirements:
• Each end of every patch cord, fiber optic cable, UTP cable, and speaker cable shall
be labeled with Allied Electric Self-Laminating Laser Tag labels (Manufacturer’s
number TAG5L-105) or an approved equivalent;
• Each label shall contain the end device name (e.g. “VMS-SB1,” “TWC-SB1,” etc.),
the near end termination port identification (e.g. “ES-C3” (Gigabit Ethernet Switch,
port C3)) and the far end termination port identification at the other end of the cable
(e.g., “16MC-1” (16 Bay Media Converter, port 1). Contractor shall submit proposed
device naming convention and port identification naming conventions for approval;
• Tagging formats and administrative records shall be maintained for all cables.
Tagging formats and administrative records shall be created following an approach
that is similar to EIA/TIA-606 standard practices. Nomenclature shall be consistent
with naming conventions shown on the plans. Labels shall be concise and
preferably diagrammatic in form. All labels or number plates and warning notices
shall have black lettering on a white background. The size of the letters and the
nature of the wording shall be submitted by Contractor. All conductor wires and
cables shall be identified whenever they enter or leave a junction box, manhole,
housing, or enclosure, and at all terminals;
6-40 March 2014

• All labels, number plates and warning notices shall be of durable and corrosion
resistant materials securely fitted by permanent means and clearly worded. For
outdoor use they shall remain legible and not suffer degradation throughout the
expected life of the equipment. All wires and cables shall be tagged during the
termination process, as specified herein;
• Permanent non-conducting marking tags fastened securely to the wires and cables
shall be used for identification. Wire designations shall consistently conform to an
overall scheme prepared by SANDAG. The Contractor shall develop detailed
labeling and administrative records that indicate location, circuit, device, wire
number, terminal branch, and position, etc. Letters and numbers shall be used.
• Every signal cable jacket shall be labeled with permanent William Frick and
Company 7” x 8” SnapAround™ PVC cable tags, or acceptable equivalent, at both
ends and in every pull boxes with the circuit nomenclature (as shown on the Contract
Drawings or approved shop drawing) and the “location” or “terminal” designation
information clearly identified in permanent UV resistant ink and covered with clear
polyester overlay protectant sheets.
6.5.5 LAN Design

6.6 Cabling Raceways and Access Points

6.6.1 Cabling Raceways Paralleling the Trackway Except Under Stations
Generally, a single combined aerial raceways comprised of insulated railroad signaling and
fiber optic cabling double lashed to a 3/8 extra high strength (EHS) galvanized steel strand
cable firmly attached to catenary poles shall be used along the trackway, except where one
of the following conditions are met:
• Connections between equipment enclosures (e.g. traction power substations, railway

signaling cabinets and houses, and communications cabinets, houses, and rooms)
and riser poles;
• Transitions from riser poles located between or on the opposite side of the tracks to
a riser pole located on the near side of the tracks;
• Between riser poles located just outside each end of a trolley station;
• Aerial structures, not less than 500 feet in length, enabling cable trays to be placed
on the bridge deck in areas that would not adversely affect the use of emergency
egress paths;
• Transition areas from bridge deck cable trays to riser poles; and
• Scenic areas identified during the environmental review process as requiring aerial
cabling visual impact mitigation.
All aerial signal 3/8 inch EHS galvanized steel strand termination poles shall have standard
downguy assemblies attached to the opposite side of the poles and attaching to standard
6-41 March 2014

downguy foundations or embedded anchors in retaining wall or bridge structures. To

improve the cost effectiveness of the installation designers should try and utilize downguy
foundations required for other systems like the catenary termination and mid-point anchor
pole locations where feasible. In some cases this may require additional 3/8 inches EHS guy
strand to be run past the riser pole to a location further down the line or to trench conduit an
additional span to make use of a riser pole located slightly further away.
The railway signaling, communications system, and overhead contact system (OCS)
designers shall work together to identify riser pole locations and ensure all provisions for
additional downguy foundations and anchors are shown on the OCS layout design plans.
The combined raceway shall contain vital railway signal (fiber optic and multiconductor
copper), railway signaling power distribution, and 144-strand single mode WAN/LAN fiber
optic cables.
The construction of cable raceways shall be constructed of materials and configurations

commonly used on the existing system and conforming to the requirements described below
in the sections labelled “Access points” and “Raceway Materials” of this Design Criteria.
6.6.1.1 Riser Pole Raceways

Generally, muliconductor railway signaling cabling for new installations shall utilize surface
mounted exposed conduit upto a pole mounted stainless steel junction box mounted to the
face of the new steel catenary pole with second reinforced pole penetration and then run
inside the pole to pole spouts. Multiconductor railway signaling cables shall be landed in a
pole mounted stainless steel junction box containing standard AAR railway signaling
terminals. Junction boxes shall be firmly attached to the catenary pole utilizing spreader
brackets.
Where new catenary poles will be installed fiber optic cabling shall be run though inner duct
up through the catenary pole foundation into and up through the pole and out of the pole
through pole spouts.
Where new catenary poles shall be used as railway signaling and/or as a fiber optic cable
system riser pole, the designer of thoses systems shall provide riser pole information to the
Overhead Contact System (OCS) designer to ensure design plans show the installation of
catenary pole foundations with all necessary conduit and new catenary poles with all
necessary reinforced penetrations and pole spouts.
At locations where existing catenary poles will be converted into riser poles the cables shall
be run through exposed surface mounted conduit. Conduit banded to the pole shall conform
to the requirements described below for “Exposed Conduit in Coastal Areas” or “Exposed
Conduit in Inland Areas” as applicable.
6.6.1.2 Cable Tray Raceways

Cable Tray Raceways shall be used on bridge structures greater than 500 feet in length.
Cable trays shall have removable lids and be similar to those used on the existing system.
All cable trays shall be constructed of hot dipped galvanized steel conforming to the
requirements of section 75, “Miscellaneous Metal” and 75-1.05 “Galvanizing” of the Caltrans
Standard Specifications.
6-42 March 2014

6.6.1.3 Underground Conduit Raceways

Generally underground Type 3 Schedule 40 PVC conduit raceways conforming to the
requirements described below in “Buried Subsurface Conduit” shall be used to make
connections between riser poles, equipment enclosures, and cable trays. All buried
subsurface conduits shall be sized to provide for a maximum fill ratio of 20 percent fill. Vital
and Non-vital raceways parralleling the trackway shall be comprised of a minimum of two 4
inches Schedule 40 PVC conduits.
All communications and power pull boxes should be of sufficient size to allow for cable and
wiring to be pulled back from stub-ups and stored. Conduits entering pull boxes shall be
permanently identified as to destination using metal tags.
6.6.1.4 Railway Signaling Communications and Power Cabling Through Stations

Vital railway signaling power distribution and communications cabling through stations shall
be run under station platforms through a minimum of two 4 inch conduits entending from riser
pole, cable tray, or to railway signaling system enclsures located outside of the station to riser
pole, cable tray, or to railway signaling system enclsures on the opposite side of the station.
If the distance from the end of the platform to the to the riser pole, cable tray, or signaling
system enclosure is greater than 50 feet, then additional traffic rated “MTS Railway Signaling”
pull boxes conforming to the requirements described in below in the section labelled “Access
Points” shall be added at approximately 15 feet off the end of the station platform. Through
stations the railway signaling system cables should not be mixed with non-vital
communications and non-vital electrical power cabling.
6.6.1.5 Station Non-vital WAN and LAN Raceway System

The station non-vital WAN and LAN raceway system shall be comprised of two main raceway
systems: a) Raceway Systems Under At-grade Station Platform Areas, b) Platform
Raceways in Structures, and c) Raceways in Parking Lots and other non-platform areas.
• Raceway Systems Under At-grade Station Platform Areas

Raceways under station platform areas shall be comprized of three sets of traffic rated
electrical and communications pull boxes per platform. Each set of pull boxes shall be
comprised of a traffic rated communications pull box/ handhole and a traffic rated
electrical pull box/ handhole conforming to the requirements described below in the
section labelled “Access points” of this Design Criteria.
At a minimun, one set of the pull boxes shall be located in the middle of the station and
the other two sets shall be located just beyond opposite ends of each platform. Pull
boxes shall be set flush with the finish platforms.
Three 3-inch communications and power conduits shall be run between adjacent
communications and power pull boxes under each platform and perpendicular to the
tracks (3 under track crossings) and shall contain all communications system cabling. An
additional set of three 3-inch conduits Schedule 40 PVC communications conduits shall
be included to the Communications System conduit runs.
6-43 March 2014

Three 3-inch electrical conduits shall be run between adjacent electrical pull boxes under
each platform and perpendicular to the tracks (three under track crossings) and shall
contain all electrical system cabling.
Two 1-inch branch conduits (one for electrial and one for communications) shall connect
the nearest set of pullboxes/ handholes to each device (e.g. light poles for PA speakers
and cameras, VMS sign frames or mounting locations for VMS sign and cameras).
Each PCID and TVM shall have two 1-inch conduits (one for electrial and one for
communications) connecting it to the nearest set of pullboxes/ handholes. Both conduits
shall have threaded PVC couplings on the ends and the tops set flush with the finished
surface. Threaded plugs shall be screwed into the couplings.
• Station Platform Raceway Systems in Structures

Raceways in structures shall conform to the same arrangement as utilized for stations at
grade, however, the designer may require surfacemounted conduit to be installed within
the cells of the brige provided the cell of the bridge is accessible through a hinged access
door that is lockable with a standard pad lock to prevent entry. Pull boxes may be located
within the bridges provided they are permanently acessible in accordance with NEC
requirements.
• Bus Transit Platforms

Two 1-inch conduits (one for electrial and one for communications) shall run from the
nearest set of pullboxes/ handholes to each device (e.g. light poles for cameras, VMS
sign frames for bus information signage).
• Raceways in Parking Lots, and Other Non-Platform Areas

Two 1-inch conduits (one for electrial and one for communications) shall run from the
nearest set of pullboxes/ handholes to each device (e.g. light poles for cameras, smart
bicycle lockers). Both conduits shall have threaded PVC couplings on the ends and the
tops set flush with the finished surface. Threaded plugs shall be screwed into the
couplings.
Three 3-inch PVC conduits shall be run to pairs of communications and electrical pull
boxes positioned throughout the site to facilitate the installation for future systems and
provide for the co-mingling of the communication and electrical circuits in the parking lots
and non-platform areas.
Designated parking spots shall have electrical and communications conduits installed for
recharging stations.
If solar power generation facilities are incorporated into the station parking lot electrical
design, then a minimum of two 1 inch communications conduit shall be provided for an
Ethernet SCADA connection.
6-44 March 2014

• Raceways in Parking Structures

Parking structures shall have conduit raceways for the following systems at a
minimum:
– Smart Parking (1-inch electrical and communications to every parking space);
– Top layer solar electrical power generation (1-inch conduit to communications to
inverter and DC disconnect switch locations, electrical sized as needed;
– Video Surveillance system (1-inch for power, 1-inch for communications);
– Variable messaging signage systems (1-inch for power, 1-inch for communications).
Parking structures shall be equiped with sufficient conduit to provide for Video
Surveillance near the center of every isle and in every light pole on the roof top. If solar
electrical power generation systems are included, the video surveillance cameras may be
able to be mounted to the support frame structure.
Every elevator shall have electrical and communications conduit connecting it to the
station communications enclosure or room for video surveillance cameras mounted in the
elevator.
Electrical and communications for fire life safety systems as requried by NFPA and NEC
requirements.
6.6.2 Raceway Materials and Installation

All conduits shall be UL or ETL listed. All installation work shall conform to the requirements
specified in section 86-2.05b “use” and section 86-2.05c, “installation” of the Caltrans
standard specifications, unless otherwise specified herein.
• Buried Subsurface Conduit

All buried conduit shall be Caltrans Type 3, Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) rigid
non-metallic conduit conforming to the requirements in the UL standard for rigid non-
metallic conduit (Publication UL 651). Conduit to be placed under existing pavements
shall be installed using the “trenched in pavement method” unless otherwise approved or
directed.
Contractor shall have Underground Service Alert (USA) mark out all existing utilities and
retain an experienced underground facilities locating company to locate and mark out the
existing MTS facilities. USA can be reached at 1-800-227-2600.
All buried conduit shall be installed a minimum of 24 inches below the finished surface in
paved areas, 30 inches below the finished surface in unpaved areas, and 36 inches
below bottom of railroad ties.
Conduit shall be bored or jacked under the trackbed at the locations shown on the plans.
Dig boring pits a minimum of ten feet from existing tracks, unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. Design and submit all shoring plans as needed to install conduit system.
6-45 March 2014

All trenching for conduit installation shall conform to requirements specified in Section 86-
2.02, “Removing and Replacing Improvements” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications,
unless otherwise directed or approved by the SANDAG project manager or systems
engineer on a site by site basis. Trench backfill shall be compacted to 95 percent
minimum compaction as specified in section 86-2.01 “Excavation and Backfilling” of the
Caltrans Standard Specifications.
A detectable warning tape shall be installed be provided and placed in the trench over all
new conduits. The warning tape shall be 100mm wide with bold printed black letters of
approximately 19 mm on bright orange color background, and contain a printed warning,
repeated at approximately 800 mm intervals. The printed warning shall be non-erasable,
shall be rated to last with the tape for a minimum of 40 years, and shall identify the
applicable buried system such as “Caution Fiber Optic Buried Below”, “Caution Buried
Electric Line Below”, or “Caution Communication Cable Buried Below”.
The construction of the warning tape shall be such that it will not delaminate when it is
wet. It shall be resistant to insects, acid, alkaline and other corrosive elements in the soil.
It shall have a minimum of 712 N tensile strength power 150 mm wide strip and shall
have minimum of 700 percent elongation before breakage.
Use sweeps with a minimum bend radius of 16 inches, whenever physically possible.
After cables are pulled, all ducts shall be sealed with an approved sealant. All conduits
shall be completely sealed to prevent intrusion of foreign objects and creatures.
When any facilities are placed below grade, a detailed conduit, cable, and facilities plan
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
• Exposed Conduit in Coastal Areas

All exposed surface mounted conduit located within 5 miles of the nearest salt water body
of water shall be considered to be coastal and conform to the requirements described in
this section.
All exposed conduit shall be Caltrans Type 1, hot-dip galvanized rigid steel conduit
conforming to the requirements in UL Publication UL6 for Rigid Metallic Conduit or Type
3. The zinc coating shall be capable of passing a test performed in conformance with
ASTM Designation: A239.
All surface mounted conduits attached to catenary poles shall be banded to the poles
with Type 316 stainless steel banding spaced at not greater than 5 feet apart.
All surface mounted and I-beam supported conduit, except conduit to be attached to
catenary poles, shall be attached to the surface with hot dipped galvanized steel or Type
316 stainless steel framing channels and all associated fittings and hardware including,
but not limited to, clamps, brackets, hanger rods, and fittings.
All hardware shall be made of Type 316 stainless steel.
6-46 March 2014

Channels shall be secured to concrete surfaces, other than catenary poles, with type 316
stainless steel mechanical wedge anchor fasteners that firmly anchor the channel to the
surface in conformance with the manufacturers recommended installation procedures.
The anchors shall be listed or approved by ICC (formerly ICBO) or UL for this application.
Spacing of the support shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall
not exceed 5 feet.
Conduit run across roof surface shall be supported by a durable, ultraviolet resistant,
flexible, polyethylene foam block with an integral galvanized steel channel that shall be
used to clamp the conduit and additional hot dipped galvanized metal framing systems to
it. All fasteners and hot dipped galvanized steel framing systems shall be UL listed and
made of hot dipped galvanized steel. Spacing of the support shall conform to the
manufacturer’s recommendations and shall not exceed five feet. All hardware shall be
made of Type 316 stainless steel.
Penetrations through floor and fire-rated walls shall utilize galvanized rigid Steel (GRS)
conduits and shall conform to ASTM E-814 criteria for an F-rated firestopping system.
All steel framing systems shall comply with UL 5, “Standards for Surface Metal Raceway
and Fittings.”
All steel framing systems attached to buildings shall conform to all applicable codes,
standards and requirements.
• Exposed Conduit in Inland Areas

All exposed surface mounted conduit located beyond five miles of the nearest salt water
body of water shall be considered to be non-coastal inland areas and conform to the
requirements described in this section.
All exposed conduit shall be Caltrans Type 1, hot-dip galvanized rigid steel conduit
conforming to the requirements in UL Publication UL6 for Rigid Metallic Conduit. The
zinc coating shall be capable of passing a test performed in conformance with ASTM
Designation: A239.
All surface mounted conduit attached to catenary poles shall be banded to the poles with
Type 304 or 316 stainless steel banding spaced at not greater than 5 feet apart.
All surface mounted and I-beam supported conduit, except conduit to be attached to
catenary poles, shall be attached to the surface with hot dipped galvanized steel framing
channels and all associated fittings and hardware including, but not limited to, clamps,
brackets, hanger rods, and fittings.
All hardware shall be made of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.
Channels shall be secured to the surface, other than catenary poles, with type 304 or 316
stainless steel mechanical wedge anchor fasteners that firmly anchor the channel to the
surface in conformance with the manufacturers recommended installation procedures.
The anchors shall be listed or approved by ICC (formerly ICBO) or UL .for this
6-47 March 2014

application. Spacing of the support shall conform to the manufacturer’s

recommendations and shall not exceed 5 feet.
Conduit run across roof surface shall be supported by a durable, ultraviolet resistant,
flexible, polyethylene foam block with an integral galvanized steel channel that shall be
used to clamp the conduit and additional hot dipped galvanized metal framing systems to
it. All fasteners and hot dipped galvanized steel framing systems shall be UL listed and
made of hot dipped galvanized steel. Spacing of the support shall conform to the
manufacturer’s recommendations and shall not exceed five feet. All hardware shall be
made of Type 304 stainless steel.
Penetrations through floor and fire-rated walls shall utilize galvanized rigid Steel (GRS)
conduits and shall conform to ASTM E-814 criteria for an F-rated fire stopping system.
All steel framing systems shall comply with UL 5, “Standards for Surface Metal Raceway
and Fittings.”All steel framing systems attached to buildings shall conform to all applicable
codes, standards and requirements.
6.6.3 Access Points

Access points shall be provided so that the sum of all conduit bends in a run between
adjacent points of access do not exceed 360 degrees.
All communications and electrical pullboxes and handholes shall be traffic rated pull boxes
and handholes conforming to either Caltrans Standard Traffic Rated pullboxes shown on ES-
8B of the Caltrans Revised Standard Plans or SDG&E standard 3313 handholes shown in
the Underground Standards Section of the SDG&E Electrical Standards & Guide Manual
SDG&E Standards, except as otherwise described below. All pullbox and handhole lids shall
be: a) constructed of hot dipped galvanized steel diamond plated steel conforming to Section
75-1.05 “Galvanizing” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications, and b) labelled “MTS Railway
Signaling”, “MTS Communicaitons”, “MTS Electrical”, “MTS Fiber Optic”, as applicable.
Provisions for storage of power wiring and communications cabling shall be provided within
pull boxes or junction boxes near TVM and PCIDs locations to allow for secure cable storage
in the event of future machine removal or new installation.
At locations where equipment is mounted to slab on grade, conduits need to be run a

minimum of 2 feet below grade and sweep up into center of footprint at equipment locations.
6.7 Network Cabling Standard

Power wiring to devices shall be kept separate of communications cabling and shall be run
continuously, without splices, from source to each device location including identified future
locations. Electrical wiring shall be properly sized to handle the connected load of the device.
Every circuit breaker shall be properly sized to protect the circuit and wiring connected to it in
accordance with NEC requirements. Wiring shall conform to the requirements of Section 86-
2.09 “Wiring” of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.
6-48 March 2014

Communications cabling shall be kept separate of power wiring; and shall be run
continuously, without splices, from termination locations in the communications enclosure or
room to the termination location in the field device.
Devices with cable lengths under 330 feet from end to end shall use Outdoor rated Category
6 UTP cabling (Comscope 6NF4+ or approved equivalent) between each network device
located outside of the communications cabinet and the rack mounted Category 6 48 port
protected patch panel in the communications cabinet with surge protection (Citel/cylix - PCH
series, or approved equivalent) . A Category 6 patch cord shall be used to complete the
connection to the LAN switch.
Devices located in or near stations with cable lengths over 330 feet from end to end shall use
12 strand Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable (Corning Freedom LST or approved equivalent)
between 12 port fiber distribution units, commonly referred to as patch panels. Each FDU
shall have a single mode patch cord with SC connectors connecting the FDU to a media
converter at both ends of the fiber optic cable. The media converters shall be connected to
the device and the LAN switch using a Category 6 UTP cable.
Devices located between stations with cable lengths over 330 feet from end to end shall use
available strands in the 144 strand Wide Area Network Cable and 12, 24, or 48 strand Single
Mode Fiber Optic Riser Cable (Corning Freedom LST or approved equivalent) spliced
together in sealed splice closures to create a fiber connection between fiber distribution unit
at the field device and in the communications enclosure at the station. Each FDU shall have
a single mode patch cord with SC connectors connecting the FDU to a media converter at
both ends of the fiber optic cable. The media converters shall be connected to the device
and the LAN switch using a Category 6 UTP cable.
Media converters in the communications enclosure shall be rack mounted in an Etherwan

EMC 1600 Series “16 Bay Media Converter and Ethernet Extender Chasis”. Etherwan
converters shall be 10/100/1000 Base T units.
Hardened Etherwan 10/100/1000 Base T media converters conforming to the requirements

of IEC 61000-6-2 EMC “Generic Standard Immunity for Industrial Environment” shall be
installed at the field device locations (e.g. VMS signs, PCIDs, TVMs, railway signaling
enclosures).
Etherwan 10/100/1000 Base T hardened media converters shall be DIN Rail Mounted inside
the device and be rated for a temperature range of -40 degrees F (-40 degrees C) to 167
degrees F (75 degree C).
6.8 Public Address

6.8.1 General Description
Public Address (PA) systems at stations shall comply with all applicable federal and state
ADA laws and ADAAG Section 10.3.1 (14) requirements.
The primary means of access to the station PA systems shall be by way of the AIMS system
PA consoles located at the OCC. The AIMS system PA consoles shall allow a user to select
one or more channels at stations and zones within underground stations for broadcast of live
6-49 March 2014

audio from the console microphone or pre-recorded announcements stored at the OCC or
local station control unit. All audio and control originating from the OCC PA consoles shall be
transmitted over WAN to the station LAN.
At typical non-underground stations, the public address (PA) system shall receive digital
Voice of Internet Protocol (VoIP) utilizing Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) via the Digital
Acoustics IP-7 series media gateway (or approved equivalent) from the Operations Control
Center (OCC) AIMS system by way of the WAN and LAN network switches, convert them to
analog audio outputs (using a Digital Acoustics IP7 or approved equivalent device), amplify
them to a 70-volts signal, and distribute the sound throughout the station to bidirectional
paging horns. At key designated stations where special events are anticipated the system
shall include a local push to talk microphone feature.
At a typical station, the PA system will have two channels (one per platform). Each platform
shall have its own channel amplifier. Amplifiers should include an automatic ambient sound
adjustment feature that will increase the volume when higher levels of ambient noise is
present and lower the volume the ambient noise levels decrease. The AIMS system at OCC
is able to increase and decrease volume levels depending on the time of day.
Station platforms located within enclosed structures, such as underground stations in tunnels,
the PA subsystem shall comply with NFPA 72 and shall be compliant with listing requirement
of the California State Fire Marshall wherever used as part of a combination fire system.
The PA system serving platforms and other areas in enclosed structures shall provide all of
the functionality of a non-underground station, but with access and control from additional
broadcast locations and additional features that enable additional a) general announcements,
b) alerts to existing or pending hazards, and c) emergency warning information to single and
multiple zones within the underground station facility.
6.8.2 Noise Assessments

Where environmental documents or a site assessment identifies noise sensitive receptor(s)
located within 40 feet of the back edge of the station platform, then the designer shall identify
this condition to the SANDAG Project Manager and System Engineer and request direction
on whether or not extensive analysis of paging horn type, placement, volume control, and
resulting noise distribution in accordance with the Federal Transit Administration’s “Transit
Noise and Vibration Impact Assessment” guidelines is warranted and should be performed to
ensure the public address design minimizes potential noise impacts to the noise sensitive
receptors.
6.8.3 Layout and Standards

Generally, public address system designs and specifications should remain consistent with
current practices, unless site specific conditions necessitate special consideration.
Unless site specific conditions necessitate special consideration, bidirectional paging horns
shall be evenly spaced 70 to 100 feet apart and mounted to the nearest light pole along the
back edge of platform at a height of approximately 11 to 15 feet above the platform to
minimize variations in sound levels along the platform. Paging horns should be positioned at
a horizontal angle of approximately 5 to 15 degrees from the vertical plane of the back of
6-50 March 2014

platform and downward at an angle of approximately 25 to 45 degrees from horizontal.

Usually, the spacing from each end of the platform to the first bidirectional paging horn should
be approximately half the distance of the spacing between adjacent bidirectional paging
horns. If a designer thinks site specific conditions necessitate special consideration, then the
designer shall set up a meeting with the SANDAG Project Manager and SANDAG systems
engineer to review the site conditions and determine how to proceed with the design
development.
At sites with sensitive noise receptor(s) special paging horns with differing horizontal and
vertical degrees of dispersion, power ratings, and sound pressure level may be considered
for use to attempt to further reduce noise impacts on the sensitive receptor. Before
performing analysis the acoustical engineer should verify the location of solid surfaces and
other mitigation measures that could affect the results of the analysis.
6.8.4 Technical and Performance Characteristics

The PA system shall conform to the following requirements:
• Power Source: All station PA equipment shall be powered from the

communications UPS, 120V 60 Hz, AC;
• Network Interface: 10/100 Base T Ethernet, TCP/IP protocols;
• Audio Protocol: G.711.8/16 Bit PCM/ uLaw;
• Amplifier Inputs: Power UPS 120 V, 60 Hz AC; a minimum of two channel inputs
(one channel per platform)(one from each IP7 device), 2 Watt analog audio; and
Station ambient noise sensor when need to address site specific environmental
concerns;
• Amplifier Outputs: 70V, 300 Watts per channel. Typically, Channel 1 Westbound &
Channel 2 Eastbound;
• Sound Distribution: The PA subsystem shall provide an effective sound
distribution system which utilizes loudspeakers strategically placed to produce
uniformly distributed audio throughout the passenger stations. Uniform audio in both
tonality and sound level, at 5 feet elevation above the walking area, so that normal
movement of a passenger sound receptor does not result in greater than 5 decibels
changes in the sound level. PA subsystem shall maintain a uniformly distributed
sound level at least 6 decibels above ambient station operating noise level measured
at 5 feet above floor;
• Paging Horns: Paging horns shall be outdoor rated, weather proof, 70-volts.
Typically, paging loudspeaker horns with a dispersion of 100 degrees per horn, root
mean squared (RMS) power rating of 30 watts continuous, a sound pressure level of
121 decibels at four feet on axis, and an impedance selector switch that permits
adjustment of the impedance at each set of paging loudspeakers are used;
• Active Components: Active components shall be solid-state devices driven off of
120V 60 Hz AC power;
• Headroom: The system shall have sufficient to allow a minimum increase in output
of 12 dB, without increase in hum, noise, or total harmonic distortion;
6-51 March 2014

• Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than 1 percent at full rated output;
• Overload Protection: All amplifier outputs shall be protected with automatically
resetting thermal overload, short circuit and current limited protection;
• Frequency Response: Horn speakers’ frequency response shall be a minimum of
225 Hz to 14 kHz plus or minus 3 dB;
• Dispersion: Angle between 60 degrees and 100 degrees each horn.
6.8.5 Stations in Enclosed Structures

PA systems in enclosed structures (e.g. in a tunnel) shall conform to all State, Federal, and
NFPA requirements if used as part of the emergency response system.
The designer shall identify additional system requirements beyond those required for typical
non-enclosed stations. These may include the following:
6.8.5.1 Supervision and Alarms

The PA subsystems shall be fully supervised with failure annunciation.
Emergency Management Panel, local annunciator/alarm panel, shall indicate individually the
failure of any supervised circuit or equipment.
6.8.5.2 Enclosed Station System Input Priorities

Microphones shall be provided at the EMP/CP and in a Station Security room at the station.
Prerecorded voice announcements shall be activated either locally or by remote control from
the Operations Control Center (OCC) for informational or emergency announcements.
Inputs from OCC shall be carried over the WAN or LAN. Underground station inputs from the
station security room and EMP may be carried over to the PA subsystem via the WAN/LAN
network. For undergrounds station, the following inputs shall be provided:
Table 6-2. – Input Priorities
Priority Passenger Stations

1st Station First Responder’s Emergency Management Panel (EMP) Microphones
2nd Operations Control Center -Communications Console
3rd Prerecorded Announcements
4th All other inputs
6.8.6 Operation Control Center Remote Access

The AIM’s system at the Operations Control Center (OCC) enables PA messaging to be sent
to the station. In anticipation of the addition of new stations to the system, the AIM’s system
shall be modified to incorporate additional station channels. The designer shall provide a
detailed scope of work to the AIMs contract administrator that will detail out all additional
station locations, number of channels (platforms) per station, and the names of the stations
and request that the AIM’s system be modified to incorporate the additional stations. The
6-52 March 2014

scope of work shall include a request to modify the AIMs system and provide an anticipated
activation date.
6.8.7 Ethernet Connection in Enclosed Station

Station PA system in enclosed structure shall link with the Operations Control Center and
local control facilities at the station via the MTS LAN and WAN network. The PA control
system shall provide audio outputs by zones to the audio system.
6.8.8 Connection to Cabling to Amplifier in Enclosed Station

Station PA system digital interface controller at the station shall provide an audio output to
station zone amplifiers.
6.8.9 Connection to Cabling to Speakers in Enclosed Station

Each paging horn or speaker shall be cabled back to the communications room. Each
platform shall be on its own channel. Cabling from the terminal blocks to the paging horns
shall conform to NFPA and NEC requirements.
The output of each amplifier channel output shall pass through a 70 volts audio surge
protection unit before connecting to each channels backboard mounted terminal block.
6.9 Visual Messaging System

The visual messaging system shall provide visual information to passengers in stations via
variable Visual Message Signs (VMS) mounted in accordance with the VMS locating criteria
described below. The display of the visual information shall be in compliance with the ADA
Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) for the hearing impaired, operational and safety-related
messages for patron awareness. The AIMs system located at the Operations Control Center
(OCC) will generate messages for display at each passenger station.
The VMS system shall interface with the AIMS centralized message generator (including
message creation, storage and selection) system, and dispatch functions at the OCC for
individual stations, groups of stations, and all station sign activation and display. Each
passenger station VMS shall accept message inputs from the AIMs centralized processing
unit located at the OCC.
6.9.1 General
Visual Message Signs (VMS) at stations shall conform to ADAAG sections 10.3.1 (14) and
4.30.2, 4.30.3, and 4.30.5. Often VMS signs are procured under separate contract and
installed as owner furnished material; the designer shall meet with the SANDAG project
manager and systems engineer to determine if the VMS signs shall be included in the
contract documents and shall request specifications for the VMS signs if directed to include
the signs in the contract documents.
All new and station retrofit projects shall incorporate the latest VMS conforming to SANDAG
and the operator requirements. At SANDAG direction, the designer may be required to
research and recommend alternative VMS equipment. The designer shall include in the
contract documents, VMS systems and components that are consistent with latest equipment
6-53 March 2014

used on the existing system, unless otherwise directed by the SANDAG Systems Engineer.
The design shall include all necessary details for VMS installation including, but not limited to,
sign frame foundations, sign frames and/or mounting details, and cabling requirements from
Communication enclosures to VMS.
The VMS designer shall contact the SANDAG Project Manager and Systems Engineer to
find out if the Variable Message Signs will be procured under separate procurement contract
and furnished to the station construction contractor as owner furnished material or if the signs
specifications should be included in the construction contract. When signs are to be procured
and installed by the station construction contractor the specifications for the signs shall
require signs to conform to the same specifications and standards as those procured through
SANDAG’s most recent procurement contract to ensure the signs will be of equal or better
quality, unless otherwise directed by SANDAG’s Systems Engineer.
The VMS system shall interface with the existing AIM platform, as supplied by Arinc, via the
WAN/LAN. VMS system shall integrated into the existing system so that signs and audible
announcements can be controlled from Operations Control Center (OCC). VMS equipment
specified shall be capable of being programmed to communicate visual messages on one
platform or both platforms from central control.
6.9.2 Description
The following criteria shall be used when designing visual message sign (VMS) supports:
• Top of sign shall be mounted between 11 and 13 feet above the platform;
• VMS design load shall be 200 pounds (100 pounds from each sign mounting
bracket);
• Electrical power: As described in Section 6-9.5;
• Communications: As described in Section 6-9.4.
Support frames shall be designed to include the load of the signs, video surveillance camera
equipment and construction loads. VMS sign frame supports shall not deflect more than 0.5
inches from vertical at the top of the post under seismic or a wind load conforming to the
latest requirements of the CBC. The tip of the cantilever support arm shall not deflect more
the 2 inches horizontally under seismic or the CBC wind load.
6.9.3 Location VMS Signs, Frames, and Foundations

Design plans shall include four VMS Signs (two per platform).
Every two sided visual message sign shall either be mounted from a sign frame or from a
structure such as a platform canopy structure.
If the signs are mounted below the canopy structure they shall be located at the same offset
distance from the track and at the same heights as described below for the VMS sign frame
support and conform to the same structural wind loads and deflection criteria as described
above for VMS sign frame supports. Each two sided sign shall have two 1 inch conduits
running to junction boxes near the sign (one for electrical and one for communications). Half
6-54 March 2014

inch seal tight flexible conduit shall be run from the junction box to the VMS. The electrical
and communications cabling shall be the same as described below.
VMS sign frame supports shall be oriented perpendicular to the track with the center of the
mast located about 6 inches to 2 feet from the back edge of the station platform, unless
specific site conditions dictate otherwise and an alternate mast location is approved by the
SANDAG systems engineer on a site specific basis. The frame shall extend so the mast arm
extends to: a) 6.1 ft plus or minus 1 inch adjacent to tracks that are solely used for light rail
transit; b) 8.6 ft plus or minus 1 inch for tangent track and curved tracks with less than 12
degrees curves adjacent to track that is utilized by both freight trains and light rail transit
vehicles (with a CPUC determination of limited space); and c) 9.6 ft plus or minus 1 inch for
curved tracks with over 12 degree curves adjacent to track is utilized by both freight trains
and light rail transit vehicles in accordance with California Public Utility Commission (CPUC)
General Order (GO) 26-D requirements. NOTE: the 8.6 clearance on curved track with less
than 12 degree curves when the CPUC determines space is limited, if the CPUC does not
make that determination that space is limited, then the minimum dimension on curved track
shall be increased to 9.6 feet plus or minus 1 inch. At location on curved track where space
is limited the 9.6 feet plus or minus 1 inch clearance may be reduced in accordance with
section 3.16 of CPUC GO 26 and after the CPUC determines space is limited. The minimum
length of the mast arm from tip located closest to the track to bolted flange near the mast
shall not be less than 66 inches.
Typically, VMS frames and foundations shall be located from each end a distance equal to
approximately one fourth of the total length of the platform (e.g. total length of 360 feet /4 = 90
feet from each end of the station platforms).
If the typical VMS Sign Frame location is located within 30 feet of a planned shelter location,
then the designer shall perform line of sight calculations and make necessary adjustments to
the sign frame location to ensure the VMS visibility is maximized. The analysis should look at
scaled elevation view taken from the trackway that shows the location and height of the
shelter and the VMS sign and the line of sight to the top of the VMS sign as observed from
the eye of a passenger that is 5.5 feet above the platform and the passenger is standing 3
feet beyond the end of the shelter that is located furthest away from the VMS sign. If the top
of the VMS sign is located about 11 feet above the platform and the shelter overhang is less
than 11 feet above the platform, then the most desirable location for the VMS sign frame may
be half away between the adjacent shelters.
The designer shall share the results of the line of sight analysis with the SANDAG systems
engineer and the SANDAG project manager at a review meeting and provide a
recommendation on where to adjust the VMS frame and foundation location. The
recommendation should show the line of sight from the proposed new VMS sign location.
The objective of moving the VMS sign frame location is to maximize visibility of the sign by
trolley passengers while keeping shelters in locations that will provide coverage to
passengers in areas passengers are likely to gather while they are waiting for a trolley.
6.9.4 Communications Provisions

Etherwan 10/100/1000 Base T hardened media converters conforming to the requirements of
IEC 61000-6-2 EMC “Generic Standard Immunity for Industrial Environment” shall be DIN
6-55 March 2014

Rail Mounted inside the Variable Message Sign and be rated for a temperature range of -40
degrees F (-40 degrees C) to 167 degrees F (75 degree C).
Each Variable Message Sign shall have an Ethernet connection to the LAN switch located in
the Stations Communications house/cabinet. Ethernet connection to the LAN switch in the
Communications Enclosure or Room shall be via: a) a Category 6 cable terminated to the
rack mounted Category 6 patch panel or b) a 12 strand single mode fiber optic riser cable
(Corning Freedom LST or approved equivalent) with SC terminations, media converters, and
Category 6 patch cords with RJ-45 connectors at both ends.
Media converters in the Communications Enclosure shall be mounted in the 19 inch rack in
an Etherwan EMC1600 16 Bay Media Converter Chassis or approved equivalent.
6.9.5 Electrical Provisions

Each visual message board shall be supplied with single-phase, 3 wire, 120-volt AC, 60-
Hertz power having a voltage variation plus 10 percent and minus 15 percent, each double
sided VMS sign shall be on a dedicated 3 wire, 120 VAC 552 Watt circuit.
6.9.6 Raceways and Pullboxes

Each VMS Sign Frame shall be connected to the station electrical service panel and the
station Communications Enclosure via the Local Area Network raceway and pull box system
described in the Local Area Network (LAN) section.
6.9.7 VMS Messaging

The AIMs System at the OCC shall enable the VMS subsystem to function in conjunction
with the PA subsystem. For the pre-programmed messages VMS shall be able to display
equivalent text as announced on the PA subsystem simultaneously for the hearing impaired
passengers, in compliance with the ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).
The AIM system shall interface with the train control and / or other vehicle detection system to
provide information to the passengers.
The System shall provide automatic announcements that include:
• Information on route, final destination, time of arrival of the next the trains
approaching a particular platform – “Next Train”;
• Information on service interruptions or delays such as “The approaching train is not
in service, please stand clear”;
• Day, Date, and Time synchronized to a master clock at the OCC;
• Emergency instructions; and
• Other pre-recorded messages to be determined.
6-56 March 2014

6.10 Fare Collection Technology

6.10.1 General
Fare Collection Technology at LRT Stations is comprised of four types of equipment:
• Ticket Vending Machines (TVMs);

• Passenger Card Interface Devices (PCIDs);
• Ticket kiosks;
• Portable ticket trailers.
The designer shall indicate locations of Fare Collection Technology equipment on plans as
well as conduit locations. The specifications shall provide power and connectivity
requirements as identified in this design criteria and should be consistent with language used
in past projects, unless otherwise directed by SANDAG systems engineers.
Generally, platforms shall be designed for the fare collection equipment in accordance with
the Standard Plans. Where specific conditions dictate changes to the fare collection location
and conduit layout shown in the standard plans SANDAG, shall approve the layout prior to
final design. For location and clearance requirements, see Volume 1, Chapter 6 – Transit
Centers, “General Circulation and Access” Section.
Unless otherwise directed, station construction plans shall indicate that fare vending
equipment shall be procured under separate contract and installed by San Diego Trolley. For
more specific information regarding ticket vending machines, see the ticket vending machines
procurement specifications.
The plans and specifications shall also indicate that the station contractor shall submit a
written request to San Diego Trolley and the Engineer for the installation of fare vending
equipment, perform continuity and resistance tests on electrical conductors, and perform
ethernet and fiber optic tests. All cable and functional testing shall be completed prior to the
Contractor receiving partial or complete relief of maintenance of a station for schedule and
payment.
6.10.2 Locating Ticket Vending Machines and Passenger Card Interface Devices
Location of Ticket Vending Machines and Passenger Card Interface Devices shall conform to
the following:
• TVMs shall be positioned under station shelters where shelters are of sufficient size
and designed to accommodate TVMs. TVMs when under shelters shall be located to
minimize obstructing the area under the shelter, and positioned to minimize sun and
glare on the interface screen, and protect the TVM and patrons from rain. TVMs
shall be in well lit locations along the back of the platform and evenly distributed
along the platform. Lighting shall be configured to illuminate the front of the TVMs
without creating glare on the TVM display screen that would make it difficult to read.
The lighting should be configured to enable video surveillance systems to take
images of people standing near the ticket vending machines;
6-57 March 2014

• PCIDs shall be positioned at access points to a station that are easily accessible,
visible and on, but not obstructing, pathways for patrons entering the trolley station
platforms. All access points to a station platform shall have provisions for PCIDs. All
high volume access points shall be equipped with PCID equipment. The designer
shall not locate PCIDs in the landing areas above access ramps (generally extending
4 to 5 feet behind the top of ramp;
• TVMs shall be positioned to allow for queues at fare collection areas that do not
block through passenger traffic. Where stations are either elevated or subterranean
fare collection equipment (TVM & PCID) shall be located on plaza and mezzanine
areas. In addition placement shall allow for clear access for maintainability including
access to panels, and ability to remove and replace.
6.10.3 Ticket Vending Machine Equipment Pads and Connections

At each ticket vending machine location at the station the platform slopes shall not exceed 2
percent transverse and 2.4 percent longitudinal. The design of each TVM site shall conform
to the following requirements:
• TVMs shall be placed on eight inch thick reinforced concrete pads with dimensions
not less than 3.5 feet long by 2.5 feet wide;
• The pad surface shall be as level as possible to minimize the gap between
equipment bases and finish surface of pad;
• Two 1-inch conduits (one for power and one for communications) shall be shown on
the plans connecting the nearest communications and electrical pull boxes to and
through the concrete TVM pad at a point near the center of the TVM in conformance
with Section 6.6 “Cabling Raceways and Access Points” of this Design Criteria;
• A properly sized three-conductor (Line/Neutral/Ground) THWN dedicated 120V, 60
Hz, 20 amp AC circuit with dedicated neutrals long enough to connect a TVM set on
the pad to the station electrical panel shall be coiled up in the nearest pull box. The
design shall identify dedicated breaker in the electrical panel. Circuit breakers shall
be left in the "off" position until after San Diego Trolley completes the Ticket Vending
Machine installation. Each TVM operates on primary power from a single-phase,
120-volt, 60-Hertz service having a voltage variation plus 10 percent and minus 15
percent. PCID wiring shall be comprised of a minimum of three #12 AWG insulated
conductors sized per the National Electrical Code (NEC);
• Cabling to connect TVMs to the Ethernet Network utilizing communications cabling
from the LAN switch to the TVM site shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 6.7 “Cabling Standards” of this Design Criteria.
6.10.4 Passenger Card Interface Device Connections
At each passenger card interface device (PCID) location at the station the platform
slopes shall not exceed 2 percent transverse and 2.4 percent longitudinal. The design of
each PCID site shall conform to the following requirements:
• The owner furnished PCID shall be anchored into the platform at the designated
locations;
6-58 March 2014

the plans shall connect the nearest communications and electrical pull boxes to the
center of the PCID location in conformance with Section 6.1.7 “Raceways and Pull
Boxes” of this Design Criteria;
• Each conduit at the PCID location shall have a treaded coupler set flush with the
finish surface and contain a threaded plug in it;
• A properly sized three-conductor (Line/Neutral/Ground) THWN 120V, 60 Hz, 20 amp
AC electrical circuit with dedicated neutrals long enough to connect a PCID set over
the conduits to the UPS in the station communications enclosure or room shall be
coiled up in the nearest pull box. Each PCID shall be connected to the UPS via: a) a
backboard mounted four gang electrical box and ESO Cord that plugs into the UPS,
or b) a UPS electrical panel. Each PCID operates on primary power from a single-
phase, 120-volt, 60-Hertz service having a voltage variation plus 10 percent and
minus 15 percent. PCID wiring shall be comprised of a minimum of three No. 12
AWG insulated conductors sized per the National Electrical Code (NEC);
• Cabling to connect PCIDs to the Ethernet Network utilizing communications cabling
from the LAN switch to the PCID site shall conform to the requirements specified in
Section 6.7 “Cabling Standards” of this Design Criteria.
6.10.5 Permanent Ticket Kiosks and Portable Ticket Trailers

At stations identified as requiring accommodations for a permanent ticket kiosk or portable
ticket trailer in the preliminary engineering or project scope of work, an eight inch thick
reinforced concrete kiosk or trailer pad with dimensions not less than 4 feet 1 inch (169
inches) long by 6 feet 2 inches (74 inches) wide shall be included in the station design plans.
The identified kiosk or trailer pad site shall have a minimum vertical clearance of 7 feet 6
inches (92 inches) above the pad. The pad shall be located in an open area on the primary
special event boarding platform in a location that is easy to access and convenient to persons
entering the station while not impeding normal pedestrian and train movement.
Portable ticket trailers are often used at stations serving low numbers of special event
patrons. At stations likely to regularly serve significant numbers of special event patrons,
SANDAG shall include in the project a permanent ticket kiosks.
The design shall provide for the following:
• A paved access road a minimum of 7 feet wide leading from the parking lot or
nearest road to the pad;
• A paved access road a minimum of 7 feet wide leading from the parking lot or
nearest road to the pad;
the plans connecting the nearest communications and electrical pull boxes to and
through the pad at a point near the power and communications cables entry point to
the kiosk or trailer in conformance with Section 6-1.7 “Raceways and Pull Boxes” of
this Design Criteria;
6-59 March 2014

• The design shall include power cabling from the station electrical panel to the kiosk
or trailer site. The kiosk or trailer shall be served from a dedicated circuit.
Depending on the trailer or kiosk the dedicated circuit shall be either a 220V AC 60
Hz 20 A circuit or a 120V 60 Hz 30 A circuit. The designer shall contact San Diego
Trolley fare revenue department to find out the type of dedicated circuit required;
• Cabling to connect kiosks and trailers to the Ethernet Network utilizing
communications cabling from the LAN switch to the kiosk or trailer site shall conform
to the requirements specified in Section 6.19 “Cabling Standards” of this Design
Criteria.
6.11 Traction Power System SCADA

Traction power substations shall be connected to the Local Area Network switch in the
nearest trolley station’s communications enclosure or room. The connection shall conform to
the requirements described in Section 6.18 of this Design Criteria.
Traction power substations communicate to the AIMs system at the Operations Control
Center (OCC) utilizing standard TCP/IP protocols. The traction power SCADA system
utilizes Modbus protocol.
All IP Addressing shall conform to the MTS IP Addressing Standard and all bit addressing
shall be consistent with that which has been developed in past SANDAG and MTS projects.
6.12 Signaling System SCADA

Non-vital Railway Signaling SCADA system connection at each interlocking shall be
connected to the Local Area Network (LAN) switch in the nearest trolley station’s
communications enclosure or room. The connection shall conform to the requirements
described in Section 6.3 of this Design Criteria.
The Non-vital Railway Signaling SCADA system communicates with the AIMs system at the
Operations Control Center (OCC) utilizing standard TCP/IP protocols. The Non-vital Railway
Signaling SCADA system utilizes Genesis protocols.
6.13 Bi-Directional Train to Wayside Communications

6.13.1 General
The Bi-Directional Train-to-Wayside Communication system at each station shall be
connected to the Local Area Network (LAN) switch in the nearest trolley station’s
communications enclosure or room. The connection shall conform to the requirements
described in Section 6.3 of this Design Criteria.
The Bi-Directional Train-to-Wayside Communication system communicates with the AIMs

system at the Operations Control Center (OCC) utilizing standard TCP/IP protocols. The Bi-
Directional Train-to-Wayside Communication system utilizes Genesis protocols.
6-60 March 2014

6.13.2 Equipment Compatibility

The TWC interrogator shall be H&K HCS-V, or approved equivalent, capable of bi-directional
data transmission. Data rate shall meet a minimum of 100 kBits per second. The TWC
equipment shall be compatible with the existing LRV and wayside TWC system. The
Contractor shall demonstrate by performing tests that the new TWC equipment is compatible
with the existing system. Wayside interrogators, transmits and receives a 100 KHz
interrogation signal through a loop antenna installed between the rails. On receipt of the
interrogation signal, while the LRV antenna is over a loop, the vehicle-borne transponder
responds with a low power signal encoded with a 19-bit message. On validation by the
interrogator, the message is passed on to specific electronic application cards in the
interrogator, transmits and receives information over the WAN via the Ethernet port and
network switch.
6.13.3 TWC Loop Antenna and Loop Converter

The TWC loop antenna shall be constructed in a figure “8” pattern as shown on the Plans
and specified in these Special Provisions. Each loop antenna shall be connected to a tuned
filter/loop connector (TF/LC) adjacent to the loop as required, and via shielded twisted No. 12
AWG, 2 pair conductor to the loop interrogator, from the TF/LC.
The TWC Loop Converter shall be the H&K HCS-V-LC (Part number 44 783 040) or
approved equivalent, and be capable of providing communications required for TWC system
operation.
Each loop antenna shall consist of one turn of insulated, stranded, copper wire suitable for a
30-year life in direct burial wet and dry applications, with a conductor size minimum of No. 8
AWG. The wire shall meet the requirements of Article 310 of the National Electrical Code.
Insulation shall be type RHW, RHH, USE, or XHHW with a thickness of 45 mils.
6.13.4 Interrogators
Interrogators shall provide the functional information required to deliver a complete functional
system.
The interrogator units shall be H&K type HCS-V bi-directional units, or approved equivalent,
and shall be able to be mounted in the existing standard EIA-310-D, 19 inches rack. The
interrogator shall have an overall width of 19 inches, approximately 8.5 inches deep, and
occupy approximately 3U of rack space.
The interrogator shall contain a backplane, power-supply, transmit/receive cards, loop

scanner card, timing card, shift register/buffer card and an application backplane. It shall be
powered by 120 volts ac, 60 Hz source. The interrogator card rack shall contain space for
application cards, which plug into the backplane and receive power from the interrogator
power supply.
6-61 March 2014

6.13.5 Communications Card

The interrogator unit shall include serial communication card with a standard RJ-45 Ethernet
port for connection to the gigabit LAN Ethernet network switch using standard TCP/IP
protocols.
6.13.6 Serial Output/Input Card

The serial output/ input card shall take data input and output signals from the back-plane of
the TWC interrogator unit, provide signal level shifting to RS-232 levels, and provide RS-232
data input and output signals to a DB-9 male connector. The serial output/input card shall
output train, route, and loop identification information.
The serial output/ input card shall fit in the interrogator’s card rack and transmit and receive
data and control inputs through a connector that plugs into the back-plane of the interrogator
unit.
The serial output/ input card shall process transmit and receive data thru a MAX232
integrated circuit, or an approved equivalent, with a master/ slave configuration. The mating
half of the connector shall be a standard DB-9 male connector. Pin 5 shall be connected to
ground, Pin 2 shall be RXD, and Pin 3 shall be TXD, unless otherwise approved. Pin
selections shall conform to industry standards.
The serial output card shall be a printed circuit board. The printed circuit board and all
components connected to the board shall be industrial grade or better.
The power-supply and ground for the serial output card shall be obtained from the back-plane
of the interrogator.
The serial output/ input card shall transmit the same information via the Ethernet port.
6.14 Electrical Grounding and Power Surge Protection

Every communications enclosure (cabinet, precast building, and room) shall contain
grounding and electrical surge suppression system as described herein. All cabling from field
devices or facilities external to the communications enclosure shall be protected from surges
utilizing surge arresters in conformance with standard practices.
Racks, communications equipment, and electrical equipment shall be grounded in

conformance with applicable regulations, manufacturers’ requirements, and standard
practices. Communications cabinets, buildings or rooms shall be grounded with a grounding
system. The grounding system shall consist of grounding bars and ground rods that are
interconnected with bare copper stranded wire and bonding connections to concrete encased
electrodes (rebar) in cabinet, building and room foundations. The ground conductor, ground
rods, and bonding connections shall be connected by permanent bonding methods.
Subsurface electrical ground system elements shall be permanently bonded by exothermic
welding methods. Mechanical connections shall not be accepted as a permanent bond. The
communication grounding system shall be bonded to the Station’s Grounding Electrode
System. See Section 2.7.4 “Grounding”. If the Communications cabinets, buildings or rooms
are to be located at existing stations with more than one grounding system, the
6-62 March 2014

communication’s ground system shall be connected to the grounding electrode system of the
electrical service that supplies power to the communication equipment.
Enclosure shall have surge suppressor installed between the incoming utility AC source and
the grounding bar.
The surge suppression shall be constructed using multiple surge current diversion arrays of
metal oxide varistors (MOV), matched to a variance of ±1 volt. The array shall consist of
multiple gapless metal oxide varistors, with each MOV individually fused. The arrays shall be
designed and constructed in a manner that ensures MOV surge current sharing. No gas
tubes, silicon avalanche diodes or selenium plates/rectifiers shall be used. The status of each
array shall be continuously monitored and a green LED shall be illuminated if the array is in
full working order. All protection modes, including N-G, shall be monitored and internally
fused for compliance with NEC article 110.9, 110.10 and 285.
Surge suppressors protecting electronic components shall conform to UL 1449 third edition
and have the following minimum ratings:
• Clamping Voltage, < 330 Volts;

• 1350 joules at 8X20 (s pulse);
• Spike Capacity, 52,000 amps;
• Protection Mode, L-N, N-G, L-G;
• Let-through Voltage, < 35 Volts;
• Response Time, < 1ns.
The Surge Suppression System shall be installed in all new communications enclosure and
wired to the electrical subpanel. Surge Suppression System shall be of the Liebert AccuVar
Transient Voltage Surge Protection (TVSS) device, or an approved equal.
The TVSS shall be rated for a Surge Current of 65KA per mode, be sized for the existing
nominal voltage and electrical source configuration at each station, have all protection modes
(Line to Neutral or Line to Line, Line to Ground, Neutral to Ground) that are appropriate for
the type of existing electrical configuration at each site, and have LED’s, Enhanced Electro-
Magnetic Interference / Radio Frequency Interference, and alarm relay contacts (normally
closed) to provide status and malfunction information. The TVSS and all components in the
suppression path (including all current diversion components) maximum continuous
operating voltage shall be greater than 125 percent of the nominal system operating voltage
to ensure the ability of the system to withstand temporary root-mean-square (RMS) over-
voltage. The operating frequency range of the TVSS shall be at least 47-63 Hz.
The TVSS shall be capable of protecting against and surviving at least 6000 10 kA surges
per ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 Category C without failing or degrading the UL 1449 surge
suppression ratings by more than 5 percent.
All protection modes of the TVSS shall be internally fused with I²T capability to allow the
suppressor’s maximum rated transient current to pass through the TVSS without fuse
6-63 March 2014

operation. If the rated I²T characteristic of the fusing is exceeded, then the fusing shall open
in less than on millisecond and clear both high and low-impedance fault conditions. The
fusing shall interrupt up to 200kA symmetrical fault current with 600VAC applied. The
TVSS’s over-current protection circuit shall be monitored and provide indication of
suppression failure and operability. Conductor level fuses or circuit breakers internal or
external to the TVSS shall not be acceptable.
The system performance ratings shall be in conformance with UL 1449 listing ratings for
IEEE C62.41 Category B3 impulse waveforms of 6 kV 1.2 x 50 microseconds, 3 kA 8 x 20
microsecond wave shapes. The maximum UL 1449 listed surge rating for all protection
modes shall not exceed 400 volts. The response time shall be 0.5 nanoseconds.
The SSA’s shall provide a minimum of 50 dB noise attenuation for 50 ohm measurement
method, 10 kHz to 500 MHz The SSA shall be UL 1283 listed.
If the Contractor proposes to furnish equivalent equipment to that identified in these Special
Provision, then the equivalent equipment then the Contractor shall demonstrate that the
equipment provides all of the same or greater functionality than the equipment specified.
Proposed equivalent products shall comply with all of functional, operational, material, design
submittal, and all other requirements identified in these Special Provisions and shown on the
plans. The equipment shall be UL listed.
All duplex outlets located near the MTS 19 inch equipment racks shall be protected by the
TVSS. The Contractor shall determine the Nominal System Operating Voltage and Electrical
Source Configuration at each site and size the TVSS accordingly. The TVSS shall protect
circuits rated for 120 Volts, 950 Watts, 1,400 VA, except as otherwise specified.
6.15 Uninterruptible Power System and Power Generation Facilities

Each Communications Cabinet, Building, or Room shall contain an Uninterruptible Power
Supply System (UPSS) designed to provide continuous power to the following
communications and station equipment: WAN, LAN, PCID, Video Surveillance, Public
Address, Intrusion and Temperature Sensing PLC, and all fire life safety system loads in
conformance with federal and state requirements. Additional loads may be added to the
UPSS, when authorized or requested by the SANDAG Systems Engineer. The designer
shall make the SANDAG Systems Engineer aware of all requests for additional UPSS loads.
The UPSS shall be sized to provide power to connected loads and be provided with
adequate batteries for a runtime period of not less than 90 minutes for the connected loads.
When the station is equipped with backup or emergency power generation equipment, the
power generation equipment shall be properly sized to supply power to the station UPSS
loads, and the UPS runtime shall be for a period of not less than 45 minutes.
A typical UPSS for Communications Cabinets will consist of a properly sized branch circuits
feeding dedicated UPS receptacles, cord and plug connected, rack mounted UPS’s, and cord
and plug connected loads. A typical UPSS for Communications Buildings or Rooms will
consist of a properly sized branch circuits, maintenance bypass switch panel, rack or floor
mounted UPS, and a dedicated panelboard for UPS powered loads.
6-64 March 2014

The UPS’s shall be provided with Network Management Card with environmental monitor
capabilities and a Dry Contact I/O Accessory, an Emergency Power Off function that will
allow activation by a contact closure from a remote location. The UPS’s Network
Management Card shall be connected to the LAN, and the Dry Contact I/O Accessory shall
be connected to the PLC for activation of the Emergency Power Off function. Refer to
Section 6.16, “Temperature Sensing, Intrusion Detection, and TWC Processing System” and
the “Typical PLC Wiring Diagram” of the Standard Plans for additional information.
The UPSS shall comply with Section 6.1.3 - “Environment”, and UPS’s shall meet the
following requirements:
6.15.1 Topology
The Communication Cabinet UPS’s shall by of the line interactive type, and Buildings and
Rooms UPS’s shall be of the double conversion online type.
6.15.2 Batteries
The battery system shall be of modular construction with field replaceable battery modules
housed within the UPS or additional enclosure. The batteries shall be of the valve regulated
lead acid type.
6.15.3 Voltages
UPS’s input and output voltage shall be compatible with the equipment requirements,
typically 110V for typical unenclosed stations.
6.15.4 Battery Charging

The UPS battery charging system shall incorporate overcharge protection to prevent battery
damage and to prevent batteries from emitting hazardous levels of combustible gases. The
recharge time of a battery plant shall not be greater than four times the discharge time period,
e.g., discharge 45 minutes, recharge 3 hours.
6.16 Temperature Sensing, Intrusion Detection, and TWC Processing System

All communications enclosures (cabinet, precast building and room) shall contain a remote
terminal unit (RTU) with temperature and intrusion sensors connected to it and network
connections enabling TWC system information from the Station Interrogator to be reduced
before forwarding it on to the OCC.
The RTU shall be programmed with two temperature thresholds. The first threshold will
initiate an alarm that will notify the OCC of communication enclosure over-temperature
issues, and when the second threshold is reach the system will initiate an organized shut
down of the equipment in the enclosure or room.
The RTU shall send alarms to the OCC when a door sensor senses an open door in the
station communications enclosure. Alarm activation shall be time delayed to allow
deactivation with a key or control code from inside Communications house or cabinet. An
intrusion alert occurs when the Communications house/cabinet door is opened. The ability at
OCC to read/write numeric identification numbers and log ingress and egress shall be
6-65 March 2014

provided. An intrusion alarm occurs if the alert is not deactivated within a selectable time
period. Alarms shall be indicated to the OCC via the RTU interface.
6.17 Bicycle Locker Networking Provisions

All bicycle locker locations shall have provisions installed for future network and electrical
connections.
A 1-inch communications conduit shall be installed from the bicycle locker location to the
nearest communications pull box or to the communications cabinet. An additional 1-inch
conduit shall be installed from the bicycle locker location to the nearest electrical pull box or
electrical panel to supply 120V AC power to the locker should it be necessary. Both conduits
shall have threaded PVC couplings on the ends and the tops set flush with the finish surface.
Threaded plugs shall be screwed into the couplings.
6.18 Axel Counters

In areas of the light rail system where there is railway signaling doesn’t control train
movements, axel counters can be used to identify vehicle movements for next train
messaging systems. These axel counters are considered to be non-vital network devices
and the information can be sent over the non-vital network. These devices shall be
networked using the Ethernet network and TCP/IP protocols.
6.19 Vehicle to Wayside Wi-Fi Wireless Local Network Communications

San Diego Trolley, Inc. is currently investigating an IEEE 802.11 Wi-Fi Wireless Local Area
Network (WLAN) solution to enable active real-time digital communications between the on
board vehicle radio equipment and wayside radio units distributed along the wayside and
linked to the OCC via the LAN and WAN connections.
Designer shall incorporate into future design plans vehicle to wayside Wi-Fi WLAN
communications that will enable bi-directional real time communication between the vehicle
and the wayside. The design of the system shall be fully compatible with the on board
vehicle Wi-Fi WLAN equipment to be selected by San Diego Trolley, Inc.
Typically, wireless to fiber optic network connections shall be made in the stations
communications cabinet. Wireless repeater units may be used to repeat the signal around
curves and obstructions. Additional connections to the fiber optic cable network may be
added if it will reduce system deployment costs and/or improve system performance and
reliability.
A Wi-Fi WLAN connection to the LAN and WAN shall be made in the communications
cabinet, room, or prefabricated building at each station.
6.20 Voice Radio Communication System

The existing Radio Communications System (RCS) provides two-way voice communication
between a dispatcher in the OCC, train operators, supervisors, maintenance personnel, and
security personnel. The radio system shall provide working level, duplex voice channel
6-66 March 2014

coverage over the entire SDTl service territory. MTS is in the process of upgrading the RCS
system to a Simulcast RCS system.
6.20.1 RCS Upgrades to Accommodate New Territory

Designers of new territory, new line segments or line extension projects, shall analyze the
Simulcast RCS planned to be installed by MTS’s maintenance vendor Day Wireless and
evaluate the existing system and line segment corridor, determine required system
enhancements to extend coverage area to cover new line segment, prepare
recommendations, design system enhancements, and prepare contract documents required
to expand the existing Simulcast RCS in order to link the project area. These enhancements
of the existing system shall include a review of existing radio system facilities and equipment
located on mountain tops, in existing line segments at various points along trolley lines, and in
the communications rooms at the Operations Control Center (OCC).
The designer shall contact and obtain current Simulcast RCS system information from Tom
Tupta at SDTI and MTS/ SDTI radio system maintenance vendor, currently Day Wireless.
MTS’s point of contact at Day Wireless is Fernando Hernandez.
Should the designer of the new line segment determine existing system equipment: a) is no
longer being manufactured; b) does not comply with to the latest regulatory requirements and
more restrictive standards; or c) will be over 10 years old by the time the line extension or
new line is planned to being revenue service, then the designer shall recommend a
substantive overhaul to the existing radio system. The designer shall identify all components
requiring overhaul and prepare a scope of work with cost estimate for the work required to
substantively overhaul the radio system.
If it is determined that existing system only needs to be enhanced with additional links, then
the designer shall develop and submit recommendations with cost estimates to the project
manager detailing ways to link the project area to the SANDAG project manager and
SANDAG systems engineer for approval. The designer shall include in the design of the
system the new radio communication links required.
The designer shall also make recommendations regarding technological changes that should
be considered that would improve the system and ensure the system remains compliant with
current industry standards and requirements.
Build-Out expanded coverage shall be part of the radio subsystem planning. Including: a) RF
propagation studies utilizing software-based coverage prediction and simulation tools that
analyze geographic factors to determine equipment configurations to ensure adequate
simulcast RCS coverage, b) location of additional transmitter/ receiver repeater sites, b)
additional right of way access rights required, c) facilities, and d) equipment upgrades to
accommodate the enhanced simulcast RCS system.
OCC spatial equipment needs shall review existing conditions and provide revised equipment
rack layouts. Analysis of the OCC needs shall be performed in conjunction with other OCC
system upgrades required to accommodate the new light rail territory and other planned
enhancements to the OCC, including but not limited to Centralized Train Control (CTC),
VMS, PA, and Video Surveillance systems enhancements.
6-67 March 2014

RCS enhancements shall be shown in the OCC Facility Enhancement recommendations.
New equipment shall be capable of operating with 12.5 kHz bandwidth capabilities, and,
6.25 kHz if available. New remote receivers shall be added as needed. New receivers shall
be compatible with existing equipment such that new equipment audio may be "voted" with
the existing remote receivers' audio. New transmitter equipment, shall be capable of
supporting transmissions with a 12.5 kHz bandwidth and if available, 6.25 kHz.
6.20.2 Existing RCS Frequencies

SDTl is operating Operations Channels 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 on transmit frequencies 160.665
MHz, 160.380 MHz, 160.710 MHz, 161.295 MHz, 161.565 MHz, and 160.530 MHz, and
receive frequencies 160.935 MHz, 160.905 MHz, 160.415 MHz, 161.295 MHz, 160.755
MHz, and 160.530 MHz, respectively.
Table 6-3. – RCS Frequencies
Channel No. Transmit Frequency Receive Frequency Site Locations

1 160.655 Point Loma
San Ysidro, Iris,
H Street, Point Loma,
1 160.935
Old Town, Qualcomm,
Central
2 160.380 San Miguel
Encanto, Helix,
2 160.905
Central, Point Loma
3 160.710
Central, San Ysidro,
Iris, H Street,
3 161.415 Point Loma, Old Town,
Qualcomm, Encanto,
Helix
4 SIMPLEX 161.295 161.295
Point Loma,
5 161.565 San Miguel, Old Town,
Qualcomm
San Ysidro, Iris,
H Street, Point Loma,
5 160.755 Encanto, Helix,
Central, Old Town,
Qualcomm
6 SIMPLEX 160.530 160.530
6-68 March 2014

6.20.3 Additional Radio Frequencies

An interference study shall be performed whenever a new radio frequency is proposed within
the SDTl service territory. Mathematical calculations of intermodulation products shall be
made and filter cavity requirements identified at any transmitter site, or proposed site,
affected by the additional frequency.
The designer will also be responsible for coordinating the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) required licensing.
The designer shall perform a site evaluation study before locating equipment.
6.20.4 Transmitters
Transmitter sites shall have two redundant sets of equipment, with the exception of the
antenna and backup battery supply. The equipment shall include a band pass cavity located
before the transmitter, to protect against interference defined in this section, and a backup
power supply. The backup set of equipment shall automatically be brought on-line whenever
the primary set of equipment fails to function properly.
A clear voice test shall be conducted whenever a new radio transmitter site is considered.
The test shall be designed to determine the suitability of the site prior to performing
equipment installation. A second test shall be conducted following equipment installation to
ensure compliance with the signal strength requirements set below.
The system coverage shall be the signal strength above a minimum of 12 dB SlNAD signal
using a specific effective radiated power transmission for the test and measured over the
entire length of the respective designated line, except that portions of the line having less
than this coverage shall total not more than 500 feet in any 10-mile length of the designated
line;
A Radius P200 portable radio unit or equivalent, transmitting from all points over the entire
length of the designated line, shall produce, at one or more receiver repeaters on the
channel, a signal strength above a minimum 12 dB SlNAD signal. The overlap of this
coverage between two adjacent receiver-repeaters shall extend not less than 500 ft.
A test shall be conducted to determine whether radio frequency interference from the newly
installed radio equipment, i.e., transmitter noise, receiver desensitization, or intermodulation
product interference will, in fact, detrimentally affect the operation of existing radio equipment
in the general area.
A test shall be conducted to determine whether radio frequency interference from existing
radio equipment, i.e., transmitter noise, receiver desensitization, or intermodulation products
interference, will detrimentally affect the operation of the newly installed equipment.
6.20.5 Receivers
Receiver sites shall be identified as required to provide compliance with the clear voice test
specified in Section 3.6.2.3. The receiver equipment shall be similar to the transmitter
equipment, including backup battery supply, except it shall not rebroadcast the voted receiver
signal.
6-69 March 2014

6.20.6 Portable Radios

Portable radios shall be Radius P200 or an approved equal. An approved equal radio will be
one that meets the technical specification of the P200 and be chargeable by a Motorola
multiple unit charger that accepts a Motorola battery pack. The radio's selectable frequencies
shall include the frequencies indicated in Section 6-20.2, Existing RCS Frequencies.
6.20.7 Mobile Radios

Each LRV and designated automobile will be equipped with a 40-watt Motorola MaxTrac 300,
or an approved equal mobile radio. An approved equal radio will be one that meets the
technical specification for the MaxTrac 300 and, in the case of LRV equipment, has an
emergency alarm identification unit and a silent alarm switch. The radio's selectable
frequencies shall include the Operations Channels A, B, and C and the yard operations
channel.
6.20.8 Operation Control Center

The OCC consists of operator consoles. A controller has the ability to operate any of the six
radio communications frequencies from each console. Each console identifies the transmitter
keyed and provides multiple indication of receiver signal vote selection.
6.21 Video Surveillance Systems

The project design, installation, testing and acceptance shall be approved and witnessed by
MTS Security, IT, Safety and Risk Management departments.
The station VSS system components shall be compatible with the MTS existing VSS Avigilon
equipment. The Contractor shall facilitate integration of the new station VSS equipment into
the existing VSS equipment and coordinate with MTS personnel the design, implementation
and testing details of the new equipment affecting the existing system.
The Video Surveillance System (VSS) should be designed for every day safety and security
requirements as well as revenue protection, anti-graffiti, anti-crime and anti-terrorist
applications requiring the identification of unknown people (i.e. facial recognition) and objects
depicted within images (i.e. license plates). The VSS is used for video surveillance of the
station platforms. At some stations, the VSS is also used for video surveillance of station
indoors (station concourse), tunnels, station surrounding areas (i.e. station plaza, station
elevators, parking lots, stairs and ramps, bus stops, etc.) and other facilities (e.g. Operations
control center, maintenance yards, etc.). In addition, the VSS cameras can also be provided
for coverage of location where money is intended to be exchanged (fare collection). The
quantity and location of cameras will depend on the type and size of station.
All new VSS installations shall utilize Day/Night IP Cameras with a minimum of 5.0 MP or
higher (depending on the locations only). Whenever is practical, the IP cameras shall be
supplied dc power using Power-Over-Ethernet (POE) technology.
The station VSS cameras shall provide for 100 percent coverage for inside stations, station
train platforms, tunnels, station elevators, pedestrian underpass, waiting areas and
stairs/ramps. This coverage shall be achieved by use of Fixed IP Cameras.
6-70 March 2014

The design of the fixed cameras (placement; elevation; camera tilt; and Vertical and
Horizontal Fields of View) shall allow for following resolution:
• Forensic Detail: Priority targets (underpass, station platform, TVMs/PCIDs, parking

exit/entrance, Stairs/Steps) require detailed coverage – at least 5.0MP camera or
higher;
• General Detail: Remaining station areas – at least 5.0 MP camera.
The requirements to the VSS design for these areas of video surveillance shall be
determined based on the priorities input from the MTS stakeholders, and MTS Security
personnel.
Within the Station Communications Enclosure (cabinet, prefabricated building, or room) 19

inch rack shall reside an Avigilon Server that connects to the LAN 48 port switch (described in
Section 6.5) and a dedicated un-routable video surveillance network switch with a 1.2 subnet.
All cameras shall be connected to the un-routable network switch. Video images are
recorded in the station Avigilon Server at the station.
At the stations, the VSS system shall utilize a dedicated station network video recorder
(NVR), which is a high performance workstation for recording and storing of the station VSS
video data. Station NVR shall utilize Avigilon Recorder Server VSS management and
recording software. The station VSS PC hard-drives shall record and store video information
up to 15 days for all station cameras, and at the highest resolution and frame rates allowed
by the design of each implemented camera and the NVR (including 50% additional spare
storage for future growth).
The Video Monitoring systems at the Operations Control Center (OCC) shall be able to: a)
access and view selected cameras, and b) download selected video files. The network
protocol shall be TCP/IP for all subsystems.
The VSS System design shall locally record video and allow MTS personnel at OCC to
retrieve the video files via the WAN and LAN 48 port switch. Additionally, the system shall
support requests for remote monitoring by independent agencies (i.e., Local Police
Department having jurisdiction of where the system is located).
The network video system (VSS) shall be a fully digital system utilizing TCP/IP Ethernet
protocols. A virtual LAN (VSS VLAN) shall be partitioned to dedicate bandwidth solely for the
VSS subsystem. Network cameras shall be equipped to interface directly via single mode
fiber, described in section 6, to the Station Communications Enclosure and un-routable
network switch.
To accommodate current low bandwidth limitations for links between the VSS equipment at
MTS OCC Communications Room and remote MTS stations, station’s NVR shall support
downscaling of the video streams to low resolution (i.e. 4 CIF) for remote “live” views. Note
that downscaling will be used for a “live” view function only; the station NVR shall record
video of the high resolution cameras at their maximum resolution and frame rate. To facilitate
this function, station NVR shall utilize Avigilon Server software.
The station NVR shall support local and remote retrieval/download of recorded video.
6-71 March 2014

For local retrieval, the station NVR shall support export of the recorded video into DVD or
external hard drive media. The remote retrieval of the stored video (recorded at its full
resolution and frame rate) over the low bandwidth leased lines and/or fiber line from the MTS
facility is expected to be done during off-peak hours.
Such download shall be configured as a low priority function, which should not interfere with
the performance of the remaining station subsystems.
All stored/retrieved video recording shall provide for evidence of authenticity (no video
tampering took place), so that it could be submitted in the court of law as evidence,
As per the stakeholder input, for non-critical areas with the least amount of human traffic, use
of motion and audio detection software is allowed, which could enable slowing down of the
recording speed when there is no motion (e.g. during off or night hours) and speeding up the
recording when motion is detected. This can be used to minimize the storage capacity
requirements.
The network camera system shall deploy management software to automatically find and set
up IP address, show connection status, and configure and manage firmware upgrades for
multiple camera locations. To optimize bandwidth and image quality, the network camera
system shall have a wide range of compression features, enabling the system to view events
at H.264 and/or JPEG 2000 video compression while recording.
For enhanced security, network cameras shall be equipped with remote input and output
ports for monitoring other security and alarm devices such as door contacts, smoke detectors
and temperature sensors, light or other switches or alarm relays.
Activation of these I/O devices will cause the network camera to stream full video and
generate activity reports.
Use of Megapixel IP cameras is encouraged for the majority of the station video surveillance
applications. Megapixel images provide for the desired pixel-per-foot resolutions utilizing less
cameras. As a result, even though Megapixel cameras are typically more expensive than
traditional (4 CIF) cameras, however, they will more than compensate from the reduction of
the number of cameras.
The designer shall produce storage design calculations showing that the capacity of video
storage hard-drives is adequate. Note that typically such calculations include a variety of the
various cameras types reflecting their specific frame rates, resolutions and compression
types. The compression types and rates typically depend on a particular VSS Software
Vendor and the designer shall provide the corresponding NVR storage requirement
calculation as a part of their VSS design submittal. Also, to support future growth, the
performance and storage of the station NVR equipment shall be rated to handle additional 50
percent of similar station VSS equipment.
As a part of the design submittals, the designer shall provide for MTS Engineering all
necessary calculations for performance and storage requirements of the VSS system and
identify adequate and up-to-date equipment/software fully compatible with the existing VSS
Equipment in MTS OCC.
6-72 March 2014

At minimum, the station design shall provide for RAID 5 or 6 redundancy for the station NVR
hard-drives capable of recording and storing video information for 15 days (including
additional 50 percent spare storage allocated for future needs).
The unroutable network switch at the station shall be partitioned for VSS as VSS Virtual Local
Area Network (VSS VLAN). The designer shall produce calculations showing that allocated
VSS VLAN bandwidth is sufficient to serve all station VSS System needs. This Virtual Local
Area Network (VLAN) capability shall reside in the network switch hardware. Additional
bandwidth shall be allocated depending on the station size and number of VSS camera
locations.
6.22 Phone Service Provisions and Public Pay Phones

6.22.1 Payphone Services
SANDAG and the system operator will request that the San Diego Trolley pay phone service
vendor furnish and install the pay phones at the station and provide a text telephone at
stations forecast to have high ridership.
Provisions for these subsystems shall meet the requirements of specified herein.
Provisions for a minimum of one coin-operated telephone shall be provided at each station
unless otherwise directed by the SANDAG Director of MM&PI and at least one location in the
associated waiting areas stubbed for a phone.
Each pay phone location shall have two 1 inch conduits (one for communication the other for
electrical) connecting the payphone location to the nearest set of communications and
electric pull boxes. Each conduit at each payphone location shall have a threaded coupling
set flush with the finish surface. Each coupling shall have a threaded plug installed in it.
Designer shall specify the installation of phone lines shall be placed from the phone company
service point on the back board in the communications enclosure or room to the locations at
which there are plans to initially install phones.
Public phones should be located near the waiting areas for use by patrons entering the
system. A clear and level area 30 inches by 48 inches shall be provided at each pay phone
for forward or side approach by a wheelchair. The designer shall specify half of the phones
mounted with the highest operable part 48 inches above the floor (forward approach), and
half of the phones mounted with the highest operable part 54 inches above the floor (side
approach).
At least one phone location shall be equipped with a volume control and provide
corresponding signage.
Subsystems shall be compliant with federal, state, and local laws such as the Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA) and applicable National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA) codes and
standards relating to public transportation and communications systems. All telephones shall
comply with the requirements of ADAAG, Sections 4.30, 4.31, & 10.3.1 (12) and Title 24, Part
2, Section 1117B.2.
6-73 March 2014

If an interior public phone is provided in a transit facility, or if four or more are provided at a
station entrance and one is interior, one public text telephone must be provided according
ADAAG, Section 4.1.3(17)(c).
The Telephone Subsystem shall provide voice payphone services via the local telephone
service provider. All communications devices, cables, protected terminals, and other
interconnect equipment shall be grounded according to the phone service provider’s and pay
phone manufacturer’s standards. Each communications enclosure or room shall identify
space conforming to the minimum requirement of the utility phone service provider to able the
phone service provider to install the phone service point of interface (POI).
6.22.2 Elevator Emergency Phone

Elevator emergency telephones shall be integrated into each elevator cab installed in stations
to provide a direct means of emergency communications from a station patron, located inside
the elevator, to the OCC. The design shall conform to ASME A17.1 latest edition, Safety
Code for Elevators and Escalators, and ADA design guidelines.
The instrument shall be hands-free and have only a single push button to initiate an
emergency call. The instrument shall not have a dial pad or a corded handset. The
instrument shall be flush mounted and integrated into the elevator control panel. Each
telephone shall be served by a local telephone service provider with no local parallel or 'party-
line' wiring between instruments allowed.
6.22.3 Phone Company Interface

Design plans shall show the installation of phone service conduit from the point of interface
(POI) shown on the backboard to the existing phone companies facilities to the station
communications enclosure or room. The designer shall work closely with the SANDAG utility
coordinator and the phone company’s new service coordinators to identify the point of
connection. Contract documents shall require conduit with pull rope be sized and installed in
accordance with phone company standards and requirements.
Typically the phone company will require a dedicated, minimum 2-inch size conduit be
provided from a telephone utility box/pole to the communications house/cabinet 0.75-inch
plywood backboard for the utility company to bring in and terminate telephone company
cable or other communications lines to the phone service backboard.
6.23 Electromagnetic Compatibility

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) is the ability of equipment and systems to perform their
intended functions within a transit system electromagnetic environment. The primary
methods available for achieving electromagnetic compatibility are: shielding; grounding;
balancing; filtering; isolation; separation; orientation; circuit impedance; level control; and
cable design. The primary objective is to develop equipment and installation parameters that
shall assure an electromagnetically compatible system. This objective shall be achieved
through: Communications Systems equipment selection coordination; design; and
installation.
6-74 March 2014

The designer shall utilize design methods and practices that mitigate electromagnetic
interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI) from sources commonly associated
with a transit environment such as: traction power systems; the AC power distribution system;
the vehicle propulsion system; the signaling system; and nearby electrical utilities. Designers
shall design circuits so the location; routing; isolation; installation; grounding; and electrical
circuit, wire, and cables shielding mitigates undesirable EMI and RFI generation and circuit
coupling. Communications equipment shall meet FCC Regulatory Standards Part 15 for
radiation and conduction. Shielded cabinets and line filters shall be utilized as required to
meet these standards. Fiber optic cabling may be used where practical to eliminate
electromagnetic interference.
6.24 Fixed Double Sided Information Signs

Double sided information sign frames typically contain printed material showing train
schedule information, train route, and other information about the trolley system.
Each station shall have at least one double sided information sign frame per platform,
typically located near the fare vending machines. Design plans shall show the location of the
sign frames and reference the SANDAG standard sign frame drawing. Where non-standard
sign frames need to be designed to accommodate specific station conditions, the designer
shall provide a detailed design. To the extent feasible, non-standard frames shall be similar
in design to standard sign frames in size and construction.
6.25 Transit Next Bus Messaging System (TNBMS)

MTS has certain routes equipped with a Next Bus Messaging System. Trolley stations
designated transfer or transit centers or stations with dedicated bus bays within the station
limits shall be designed with power and communications conduit from the Next Bus sign
locations to a connection point for this system.
6.26 Interactive Kiosks

SANDAG may require station designers to locate and provide power and communications to
interactive information kiosk positions on or near platforms. Kiosks would be specified and
procured by SANDAG, and supplied to the installer. Except that SANDAG may specifically
add the design and development the interactive kiosks in the design scope. Should design of
the kiosk be added, SANDAG and the designer shall develop a basis of design for the kiosk
prior to design and specification.For general location and clearance requirements, see
Volume 1 – Transit Centers, “General Circulation and Access” Section. Interactive kiosks
shall have two 1-inch Schedule 40 PVC conduits. One conduit shall be designed to connect
to the local telephone service provider via the communications house/cabinet and the other
shall connect to a power circuit dedicated for the kiosk from the station electrical panel.
6.27 Enclosed Stations within Structures

The following requirements only apply to enclosed stations within structures, such as
buildings and tunnels.
6-75 March 2014

6.27.1 Fire Detection Systems

The fire alarm systems shall be provided in enclosed station facilities located in buildings or
tunnels. The fire detection sensors triggered by both heat and smoke detectors shall conform
to all applicable federal, state and local requirements (including NFPA, State, and local Fire
Marshall requirements).
The fire detection and emergency management panels shall be connected to the OCC via a
dedicated WAN/LAN interface. All fire detection equipment shall conform to the latest
requirements of NFPA Codes Section 12A, 72, 72-90 and 130.
6.27.2 Fire Alarms and Emergency Response and Management Systems

Fire alarms and Emergency Response and Management Systems shall be connected back
to the Operations Control Center via dedicated redundant ring fiber optic strands solely used
for Fire Alarm and Emergency Response and Management Systems. The Fire Alarm and
Emergency Response and Management systems shall be designed in full conformance of
NFPA and local responder requirements.
6-76 March 2014

Chapter 7.0 – Vehicles
7.0 VEHICLES
7.1 General
This section describes the basic attributes of the light rail vehicles (LRVs) to be used by
SANDAG/MTS. The vehicles shall be capable of full operation in either direction, be equipped
with fully functional and identical operator cabs at each end, and be fully compatible with the
existing vehicles for mixed consist (up to four LRVs) operation. Information contained herein
is intended to generally define the composite aspects of the vehicle which relate to the
interfaces between the vehicle and other portions of the light rail system.
The following LRV criteria shall apply with the understanding that changes will be forthcoming
when the specific actual vehicle is defined.
At the publication of this document the fleet of LRVs included the following Siemens’ models:
• U2 (Order SD1 – SD5) (Phasing Out);

• SD100 (SD6)Phasing Out);
• S70 Short (SD7);
• S70 Ultrashort (SD 8) (SD 70 US).
The designer shall confirm with SANDAG its current list of fleet LRV models in use.
7.2 Operations
7.2.1 Operating Hours
MTS plans to continue to operate 365 days a year, 22 hours a day.
7.2.2 Consists
Trains will operate in revenue service in consists of up to four cars in any combination of new
cars, S70/S70, SD7, SD8, US vehicles and SD100 vehicles. Under normal conditions,
vehicles will be coupled and uncoupled regularly in the yard, but they may be coupled on the
right-of-way also. These new cars will not operate in consists with U2 light rail vehicles.
7.2.3 Signaling System and Train to Wayside Communications

Each vehicle shall be equipped with a Philips VETAG bi-directional VECOM Train-to-
Wayside (TWC), or approved equivalent, communications system, fully compatible with the
existing VECOM/VETAG II system.
MTS is using 60 and 100 Hz track circuits for track occupancy detection. Frequencies used
for audio frequency overlays range from 200 Hz to 28 kHz.
7.2.4 Train Speed

MTS will operate train service at speeds reaching up to 80 km/h (50 mph) on the Blue and
Orange Lines and 90 km/h (55 mph) for the Green Line and the Mid-Coast Corridor.
7-1 March 2014

7.2.5 Annual Mileage

The expected annual mileage per vehicle is 100,000 miles.
7.3 Vehicle Design Constraints

7.3.1 Safety Requirements
Items, the failure of which could result in critical/catastrophic hazard, are designated “safety
critical.” A critical/catastrophic hazard is a situation which could result in an injury or fatality to
patrons or MTS personnel, or which could result in major damage to or a loss of a vehicle
function or equipment.
Specific safety critical items identified for the vehicle are:
• Removing positive tractive effort during braking;

• Braking and safe braking distances;
• Prevention of initial motion with any brake applied;
• Fire-resistance requirements;
• Inhibiting motion when doors are open;
• Prevention of door opening during motion;
• Direction control.
The vehicle contractor shall identify any additional safety critical items incorporated in its
proposed design.
7.3.2 Weight Criteria

Loading Definitions AW0 to AW4
As a baseline, a composite vehicle shall not weigh more than the following:
• Basis: 115 pounds (70.3 kilograms) per passenger;

• AW0: Empty Vehicle in running condition (Tare Load);
• AW1: Vehicle with all fixed seats occupied plus one operator (Seated Load);
• AW2: Vehicle with all fixed seats occupied plus one operator plus standees at 4
passengers/square meter (Design Load);
passengers/square meter (Crush Load);
passengers/square meter (Maximum Vehicle Structural Design Load).
The AW0 vehicle weight shall not exceed 97,500 pounds (44,225 kilograms)
7-2 March 2014

7.3.2.1 Weight Distribution

• Design of the vehicle and arrangement of attached equipment shall be such that the
following limits of weight variation and balance are maintained and shall be met with
the vehicle standing on level, tangent track.
• The weight supported by the motored trucks shall be within 2 percent of each other
at all car weights when referenced to the total weight on the motored trucks and even
distribution of passenger load;
• Weight carried by the center truck shall be no less than 20 percent and no greater
than 35 percent of the total vehicle weight under all load conditions and with even
passenger distribution;
• Load on wheels on one side of any truck shall not differ by more than 2 percent from
load on opposite side wheels for a vehicle weight of AW0 when referenced to the
weight on that truck.
7.3.3 Vehicle Identification

Vehicles shall be sequentially numbered from the first production car to the last.
Table 7-1. – Vehicle Identification and Numbering

Cars 1001-1014 November 1980 (SD1) Cars 1015-1024 November 1982 (SD2)
Cars 1025-1030 January 1986 (SD3) Cars 1031-1050 November 1988 (SD4)
Cars 1051-1071 July 1989 (SD5) Cars 2001-2052 October 1993 (SD6)
Cars 3001-3011 October 2004 (SD7) Cars 4001-4065 2012-2013 (SD8)
7.3.4 Wayside Noise Control/Criteria

Sound pressure levels at the wayside shall not exceed the values shown below for the
specified test condition on dry, level, tangent ballast and tie track.
Table 7-2. – Wayside Noise Control/Criteria
Condition Average Noise Level

All auxiliaries operating simultaneously, including air
72 dBA at 15.2 meters
conditioning, auxiliary power, and propulsion cooling
(50 feet) from track center line
system, with the car stationary.
Four-car train operating at any speed up to 40 mph,
maximum acceleration or maximum full service brake, 78 dBA at 15.2 meters
including dynamic brake cutout on all cars. Operation (50 feet) from track center line
on newly ground rail.
7.3.5 Electrical Noise Control Requirements

Harmonic currents produced by the vehicle in the running rails shall not exceed 30 percent of
the minimum guaranteed threshold of the associated signal circuits. Signal circuits shall have
a fundamental frequency of 100 Hz. Audio frequency overlays shall also be used for at-grade
crossing protection.
7-3 March 2014

Electrical, electronic, and communications systems and sub-systems shall operate without
either suffering or causing interference which may impact system operations and/or safety
because of electromagnetic interference.
7.3.5.1 Radio Frequency Interference Limits

When measured at a distance of 30 meters (100 feet) and tested in accordance with MIL-
STD-461, equipment shall not exceed the following interference limits:
• 109 dB over 1 microvolt/m/MHz at 150 kHz to 84 dB over 1 microvolt/m/MHz of

bandwidth at 30 MHz (straight line semi-log);
• 58 dB over 1 microvolt/m/MHz of bandwidth at 30 MHz through 90 MHz;
• 68 dB over 1 microvolt/m/MHz of bandwidth at 90 MHz through 8 GHz.
7.3.5.2 Electromagnetic Interference

The light rail vehicle and all installed equipment shall not cause electromagnetic interference
to the wayside signals or communications system of MTS, local railroads, or other
communications systems.
The equipment supplied under this Contract shall not interfere with the VECOM/VETAG II
Train to Wayside Communication system (TWC) in use throughout MTS’s LRT system.
7.3.5.3 Conductive Emission Limits

• From zero Hz to 40 Hz, 10 A maximum;
• From 40 Hz to 120 Hz, 1 A maximum.
7.3.6 Smoke and Flammability Requirements

All materials and construction shall meet the requirements of the latest edited version of
NFPA 130, Chapter 84, Vehicles, and related appendices.
The ceiling structural assembly shall meet a 30-minute minimum endurance rating when
tested in accordance with ASTM E112. The floor structural assembly shall meet a 15-minute
minimum endurance rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E112.
Total BTU content shall be no more than 90,000,000 BTU per vehicle. Heat release rate shall
be no more than 45,000,000 BTU/hour per vehicle.
7.3.7 Provisions for Individuals with Disabilities

Provisions for individuals with disabilities shall be per the rules and regulations of the
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) effective October 7, 1991, and shall comply with all
applicable requirements for new transit facilities. Only the minimum requirements for design
and construction are incorporated into the ADA Accessibility Guidelines. Related regulatory
provisions of other government agencies having jurisdiction shall be used for additional
guidelines in designing and constructing light rail vehicles to be free of architectural or other
transportation barriers.
7-4 March 2014

The latest editions of the code, regulation, and standard that are applicable at the time the
design is initiated shall be used. If a new edition or amendment to a code, regulation or
standard is issued before the design is completed, the design shall conform to the new
requirements to the extent practical, except that it shall conform to the new requirements if
required by the government agency enforcing the revised or new code, regulation, or
standard.
SANDAG/MTS is committed to providing full accessibility for mobility impaired persons,

particularly non-ambulatory persons in wheelchairs. Compliance with 49 CFR 38, subpart D,
§ 38.71 through § 38.87, inclusive, and any applicable portions of Title III of the Americans
with Disabilities Act of 1990, U.S. Department of Justice, is required.
Accessibility for mobility impaired passengers shall be provided by means of automatically

deployed and retracted bridge plates or approved equivalent devices. These ramps shall
comply in structure, width, and slope with the requirements of 49 CFR 38 (ADA).
Reference:
• Federal Register 49 CFR Parts 27, 37 and 38, Transportation for Individuals with
Disabilities, Final Rule
• U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers, Compliance Board, Technical
Assistance Manual
7.4 Vehicle Clearances

For overall clearance requirements in regards to track alignment dealing with horizontal and
vertical clearances, and curve clearances, see Section 3.1.
7.5 Vehicle Dimensions

For overall dimensions of the three LRV models listed above see the following figures:
• For U2 and SD100s (SD1-SD6) see Figure 7-1;

• For SD7 see Figure 7-2;
• For SD8 see Figure 7-3.
7-5 March 2014

Figure 7-1. – U2 and SD100 Vehicle Dimensions
7-6 March 2014

Figure 7-2. – SD7 Vehicle Dimensions
7-7 March 2014

Figure 7-3. – SD8 Vehicle Dimensions
7-8 March 2014

7.6 LRV Loading (lbs)

Loading for the U2 (SD1 through SD5) and SD100 (SD6) Models is as follows:
Axle Axle Axle

No. of No of
Loading Tare Wt. Total Wt. Load Load Load
Operators Pass.
P1 P2 P3
AW0 84,176 0 0 84,176 16,034 10,021 NA
AW1 84,176 1 65 94,406 17,983 11,238 NA
AW2 84,176 1 145 106,806 20,346 12.714 NA

AW3 84,176 1 185 113,006 21,526 13,452 NA
AW4 84,176 1 225 119,206 22,707 14,190 NA
Loading for the S70 Short (SD7) Model is as follows:
Axle Axle Axle

No of No. of Total
Loading Tare Wt. Load Load Load
Operators Pass. Wt.
P1 P2 P3
AW0 96,423 0 0 96,423 16,290 15,176 16,745
AW1 96,423 1 65 106,653 18,018 16,786 18,521
AW2 96,423 1 162 121,688 20,558 19,153 21,132
AW3 96,423 1 212 129,438 21,868 20,372 22,478

AW4 96,423 1 261 137,033 23,151 21,568 23,797
Loading for the S70 Ultra-short (SD8) Model is as follows:
Axle Axle Axle

No. of No. of
Loading Tare Wt. Total Wt. Load Load Load
Operators Pass.
P1 P2 P3
AW0 96,132 0 0 96,132 19,226 9,614 19,226
AW1 96,132 1 61 105,742 21,149 10,573 21,149

AW2 96,132 1 147 119,072 23,814 11,907 23,814
AW3 96,132 1 190 125,737 25,147 12,574 25,147
AW4 96,132 1 233 132,402 26,480 13,241 26,480
7-9 March 2014

Highest recorded SD8 as-built tare weight is 96,132 pounds. Loadings are calculated using a
worst case weight distribution of only 20 percent on the trailer trucks (P2) with the remainder
equally divided on the power trucks (P1 and P3) as allowed by the vehicle technical
specification.
(Refer to Figures 7-1, 7-2 and 7-3 above for load axle points)
7.7 Electrical
Line Voltage:
Nominal 600 VDC
Range 385 – 780 VDC
SD 8 Operating Voltage:
Range 420 – 720 VDC
Auxiliary Voltage:
Nominal 28 VDC
Range ±1.5 percent
A-C Power:
APS Inverter Output 460 Vac/3 phase
120 Vac/single phase
Range ±10 percent
Propulsion Inverter Output: 550 Vac, phase
Variable Voltage
Variable Frequency
7.8 Vehicle Performance

LRV performance is defined for operations on dry level tangent track, AW2 loading for
acceleration performance and AW3 loading for deceleration performance, over the specified
range of wheel wear, with no significant wind. OCS voltage shall be at the nominal 750 Vdc
for propulsion. In braking, the braking system shall perform as specified at any line voltage
within the specified range.
Dry track conditions are defined as those conditions where the actual coefficient of adhesion
is at least 25 percent without sanding.
7-10 March 2014

7.8.1 Acceleration Requirements

All acceleration requirements shall be met for all car weights from AW0 to AW2.
The low-floor LRV shall be able to produce tractive effort for a full average acceleration rate of
0.44 m/s2 (0.89 mphps) ±5 percent from standstill to 88.5 km/h (55 mph) to a most accurate
value matching the current average acceleration rate of the existing San Diego 7 and SD8
vehicles.
The maximum acceleration rate shall be of 1.14 m/s2 (2.55 mphps) ±5 percent.
The full initial acceleration rate may decrease linearly from AW2 to AW4 down to a value
determined by the multiplication of the specified rate times the ratio of the AW2 weight to the
AW4 weight.
Software adjustable parameters shall be provided to enable the specified tolerance to be

obtained. During acceleration, the variations in instantaneous acceleration rate shall not
exceed ±0.045 meter per second squared (±0.10 mphps).
An acceleration rate of no greater than 0.135 m/s2 (0.3 mphps) shall be available to the
operator at the minimum acceleration position of the master controller. This minimum rate
requirement shall apply over a vehicle speed range from zero to at least 32 km/h (20 mph).
The time required to reach a vehicle speed of 80 km/h from standstill on level, tangent, dry
track, with the vehicle loaded to AW2 conditions, shall not exceed 35 seconds.
The time required to cover a distance of 2,000 meters on level, tangent, dry track, from
standstill, with the vehicle loaded to AW2 conditions, shall not exceed 113 seconds.
The time required to cover a distance of 2,000 meters on a uniform 2 percent up-grade,
tangent, dry track, from standstill, with the vehicle loaded to AW2 conditions, shall not exceed
124 seconds.
The time required to cover a distance of 2,000 meters on a uniform 4 percent up-grade,
tangent, dry track, from standstill, with the vehicle loaded to AW2 conditions, shall not exceed
142 seconds.
7.8.2 Speed Requirements

Maximum operating speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
7.8.3 Deceleration Requirements

7.8.3.1 Service Brake
The service brake effort shall predominantly be produced by the dynamic brake system with
friction brake support on the center truck blended in as needed at passenger loads higher
than AW2.
All deceleration requirements shall be met for all speeds 88.5 km/h (55 mph) and for all car
weights from AW0 to AW3. Brake effort ramp-up when initiating braking from maximum
7-11 March 2014

speed shall replicate the equivalent characteristic of the existing SD100 (SD6) and short S70
(SD7) and ultra-short S70 (SD8) US vehicles when coupled.
The deceleration rate(s) shall be automatically adjusted to equal the performance of any
existing SD100 (SD6) and short S70 (SD7)/S70 US vehicle it is coupled to, without the need
for operator intervention. For friction brake, the variations in the average and instantaneous
deceleration rate shall be ±15 percent and ±20 percent, respectively.
Operating as a single car or a pure LRV consist only, the LRV shall produce the maximum
deceleration rate.
The fade-out speed of the dynamic brake system shall be 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with a smooth
transition from dynamic to friction brake. The friction brake system shall provide the final
stopping (and holding) force.
The average service brake deceleration rate shall be 1.34 m/s2 (3 mphps).
The maximum deceleration rate shall be 1.4 m/s2 (3.13 mphps).
A deceleration rate of no greater than 0.135 m/s2 (0.3 mphps) shall be available to the
operator at the master controller minimum brake position.
During deceleration, the variations in instantaneous deceleration rate shall not exceed ±0.10
mphps between 88.5 km/h (55 mph) and 4.83 km/h (3 mph).
In the event of dynamic brake failure, the friction brake system (exclusive of magnetic track
brakes) of an AW3 loaded vehicle shall be capable of executing one stop from 88.5 km/h (55
mph). This stop shall be a full service brake application with all dynamic brakes cut out.
The friction brake system shall be capable of sustaining an additional stop, (following the
friction brake sequence in the immediately preceding paragraph, after maximum acceleration
to maximum speed followed by immediate braking) without damage to the system or
maximum disc temperature to be reached or exceeded.
The brake system shall then have the capacity to provide friction brake only deceleration
rates with an empty car operating at the recommended (limited) top speed to the end of the
line, making all station and safety stops and then be able to return to the maintenance facility
making only the necessary safety stops without overheating the brakes.
The speed limit for operations with a failed dynamic brake system shall be recommended by
the Contractor, but shall be no less than 40 km/h (25 mph).
The application of friction brake force shall be adjusted for slip control.
7.8.3.2 Emergency Brake

The commanded master controller emergency brake application shall use the combined
effort of the magnetic track brakes, the sanding system, and the “blended” dynamic brake
system (i.e., the primary use of the dynamic brake system on the power trucks and the friction
brake system on the center truck).
7-12 March 2014

The emergency brake force shall be corrected for slip-slide conditions to produce the shortest
possible stopping distance.
The controls shall be interlocked to produce a retrievable stop.
Magnetic track brakes and sanding shall automatically cease 10 seconds after the vehicle is
at “zero speed.”
Emergency brake rates shall be identical to those of MTS’s existing SD100 (SD6), short and
S70 (SD7), and ultra-short /S70 (SD8) US vehicles, but in no case less than required by
CPUC G.O. 143B, Section 4.
7.8.3.3 Parking Brake

The parking brake shall be capable of holding a vehicle loaded to AW4 on the steepest grade
(7 percent) with a margin of safety of at least 20 percent.
7.8.4 Towing Requirements

A fully functioning train shall be capable, with no damage to its equipment, of towing various
combinations of up to four dead vehicles at AW3, with up to four live vehicles at AW3 from
any point in the LRT system to the next passenger station, and then continue at AW0 to the
nearest end of the line at reduced performance. An inoperative train is defined as a dead
train. Due to the reduced adhesive weight, the acceleration rate can be reduced to the limits
required to operate in accordance with the track characteristics. The deceleration rate can
also be reduced, but not to be less than the safe braking rate. Under slippery track conditions,
sanding may be used to make the actual adhesion at least equal to the adhesion required by
either the positive tractive force during the propulsion mode, or the negative tractive force
during the braking mode.
7.8.5 Jerk Limit

Under all normal operating conditions, the rate of change of vehicle acceleration or
deceleration shall be limited to 1.34 m/s3 (3 mphpsps) ±10 percent.
Rate change requests less than the jerk limit shall follow the command signal within required
accuracy limits.
The jerk rate limit specified shall apply to all normal power and service braking applications
and not be exceeded due to reapplications of power and braking when controlled by the
spin/slide system.
Release of power when traversing overhead primary power isolation gaps need not be jerk
limited; however, reapplication of power must be jerk limited.
Emergency brake applications and track brake applications shall not be jerk limited.
7.8.6 Wheel Slip/Slide Protection

A system shall be provided to detect and control wheel spin and slide on each car, on a per
truck basis, whether random or synchronous. The spin/slide protection system shall be
7-13 March 2014

designed for fail-safe operation such that a spin/slide system failure must not prevent the
application of braking at any level demanded.
The efficiency of the spin/slide system shall be at least 75 percent on a slippery track with an
adhesion coefficient of 10 percent, when operating with friction brake only in either service
braking or emergency braking.
The spin/slide protection system shall be functional under all acceleration and all dynamic
and friction braking commands except Panic Brake. Failure of any component in the
spin/slide system shall not, after an allowance of 3 seconds for failure detection, reduce the
brake effort.
The spin/slide protection system shall operate to minimize wheel spin and damage to wheels
from sliding, consistent with minimizing stopping distance.
The spin/slide system shall monitor all axle or wheel speeds and shall detect slides or spins
by evaluation of axle/wheel speed differences and acceleration/deceleration rate levels.
7.8.7 Load Weight System

A load measuring system shall be provided to produce real time signals proportional to the
car loading (AW0 to AW43) for both the propulsion (including dynamic braking) and friction
braking systems (except track braking). Accuracy of the load measuring system shall allow
compliance with car acceleration and braking requirements indicated above. The load
calculation basis shall be motor torque and vehicle acceleration.
Failure of the load weighing system shall not result in acceleration or braking tractive efforts
less than provided for a minimum car weight nor greater than provided for a maximum car
weight.
7.8.8 Mode Change Dead Times

Mode change dead times shall be as follows:
• Power to brake mode change times not to exceed 500 ms;

• Brake to power mode change time not to exceed 600 ms;
• Total mode change time for power to coast plus coast to brake not to exceed 500
ms;
• Mode change time for brake to coast plus coast to power not to exceed 600 ms.
The dead time in command transitions from coast to either dynamic brake or power shall not
exceed 250 ms, from the generation of the new command signal. These times shall be
measured from the last (minimum) measurable point of the former variable to 10 percent of
the final value of the latter variable.
All measurements shall be of system outputs such as current or braking effort and not vehicle
acceleration or deceleration. These times do not include operator reaction time. Propulsion
and brake software shall allow adjustments to dead times in order to better match the existing
fleets of SD100 (SD6), short S70 (SD7), and ultra-short /S70 (SD8) US vehicles.
7-14 March 2014

7.9 Car Body

The car body shall be constructed of low alloy high tensile (LAHT) steel. All exterior surfaces
of the LAHT steel shall be primed and painted. All interior metal surfaces shall be coated with
a primer for corrosion protection. Vehicle end caps may be fabricated using molded
fiberglass.
7.9.1 Strength Requirements

The yield strength of all structural members shall withstand a uniform vertical load of AW3
minus AW0 with at least a 50 percent margin.
The vehicle shall withstand a static compression end load of two times AW0 acting along the
longitudinal centerline of the vehicle and distributed at about the center of the anticlimber.
The combined stresses from the above vertical load and the above static compression end
load shall not cause any deformation in any part of the car body and shall not exceed 90
percent of the yield value of the material used. Each anticlimber shall have at least three ribs.
7.9.2 Roof
The roof sheathing and structure shall be capable of supporting without any permanent
deformation concentrated loads of at least 73 kg (250 lbs.), as would be applied by a person
walking on the roof. Areas adjacent to the pantograph shall support concentrated loads of at
least 227 kg (500 lbs.s.).
A roof mat shall be installed on the roof to provide an anti-slip walking surface. In addition, an
electrically insulated area on the roof, under and around the pantograph mounting, shall be
installed to provide a safe working area for maintenance personnel.
7.9.3 Jacking and Hoisting Provisions

The vehicle shall be equipped with jacking and hoisting provisions. The vehicle may be
jacked as a unit. Each body section may be jacked separately, with the body bending at the
articulation section(s). The maximum angle of bending of the articulation shall not exceed 3
degrees. Any combination of diagonal jacking shall not cause any structural or cosmetic
damage.
Jacking pads shall be provided for:

• Portable jacks;
• In-floor hoists;
• The articulation.
Jacking at the anti-climber positions shall be permitted. The vehicle design shall include
provisions for re-railing the center truck.
7.9.4 Wheelchair Accommodations

Provisions shall be made to comply with the latest ADA requirements.
7-15 March 2014

7.10 Couplers and Draft Gear

7.10.1 Mechanical Couplers
Couplers shall automatically couple on contact within a gathering range of 76 mm (3 in) and
with a maximum of 8 degrees of total rotational mismatch. Couplers shall withstand AW0 car
coupling at speeds up to 4.8 km/h (3 mph) without automatic release or damage.
The coupler system shall withstand a buff or draft load of 79.38 metric tons (175,003 lbs.)
with no permanent deformation.
7.10.2 Draft Gears

At buff or draft loads above 68.04 metric tons (150,003 pounds), draft gears shall collapse to
allow the anticlimbers to meet while absorbing the moment resulting from the load.
7.10.3 Electrical Couplers

Spring-loaded silver-plated contacts, which are redundant on each side of the coupler, shall
carry all necessary electrical signals from car to car. Electrical couplers shall use a mirror
image configuration such that any end of any car can be coupled to any end of any other car.
Electrical coupler heads shall be protected by weatherproof covers, which shall automatically
swing clear when a coupling is initiated.
7.11 Operator’s Cab

There shall be two completely functional operator’s cabs per car. Trainline control shall permit
only one cab to act as the active controlling cab in a train-consist.
The operator’s cab shall be of a design based on appropriate human factors. The operator’s
cab dimensions shall ensure safe and optimal operator performance for operators in the
range of the 5th to 95th percentile of the general population, both female and male.
7.11.1 Operator’s Console

The operator’s console shall contain all controls and annunciators to safely operate the train.
7.11.2 Bypass and Cutout Switches

One panel within each operator’s cab shall contain sealed safety bypass switches that shall
permit manual operation of the train in the event of failure of major subsystems. An adequate
annunciation shall be provided to clearly indicate to the operator which bypass switch is in a
bypass position.
7.12 Passenger Doors

There shall be four passenger doors per side in each car. Door operators shall be electrically
operated. The door opening function shall be interlocked with the propulsion and brake
systems, such that motion is not permitted when any door in a train consist is not fully closed,
and such that brakes are applied when the door opening function is enabled by the operator
or any door in a train consist is not fully closed.
7-16 March 2014

7.12.1 Normal Operation

Doors shall normally be opened individually by passenger-operated push-buttons, after
release (enable function) by the train operator after the train stops at a station. The operator
shall normally control the closing of the doors. In addition, the operator shall have the
capability of controlling opening and closing of the doors on either side of the train.
7.12.2 Emergency Operation

An emergency manual door release shall be provided near each door.
Activation of the emergency door release device shall unlock the door for manual opening,
prevent motion, and place the train in an irretrievable full service brake application. In
addition, any attempt to activate an emergency door release device in motion shall reapply
closing power to the door at that location in order to prevent its manual opening.
7.13 Air Comfort System

The air comfort system shall include heating, ventilating, and air conditioning to assure
passenger comfort in the operating environment. The air comfort system shall be equipped
with a single control unit. Maximum interior relative humidity shall not exceed 55 percent.
Except in layover mode where the ventilation shall not be used, ventilation shall be provided
all the time to ensure that a minimum comfortable amount of fresh air is delivered to the
vehicle.
The heating system shall include overhead and floor heaters in the passenger compartment,
and cab heaters in the operator’s cabs. The heating system shall be designed to maintain the
interior temperature around 20 degrees C (68 degrees F). The heating system shall also be
provided with a “layover” mode. In the layover mode, a selected number of floor heaters shall
be used to maintain the interior temperature around 13 degrees C (55 degrees F). In the
layover mode, the car interior temperature shall be controlled by a separate layover
thermostat. Heated surfaces which may come in contact with passengers shall not exceed
51.7 degrees C (125 degrees F). With an exterior ambient temperature of 23 degrees C (73
degrees F) to 35 degrees C (95 degrees F), the air conditioning system shall maintain the
vehicle interior temperature between 23 degrees C (73 degrees F) and 26 degrees C (78
degrees F). With exterior temperatures above 35 degrees C (95 degrees F), the vehicle
interior temperature shall be at least 9 degrees C (48 degrees F) lower than the outside
temperature. The air conditioning units shall be mounted on the vehicle roof and may be
individually controlled by the single air comfort control unit.
7.14 Lighting System

The lighting system includes all interior and exterior lights, with the exception of annunciator
lights. LED lighting shall be provided for all interior and cab applications and where
commercially available, for all exterior applications.
7-17 March 2014

7.14.1 Interior Lighting

The passenger compartment shall be lit by continuous fluorescent lighting fixtures, which
shall not extend into the operator’s cabs. The operator’s cabs shall be lit by separately
controlled lamps.
7.14.2 Exterior Lighting

All exterior lights shall be trainlined for proper illumination and identification at night.
The vehicle shall be equipped with three headlights, two taillights and three stoplights at each
end. The center headlight shall be a 200-watt PAR 56 or equivalent railroad lamp. The
stoplights shall operate at approximately 150 percent of the intensity of the taillights.
For joint freight/LRV operation, exterior lighting shall be in compliance with the requirements
agreed upon between SANDAG and FRA.
7.14.3 Emergency Lighting

The emergency lights shall be all exterior lights, all cab lights, all lights above the doors, and
25 percent of the interior lights. The emergency lights shall remain functional for at least 60
minutes in the event of a failure of the auxiliary power supply using battery power back-up.
7.15 Auxiliary Electrical Equipment

7.15.1 Power Collection
Power from the overhead contact system shall be collected by a roof-mounted pantograph
which uses a double shoe arrangement of proven service design. The double shoe
arrangement shall include a spring loaded suspension. A lateral load of 65 pounds (29.50 kg)
on the pantograph shoe axis with the pantograph at the maximum operating height shall not
cause the shoe to deflect more than 1.5 inches (38 mm). The pantograph shall be mounted
as close as possible from the center of the vehicle to minimize lateral movement under all
track conditions. A breakaway design shall be used so that the pantograph is sacrificial to the
overhead wire in case of snagging.
The pantograph shall be raised by a spring, with an appropriate damping device to minimize
bouncing.
The upward contact force shall be approximately 7.25 kilograms (16 pounds). The
pantograph shall be electrically lowered and latched. An electrically released lock-down
mechanism shall be provided to prevent movement of a locked pantograph.
Means shall be provided to manually release the lock-down mechanism, and raise, lower,
and latch the pantograph from inside the vehicle if electrical power is not available. The
pantograph design shall include provisions for clearing ice from the OCS. The pantograph
may be unpowered while clearing ice.
7.15.2 Auxiliary Power Supply

A variable duty cycle static inverter shall be provided to develop 3 phase 60 Hz 208/120 V
auxiliary power from the 750 Vdc primary power supply. The voltage regulation shall be within
7-18 March 2014

±5 percent, and the frequency shall be maintained within ±5 Hz. Alternatively, the voltage-to-
frequency ratio should be maintained within ±1 percent at all loads. Capacity shall be sized to
handle worst case loads for any season or operating conditions with an additional 10 percent
margin.
7.15.3 Low-Voltage DC Power Supply

A nominal 37.5 Vdc low-voltage power supply (LVPS) shall be provided to power systems
and subsystems controls, exterior lighting and annunciators, and door operators. In addition,
the LVPS shall also maintain the storage battery charge. Output of the LVPS shall be
regulated within ±10 percent from zero to full load.
7.15.4 Storage Battery

A nominal 28.5 Vdc, nickel-cadmium battery shall be provided to initially start the vehicle and
to power emergency loads during failures of the LVPS or when the primary 750 Vdc power is
lost. The capacity shall be sufficient to power emergency loads for at least 1 hour of
operation.
7.15.5 Emergency Loads

Emergency loads are defined as follows:
• Emergency lighting;
• Door control and drives for five cycles;
• Communications and signaling equipment;
• Propulsion and braking controls (including hydraulic pumps);
• Trainline controls;
• Track brakes during five emergency stops from 55 mph;
• Pantograph control for three down/up cycles of the pantograph;
• Coupler control for three couple/uncouple operations;
• Operator’s console indicators, cab lighting, controls, annunciators, and interlocks;
Warning devices for five operations.
7-19 March 2014

Chapter 8.0 – LRV Maintenance Facilities
8.0 LRV MAINTENANCE FACILITIES

8.1 General
SANDAG/MTS has existing maintenance facilities including yard and maintenance.
However, it was determined that a design criteria should be established for potential future
application or where improvements to existing facilities were necessitated. Therefore the
criteria established in this section are for application to design of new facilities or extensive
non-maintenance improvements to existing facilities only.
8.2 Design Codes and Standards

This entire section deals with design of structures, surfaces, infrastructure, and track and their
associated components. Structural codes are listed below; however all track related design
shall be in accordance with the codes and standards as provided in Chapter 3, Trackwork.
8.2.1 Building Code
Design requirements for maintenance buildings shall comply with the most current edition of
the following:
• California Uniform Building Code (UBC);

• Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC);
• National Electrical Code (NEC);
• National Electrical Safety Code;
• Uniform Plumbing Code;
• National Fire Protection Association (NFPA);
• American National Standard Code for Elevators;
• American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI);
• Americans with Disabilities Act;
• All applicable local codes and standards.
8.2.2 Permitting
As a State chartered agency SANDAG/MTS is exempt from obtaining local building permits.
This does not exempt SANDAG/MTS from conforming to applicable codes or inspection of
facilities by properly certified inspectors. It is SANDAG/MTS’s basic policy for building
construction to conform to established codes and standards regardless of any exemption that
may apply. As with codes, required or desirable permits should be identified as early as
possible in the design process, preferably in the Basis of Design for the facility. However, the
designer should be prepared to develop a submittal package to all permitting agencies should
the request be made at SANDAG/MTS’s discretion.
8-1 March 2014

8.3 Basic Design Process

8.3.1 Basis of Design Statement
The basis of design shall cover all aspects dealing with the planning of yard and maintenance
layouts. Thorough consideration must be given to requirements concerning all aspects of
maintenance and operations being utilized within the yard and maintenance facilities,
including the following:
• Maintenance and repair;

• System central control;
• Yard and facility control;
• Storage;
• Security;
• Personnel.
8.4 Yard and Shop Facilities

Yard and shop facilities primarily serve the following functions:
• Storage for revenue vehicles, maintenance equipment and supplies;

• Inspection, service and maintenance of revenue vehicles;
• Repair of components removed from revenue vehicles;
• Operator reporting and dispatch;
• Miscellaneous maintenance and support services.
8.4.1 Daily Service

Daily service tasks are generally performed at night and include:
• Visual inspection of the running gear, lights and car body;

• Interior cleaning;
• Exterior cleaning.
8.4.2 Running Repair
Running repair tasks generally require less than one shift (8 hours) to complete and do not
require lifting of heavy components. Running repair may be performed on a three-shift
schedule. Running repair tasks would include:
• Minor repairs;
• Scheduled inspections;
8-2 March 2014

• Component change out;

• Lubrication;
• Testing.
8.4.3 Heavy Repair
Heavy repair tasks are generally major repairs and overhauls, scheduled inspections and
component change-outs that require more than one shift or require the use of vehicle hoists,
cranes or other special machine tools to complete.
8.4.4 Yard Operations
Maximum flexibility is to be provided. Direct access from the mainline to the storage tracks is
desirable. A run-around bypass track separate from the makeup and storage tracks is
desirable for nightly servicing and movement of LRV’s into and out of the shop.
8.4.5 Yard Layout
Basic guidelines for developing the yard layout are as follows:
• Direct access from the mainline to the storage tracks is required;

• A yard run-around track separate from make-up and storage tracks is desirable for
nightly service, and access to shop tracks;
• Double ended storage tracks are desirable for maximum flexibility and to reduce
revenue movements;
• A double throat lead track from the mainline to the storage yard is desirable because
the simultaneous receiving and dispatching of trains is possible. Complete blockage
of the throat during a turnout failure is eliminated;
• Minimum radius on yard tracks is 100 feet (car minimum turning radius is 82 feet);
• Loop track is desirable for maximum operational flexibility;
• Storage tracks shall be constructed to allow sufficient space for maintenance
operations;
• Storage tracks shall ideally be sized to accommodate six light rail vehicles (common
denominator for 2 and 3-car consists);
• Paved service aisles between storage tracks;
• Parking for personnel as close as possible to work areas in controlled areas;
• Space shall be provided as necessary for storage of miscellaneous materials and
equipment;
• Yard lighting adequate for operations to be performed safely;
• Access roads to servicing yard and service aisles;
• Life safety requirement for emergency vehicle access to storage yard.
8-3 March 2014

8.4.6 Lighting
All exterior lights shall meet external use requirements and be equipped with photo sensor
control switches.
8.4.6.1 Building Lighting

The transit system is a 24-hour per day operation. Therefore adequate lighting is essential
for night time operations. Interior lighting for the buildings shall be in conformance with state
building codes. Fluorescent or LED lights to be used inside. Exterior lighting shall provide
sufficient illumination for safety of personnel and visual perception of security cameras.
Entrance and exit gates and building access points shall be adequately illuminated to allow
clear sight of security mechanisms such as card readers and/or key pads.
8.4.6.2 Vehicle Storage Lighting

Lighting shall be sufficient to cover all areas of vehicle storage with the minimal amount of
light standards in accordance with the illumination plan. Lighting shall be of the high intensity
discharge (HID) type. The main lighting for the vehicle storage shall be by high mast lighting
standards 80 ft. or higher equipped with a multiple high bay light fixture luminaire ring and
power cable connection for raising and lower of the luminaire ring during maintenance.
8.4.6.3 Illumination Plan

An illumination plan shall be submitted prior to the start of final design showing source
locations and probable illumination levels in the field of areas to be lighted. This plan shall be
the basis for completing the lighting design plans. Lighting design plans shall be overlaid with
civil, structural, and utility plans and all conflicts shall be resolved.
8.5 Vehicle Storage

The yard shall provide for storage of the LRV fleet.
8.5.1 General
The storage layout should efficiently provide for enough space to accommodate all vehicles
plus sufficient room for maneuverability, and all building locations with room for expansion.
Storage circulation shall provide for easy movement of vehicles through ingress and egress
points from active guideways, and to and from the storage to the maintenance building
minimizing reverse movements. It is desired to have more than one connection from active
guideways to the storage area.
Vehicle service, maintenance, and storage areas shall be secured by 10 feet high minimum
perimeter fencing. Fence locations shall be subject to all clearance requirements indicated in
Chapter 3, Trackwork.
8-4 March 2014

8.5.2 Storage Capacity
Storage capacity shall be consistent with SANDAG/MTS requirements for future expansion.
Layout of storage area should be as uniform as possible providing ease of access by
personnel and clear view of all vehicles from the control tower.
8.5.3 Parking and Service Roads
Parking shall be evaluated and located based on concentration of work force and
accessibility needs. In facilities housing high concentrations of personnel parking shall be
located adjacent to or in close proximity to the facility depending on accessibility and
clearance requirements.
Service road layout shall be in coordination with SANDAG/MTS. Designer shall consider the
following:
• Accessibility requirements;
• Safety;
• Clearances;
• Line of sight for driver.
Service lanes shall be clearly delineated. In addition, signage shall be provided specifically in
areas where service roads cross mainline track or highly active track.
Fire lanes shall also be incorporated into service lane layout and be reviewed and approved
by the City Fire Marshall.
8.6 Maintenance
8.6.1 General
The purpose of the maintenance facilities is to provide essential space, machinery and
services to accomplish required maintenance for transit vehicles, wayside equipment,
components and electronic equipment. Assignment of maintenance is spread among two
areas: one major repair and one inspection preventive maintenance and general repairs.
The allotment of work is based on the relative shop sizes, personnel, equipment, degree of
complexity, and availability of vehicles for scheduled service.
Maintenance shall include all structures and facilities required for maintaining and operating
the vehicles and the system. Basic facilities required shall include the following:
• Maintenance and repair shop;

• Paint booth;
• Central control;
• Operational offices.
8-5 March 2014

Architectural elements such as colors, fabrics, finishes, textures, and furniture shall be
covered under secondary design submittals and shall be as approved by SANDAG/MTS.
In addition, all civil, mechanical, structural, and electrical design shall be included in the
design and shall be in accordance with all applicable codes, standards, and regulations.
8.6.2 Vehicle Maintenance
8.6.2.1 General Criteria

General criteria for the vehicle maintenance facility layout shall be as follows:
• Proximity to active guideways and storage area to minimize movements and

accelerate emergency repairs;
• Run-through tracks, for LRTs, and pass-through bays, for buses, in the building area
to provide efficient flow of vehicles;
• Grouping related maintenance and cleaning activities to simplify supervision and
work flow;
• Space for one vehicle on apron adjacent to each shop by;
• Internal shop circulation and proximity of support activities;
• Adequacy and type of heavy lifting equipment, and its relationship to vehicle service;
• Requirements for special component handling equipment, such as transfer turntables
which require excessive space;
• Layout and sizes of material storage areas;
• Shop operating and work scheduling procedures;
• The tasks of the shop are oriented toward the repair of vehicles and, as such, repair
shops shall be designed to service individual vehicles;
The following general requirements have been established for the service shop. These
requirements shall be reviewed and expanded as required by SANDAG/MTS:
• Complete vehicle overhaul including all body and propulsion repairs;

• Pantograph platform to service, remove or replace car pantograph;
• Exchange of trucks or bodies;
• Extensive modifications;
• Minor repair of miscellaneous system equipment;
• New vehicle acceptance and preparation;
• Preventive maintenance;
8-6 March 2014

Support areas for the vehicle maintenance facility shall include the following:
• General shop work area;

• Areas for various minor welding, sheet metal, grinding and sanding, and small parts
painting;
• Spare parts storage;
• Battery room;
• Truck assembly stand;
• Wheel truing;
• Wheel and axle service area;
• Tire storage and service area;
• Motor/engine repair;
• Electronic repairs;
• Foreman /Shop Supervisor facilities – general work areas, and receiving and
shipping including loading docks.
8.6.3 Machinery and Equipment
There are many different types of machinery and equipment available for consideration in the
design of a maintenance facility. In general, it is recommended that the selection of the
machinery and equipment to be installed be based on:
• Satisfying the operation and maintenance requirements and policie

• s of the facility;
• Reducing overall operating cost and particularly manpower requirements.
8.6.4 Vehicle Cleaning Area

Interior car cleaning is done in the storage track area for LRVs.
8.6.4.1 Daily Interior Cleaning

Cars which have been in revenue service require inside cleaning or sweeping daily. Trash
shall be removed, light stains or spills cleaned, and graffiti shall be removed using non-toxic
and non-flammable materials whenever possible. These functions shall be performed in the
storage yard or at a designated location on the wash or sanding track.
8.6.4.2 Heavy Interior Cleaning

Heavy cleaning shall be accomplished as the car is scheduled for shop inspections. A
servicing platform is required for these purposes. The servicing platform shall consist of a
cleaning bay with step level platforms along both sides. A portable wet vacuuming system is
desirable for ease of washing the floors, walls and mats on the vehicle.
8-7 March 2014

8.6.4.3 Exterior Vehicle Wash

An automated drive-thru vehicle wash system shall be provided for vehicles coming off the
active guideways into the storage area. Layout of the wash facility shall allow for easy
access for supply and service vehicles and personnel maintaining the facility.
The wash facilities shall provide for the following basic elements unless otherwise directed by
the Project Manager:
• Protective siding;
• Use of recycled wash water;
• Spot-free rinse;
• Blower system;
• Concrete running surface through wash facility and, at a minimum, four car lengths
beyond the exit side;
• An LRV exit route;
• Drip pads along the track that lead to car wash end drains;
• Discharge system inclusive of Oil/Water Separator;
• Barrier separation, with cover, of wash equipment from operating wash area;
• LRT – The vehicle wash should be located far enough off of the mainline to allow a
four car train to queue up and not interfere with the mainline and allow for additional
trains to still enter the yard.
Configuration of Work Area

• Support the requirements of the washer;
• Area between wash and rinse shall be equipped with vehicle step height platforms to
provide an area to perform heavy interior cleaning and daily cleaning;
• Area between wash and rinse shall contain a pit between the rails to allow
underbody steam cleaning.
Utility Requirements
• Support the requirements of the washer;

• Overhead lighting;
• 230 V single phase and 480 V three phase receptacles;
• Recycle equipment to meet local codes;
• 720 V DC catenary through the building;
• Area floor drainage;
• Hose bibs;
8-8 March 2014

• Compressed air;
• Pit lighting.
Special Equipment
• Package train washer complete with all recycle and chemical equipment;
• Steam generator.
Design Requirements
• Locate on a through track with good access to storage yard;

• Sanding operation may be on same track as train washer, but not in the wash and
rinse areas;
• Isolation of electrical systems.
8.6.5 Maintenance Inspection
At scheduled intervals, each vehicle shall receive a thorough inspection of all systems.
Inspection bays shall be provided to handle inspections. The inspection bays can also be
used for minor repair work on the control, brake, and other systems.
Pits shall allow inspection of trucks, couplings, draft gear and equipment under the car;
portable steps shall allow good access to equipment boxes and-car steps under the side of
the car; moveable platforms shall be provided for access into the cars from the pit, and high
level platforms are positioned for pantograph inspections.
8.6.5.1 Configuration of Floor and Workspace
• Rail mounted on pedestals;

• Continuous pits 5 feet deep with utility services listed below;
• Pantograph inspection and vehicle roof access platforms;
• Vehicle floor/step entry level platforms;
• Ramps or material lift and steps from rail level aisles to pit floor.
8.6.5.2 Utility Requirements
• Compressed air;
• Area floor drainage;
• Area overhead lighting to provide 35 to 45 foot-candles, at all work locations;
• Pit and platform lighting;
• 230 V single phase and 480 V three phase receptacles available at all work levels;
• Catenary through the building w/isolation switches and status indicators;
8-9 March 2014

• 720 V DC power and portable cable;

• Extra large high pressure hose bib for shop housekeeping.
8.6.5.3 Special Equipment
• Eye wash (throw away type recommended);

• Portable step platforms;
• Automated wheel measure device in yard entrances.
8.6.5.4 Design Requirements
• Should be on through tracks;

• Emergency shower.
8.6.6 Minor (Running) Repairs
The inspection process may turn up defects in the various subsystems on the cars. Where
possible, these defects shall be corrected in the inspection bay or minor repair area by
replacement of components. As an example: an improper function in the propulsion
subsystem may be repaired by replacement of a faulty electronic circuit card.
Repairs in these bays shall be limited to those which are simple and can be accomplished in
a few hours so that the tracks are not tied up longer than 4 hours. Where the repair problem
requires a longer period or special equipment, the repair shall be scheduled and the
individual car moved to the appropriate repair track equipped with the required equipment.
8.6.7 Major Repairs and Component Change Out
Major repairs include heavy repairs such as truck repair, overhauls, renovating undercar
structures, refurbishing interiors, etc. These repairs are scheduled and a computerized
management information system has been established to maintain records of maintenance
performed on each car. These repairs normally take an extended period of time.
8.6.7.1 Configuration of Floor and Work Space
• Floor at top-of-rail elevation;

• Covered LRV hoist equipment pits per hoist equipment manufacturer’s requirements;
• Sufficient clear space beside work positions to bring a forklift;
• Portable scaffolding to reach roof equipment.
• Overhead lighting to provide 35 to 45 foot-candles at all work locations, provide

skylights wherever possible;
• 230 V single phase and 480 V three phase receptacles;
8-10 March 2014

• Compressed air;
• Pit and area floor drainage with oil/water separators;
• Hose bib;
• DC power for LRV auxiliary equipment;
• Steam cleaning area for special equipment.
• LRV hoist equipment;

• Jib crane to remove roof equipment;
• Truck transfer and turntable;
• Monorail cranes over heavy maintenance tracks.
• Should have access to wheel truing area.
8.6.8 Wheel Truing
Periodically, flat spots on wheels must be removed and the rims and flanges restored to
correct profile. This task is accomplished is by a wheel truing machine — an underfloor wheel
lathe or milling machine with the added capability of resurfacing the brake discs.
8.6.8.1 Configuration of Floor and Work Space
• Floor at top-of-rail elevation except at machine pit;

• Two level pit per manufacturer’s requirements;
• Floor grating at shallow pit (control station) level.
• Overhead lighting to provide 35 to 45 foot-candles at all work locations and 20 foot-

candles for safety lighting;
• Pit lighting;
• 110/480 V receptacles;
• Compressed air;
• Pit and area floor drainage;
• Hose bib;
• Wheel truing machine utility services;
• Contact wire interlocked with machine power;
8-11 March 2014

• Network connections;
• Pit and work area lighting.
• Underfloor wheel truing machine;

• Chip removal system.
• Should be accessible from truck shop;

• Should be on a dedicated track.
8.6.9 Vehicle Body Repairs
The amount of vehicle body work shall depend upon the accident rate and severity of
accidents encountered by the fleet. Minor damage can be repaired by mechanics using
replacement panels and body patches. Heavy damage repairs may be contracted out to
others.
8.6.9.1 Configuration of Work Area for Minor Damage Repairs
• Floor at rail height;

• Floor area adjacent to rails shall support the use of portable jacks and car body
stands.
• Compressed air;
• Overhead lighting to provide 35 to 45 foot-candles at work locations;
• Welding machine outlets with 230/480 V receptacles;
• Hose bib for shop housekeeping.
• Portable jacks;
• Portable body stands;
• Portable welding machine;
• Portable acetylene/oxygen cut-off unit;
• Power tools.
8-12 March 2014


Should be adjacent to the crane and tool shed.
8.6.10 Vehicle Painting
Initially the requirements for painting shall depend on the type and material of the vehicle
chosen, and upon the accident rate and severity of accidents. With the exception of minor
hand painting, all car body painting may be done at existing SANDAG/MTS facilities.
8.6.10.1 Paint Booth

The paint booth is located in the maintenance area adjacent to the main repair area. Special
ventilation, heating and lighting are required. All major painting of vehicles and large vehicle
parts will be performed in this facility. Sufficient space shall be provided for a single vehicle
placement and all equipment and maneuverability required to paint the entire vehicle. For
LRTs catenary equipment will not be required inside the facility. A high output of heated air
flowing lengthwise of the paint booth is necessary to remove paint spray. High velocity
exhaust fans are required as well. Shielded fluorescent lighting shall be located continuously
from floor to ceiling along the full length of the paint booth. An area directly outside the paint
booth entrance shall be provided large enough to store two vehicles for painting preparation.
8.6.11 Vehicle Sanding
The sanding facility should be located in the normal flow of traffic from the main tracks to the
storage tracks, or from the storage tracks to the train washer.
8.6.11.1 Configuration of Work Area
• Floor area should be at rail height;

• Area should be fully enclosed;
• Pit between tracks.
• Support sanding system requirements;

• Overhead lighting;
• 720 V DC catenary through operation;
• Area drainage with sand traps;
• Pit lighting;
• 110/230 V receptacle.
• Sand receiving track and/or truck delivery road;
8-13 March 2014

• Pneumatic sanding system consisting of:

– Receiving tank – 24 ton capacity;
– Transfer tank;
– Elevated delivery tanks;
– Associated piping and controls;
– Automatic shut-off nozzle for each drop.
• Should be easily accessible from storage tracks and in the normal traffic flow to the
train washer and inbound inspection;
• Should be configured to sand four vehicle storage boxes in one stop.
8.6.12 Material Storage
The main provision for material storage shall be designated within the maintenance facility in
close proximity to the vehicle maintenance shops. In addition, provision shall be made within
the facility for material storage, either for material not suitable for exterior storage or for
temporary storage of material brought in from outside.
8.6.13 Central Maintenance, Operations and Administrative Areas
Central Maintenance, Operations and Administrative Areas should be provided for the
following groups: MOW, Facilities, Training Room, LRV, Operations, Security, and Revenue.
8.6.13.1 Shop Ancillary Areas

The following shop ancillary areas are required for operation of the system:
• Foreman’s Office;
• Operator Reporting & Dispatch;
• Fare Inspector Reporting and Dispatch;
• Rail Operations Center;
• Operators Ready Room;
• Operators Quiet Room;
• Vending Machines & Kitchenette;
• Break Room;
• Transportation Locker Rooms & Toilets;
• General Office;
• Management Offices.
8-14 March 2014

8.6.14 Building Support Facilities
Support facilities shall generally be applied to all maintenance facilities, however inclusion or
exclusion of specific support facilities in regards to an individual maintenance facility shall be
at the discretion of the SANDAG/MTS Engineering.
8.6.14.1 Administrative Offices

The main administrative functions of transit operations will be centralized at the Metropolitan
Transit System’s (MTS) main office. Other satellite offices will be provided in individual
facilities as directed by the SANDAG/MTS Engineering.
8.6.14.2 Training/Conference Rooms

Provide sufficient space to accommodate a “U” shape or rows of desk configuration. Multiple
power outlets with adequate power source shall be provided for presentation equipment such
as computers, projectors, televisions, sound system, and monitors. Additional items shall
include storage area(s), white board, screen, and cork board.
8.6.14.3 Utility Power Room

Maintenance facilities will require an independent power distribution system for all non-
catenary power elements. Provision for emergency backup power shall be included.
8.6.14.4 Personnel Facilities

To include the following:
• Lunch/break rooms with counter space, sink, vending machines, and eating areas;
• Separate toilets, showers, and locker rooms for men and women;
• Classrooms and training areas;
• First aid and recovery/rest room;
• Chemical shower and eye wash.
8.6.14.5 Janitor Facilities

Provide adequate space for storage of cleaning materials and equipment.
8.6.15 Central Maintenance and Operations Area
Central maintenance and operations area is to provide essential space for direct
management of Maintenance of Way and field operations. Physical space for unit
supervisors and general clerical shall also be provided.
8-15 March 2014

8.6.16 Central Control Area
A communications area should be provided of sufficient size to support the total system,
including the radio communications control area, operations dispatch and security, with
master control board or panel, radio equipment, television surveillance monitors and public
address systems for yard and shops. Within this same area will be the central control
equipment room which houses all communication, radio, surveillance, fiber optic, and
telephone networking and processing equipment for the entire LRT system. This shall be an
environmentally controlled room with an argon fire suppressant system. Detailed capabilities
to be incorporated into the design of Central Control shall be in accordance with the Basis of
Design Report.
8.6.17 Emergency System Requirements
8.6.17.1 Safety Systems
• Fire Alarm System;

• Door Control;
• Essential power receptacles;
• Grounding.
8.6.18 Utility Needs
• Eye wash station water and drainage;

• UPS power;
• Generator back-up power for 120 Vac essential loads;
• Essential lighting including exit signage;
• Sprinkler system water;
• Diesel fuel with day tank;
• Telephone lines;
• Electrical 12.46 KV power;
• LN gas.
8.6.19 Building Systems
• Telephone System;
• Computer network;
• HVAC;
• PA System;
• Room for expansion
8-16 March 2014

8.6.20 Security
TBD
8-17 March 2014

LRT Design Criteria PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LRT Design Criteria PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LRT Design Criteria PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main considerations for drainage in LRT trackways?

What are the main considerations for drainage in LRT trackways?

What utility requirements must be addressed for LRT?

What utility requirements must be addressed for LRT?

LRT Design Criteria

THIS DOCUMENT WAS THE CURRENT

2.4.1 Shelters ................................................................................................ 2-5

3.0 TRACKWORK ............................................................................................................ 3-1

March 2014 iii

3.1.8 Vertical Clearance .............................................................................. 3-16

3.4.1.2 Cross Ties ......................................................................... 3-30

4.9.1 Substation Site Selection.................................................................... 4-11

4.11.2.2 Foundation Design ............................................................ 4-27

March 2014 vii

5.0 RAILWAY SIGNALING AND INDICATION SYSTEMS ............................................... 5-1

5.3.2.9 Track Circuits .................................................................... 5-14

6.0 COMMUNICATIONS ................................................................................................... 6-1

March 2014 iii

6.4.1.2 Non-Vital WAN .................................................................. 6-36

6.9 Visual Messaging System .............................................................................. 6-53

7.3.2.1 Weight Distribution .............................................................. 7-3

March 2014 vii

7.10.3 Electrical Couplers ............................................................................. 7-16

viii March 2014

8.4.6.2 Vehicle Storage Lighting ..................................................... 8-4

8.6.9.2 Utility Requirements .......................................................... 8-12

Figure 2-1. – Typical Station Dimensioning (Plan View) .......................................................... 2-4

xii March 2014

Terms and Abbreviations

List of Terms Acronyms

March 2014 xiii

Terms and Abbreviations (Continued)

List of Terms Acronyms

xiv March 2014

Terms and Abbreviations (Continued)

List of Terms Acronyms

xvi March 2014

1.0 SPECIAL CIVIL WORK FOR LRT

1.1.2 Drainage Discharge in Trackway

1.1.2.1 Ballasted Track

Underdrains and perforated underground drains are discouraged as a system to collect

1-1 March 2014

1.1.2.2 Grade Crossings

1.2 Utilities for LRT

1.2.2 Design Requirements for Underground Utilities

1.2.3 Risk Assessment

1.3 Right-of-Way Requirements for LRT

1-2 March 2014

1.3.1.2 Height Limits

1.3.1.3 Lateral Limits

Tracks placed in streets shall have a minimum right-of-way width of 27 feet.

1.3.2 Aerial Construction

1.3.3 Drainage and Utility Easements

1.3.4 Traction Power Substations

1-3 March 2014

1.3.5 Right-of-Way Safety

1.3.5.2 Means of Egress

1-4 March 2014

2.0 LRT STATIONS